Standard Technical Specification

Section V.
Technical Specifications
Standard
Technical
Specifications
For LLDA-LISCOP Subproject
Laguna Lake Development Authority

2007
Page 1
Section V. Technical Specifications
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This Standard Technical Specifications for LISCOP-LLDA as part of the bidding documents for works under
procurement, adapts internationally accepted standards and appropriate national standards as specified to
ensure full consistency of the requirements and definition of terms with the provisions of the General
Conditions of Contract (GCC) of the Philippine Bidding Documents for Infrastructure Projects consistent with
R.A. 9184 (GPRA) otherwise known as “Government Procurement Reform Act of 2003”.
The initiatives taken by the Project was largely referred from the DPWH Standard Specifications, Volume I &
II (Blue Book 2004v) which was adapted for LISCOP sub-projects and LLDA initiated environmental sub-
projects, acknowledging the significant contribution of the agency to public works. LGUs undergoing DAED on
the pipeline are planned to be issued of this Specifications for the sub-project by LLDA before finalizing for
use by the Project.
As far as possible, it is the intent to standardized the requirements for materials, equipment, quality and
workmanship across sub-projects for implementation. The definitions on measurements and quantification in
relation to the pay items have been clearly stated with the BOQ and the Plans to avoid conflicts during
construction.
Finally, my appreciation is reserved for all those currently helping to make the Project a direct contribution in
advancing our collective contribution to environment protection.
(SGD.) DOLORA N. NEPOMUCENO

Officer-in-Charge, as Project Manager-LISCOP
Laguna Lake Development Authority
Page 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ITEM NO. Page No.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS ..................................................................................................2
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS ...........................................................................10
VOLUME I TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS for HIGHWAYS, DRAINAGE,
SLOPE PROTECTION and Miscellaneous Structures ......................................................11
PART A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................12
PART B EARTHWORK ...............................................................................................17
ITEM 100 - CLEARING AND GRUBBING .................................................................17
100.1 Description .....................................................................................................17
100.2 Construction Requirements............................................................................17
100.3 Method of Measurement ................................................................................18
100.4 Basis of Payment............................................................................................19
ITEM 102 - EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING AND DISPOSAL ............................19
102.1 Description .....................................................................................................20
102.4 Basis of Payments ..........................................................................................22
PART C - SUB-BASE AND BASE COURSE...................................................................23
ITEM 200 AGGREGATE SUB-BASE COURSE .......................................................23
200.1 Description .....................................................................................................23
200.2 Material Requirements...................................................................................23
200.4 Method of Measurement ...............................................................................25
200.5 Basis of Payment............................................................................................25
PART D – SURFACE COURSES......................................................................................26
ITEM 311 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT .................................26
311.1 Description .....................................................................................................26
311.5 Basis of Payment............................................................................................47
PART E SUPER STRUCTURES CONSTRUCTION .................................................49
ITEM 403 METAL STRUCTURES ............................................................................49
403.1 Description .....................................................................................................49
403.2 Materials Requirements .................................................................................49
403.5 Basis of Payment............................................................................................54
ITEM 404 REINFORCING STEEL.............................................................................55
404.1 Description .....................................................................................................55
404.5 Basis of Payment............................................................................................56
Page 3
ITEM 405 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE ....................................................................57

405.1 Description .....................................................................................................57
405.3 Sampling and Testing of Structural Concrete ................................................58
405.4 Production Requirements ...............................................................................59
405.6 Basis of Payment............................................................................................63
ITEM 409 - WELDED STRUCTURAL STEEL..............................................................63
409.1 Description .....................................................................................................63
409.2 Materials Requirements .................................................................................63
409.4 Measurement and Payment ............................................................................70
ITEM 411 PAINTINGS................................................................................................70
411.1 Description .....................................................................................................70
411.4 Preparation of Surfaces ..................................................................................73
411.5 Measurement and Payment ............................................................................75
PART F DRAINAGE AND SLOPE PROTECTION.........................................................76
ITEM 500 PIPE CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS...............................................76
500.1 Description .....................................................................................................76
500.5 Basis of Payment............................................................................................79
ITEM 502 MANHOLES, INLETS AND CATCH BASINS .......................................81
502.1 Description .....................................................................................................81
502.5 Basis of Payment............................................................................................83
502 (3) Catch Basins Each............................................................................................83
ITEM 505 RIPRAP AND GROUTED RIPRAP ..........................................................84
505.1 Description .....................................................................................................84
505.5 Basis of Payment............................................................................................86
ITEM 506 STONE MASONRY .........................................................................................87
506.1 Description .....................................................................................................87
506.3 Construction Requirement .............................................................................87
506.5 Basis of Payment............................................................................................89
PART G MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES .............................................................90
ITEM 604 - FENCE ............................................................................................................90
604.1 General ...........................................................................................................90
Page 4

604.5 Basis for Payment ..........................................................................................91
ITEM 605 – ROAD SIGN ..................................................................................................92
605.1 Description .....................................................................................................92
ITEM 611 – TREE PLANTING .........................................................................................94
611.1 Description .....................................................................................................94
611.3 Construction Method......................................................................................95
611.5 Basis of Payment............................................................................................96
PART H MATERIALS DETAILS ................................................................................97
700 HYDRAULIC CEMENT...............................................................................97
703 AGGREGATES .............................................................................................97
704 MASONRY UNITS .......................................................................................98
709 PAINTS..........................................................................................................99
710 REINFORCING STEEL AND WIRE ROPE..............................................101
711 FENCE AND GUARDRAIL .......................................................................102
712 STRUCTURAL METAL.............................................................................103
714 WATER........................................................................................................104
VOLUME II TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION for BUILDINGS, FLOOD CONTROL,
LANDFILL and Miscellaneous Structures .......................................................................106
PART A - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................108
PART B - EARTHWORK .........................................................................................108
800 Clearing and Grubbing.................................................................................108
801 Removal of Structures and Obstruction .......................................................108
802 Excavation....................................................................................................108
803 Structural Excavation...................................................................................108
804 Embankment ................................................................................................108
PART C - PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE WORKS..............................109
ITEM 900 - REINFORCED CONCRETE .....................................................................109
900.1 Description ...................................................................................................109
900.2 Materials Requirements ...............................................................................109
900.3 Construction Requirements.........................................................................111
900.4 Method of Measurement ..............................................................................114
900.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................114
ITEM 901 MASONRY WORKS ...............................................................................115
901.1 Description ...................................................................................................115
901.2 Materials Requirements ...............................................................................115
901.3 Construction Requirements..........................................................................116
901.5 Basis for Payments.......................................................................................117
PART D - BUILDINGS FINISHES...........................................................................118
ITEM 1000 TERMITE CONTROL WORK ....................................................................118
1000.1 Description ...................................................................................................118
1000.2 Material Requirements.................................................................................118
Page 5
1000.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................120

ITEM 1001 STORM DRAINAGE AND SEWERAGE SYSTEM ..................................120
1001.1 Description ...................................................................................................120
1001.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................122
ITEM 1002 PLUMBING..................................................................................................123
1002.1 Description ...................................................................................................123
1002.2.3 Approved Alternate Pipes and Fittings ................................................123
1002.4 Method of Measurement .............................................................................129
1002.5 Basis of Payment.........................................................................................129
ITEM 1003 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY WORKS ....................................................130
1003.1 Description ...................................................................................................130
1003.5 Basis of Payments ........................................................................................133
ITEM 1004 HARDWARE................................................................................................134
1004.1 Description ...................................................................................................134
1004.5 Basis of Payment.........................................................................................137
ITEM 1005 STEEL WINDOWS ......................................................................................138
1005.1 Description ...................................................................................................138
1005.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................140
ITEM 1006 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES..................................................................140
1006.1 Description ...................................................................................................140
1006.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................143
ITEM 1007 ALUMINUM GLASS DOORS ....................................................................143
1007.1 Description ...................................................................................................143
1007.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................145
ITEM 1008 ALUMINUM GLASS WINDOWS ..............................................................145
1008.1 Description ...................................................................................................145
Page 6
1008.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................147

ITEM 1009 JALOUSIE WINDOWS ...............................................................................147
1009.1 Description ...................................................................................................147
1009.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................148
ITEM 1010 WOODEN DOORS AND WINDOW ..........................................................149
1010.1 Description ...................................................................................................149
1010.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................153
ITEM 1011 ROLLING UP DOORS.................................................................................154
1011.1 Description ...................................................................................................154
1011.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................155
ITEM 1012 GLASS AND GLAZING..............................................................................156
1012.1 Description ...................................................................................................156
1012.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................158
ITEM 1013 CORRUGATED METAL ROOFING ..........................................................159
1013.1 Description ...................................................................................................159
1013.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................162
ITEM 1014 PREPAINTED METAL SHEETS................................................................163
1014.1 Description ...................................................................................................163
1014.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................165
ITEM 1015 CLAY ROOF TILES ....................................................................................165
1015.1 Description ...................................................................................................165
1015.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................167
ITEM 1016 WATERPROOFING.....................................................................................167
1016.1 Description ...................................................................................................167
1016.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................171
Page 7
ITEM 1018 CERAMIC TILES.........................................................................................171

1018.1 Description ...................................................................................................171
1018.2 Material Requirement ..................................................................................171
1018.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................173
ITEM 1020 VINYL FLOOR TILES ................................................................................173
1020.1 Description ...................................................................................................173
1020.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................175
ITEM 1021 CEMENT FLOOR FINISH ..........................................................................175
1021.1 Description ...................................................................................................175
1021.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................177
ITEM 1027 CEMENT PLASTER FINISH ......................................................................178
1027.1 Description ...................................................................................................178
1027.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................179
ITEM 1030 ACCOUSTICAL CEILING..........................................................................180
1030.1 Description ...................................................................................................180
1030.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................180
ITEM 1032 PAINTING, VARNISHING AND OTHER RELATED WORKS...............181
1032.1 Description ...................................................................................................181
1032.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................185
PART E ELECTRICAL WORKS ..............................................................................186
ITEM 1100 CONDUITS, BOXES & FITTINGS.........................................................186
1100.1 Description ...................................................................................................186
1100.3 Construction Requirement ...........................................................................186
1100.6 General Specifications .................................................................................188
1100.7 Specifications on:.........................................................................................188
ITEM 1101 WIRES AND WIRING DEVICES ...........................................................189
1101.1 Description ...................................................................................................189
Page 8
1101.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................191

ITEM 1102 POWER LOAD CENTER, SWITCHGEAR AND PANELBOARDS ........192
1102.1 Description ...................................................................................................192
1102.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................194
PART F MECHANICAL WORKS............................................................................196
ITEM 1200 – AIR CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEM....................196
1200.1 Description ...................................................................................................196
1200.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................198
ITEM 1201 - WATER PUMPING SYSTEM..................................................................200
1201.1 Description ...................................................................................................200
1201.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................201
ITEM 1204 - WELL WATER SYSTEM..........................................................................202
1204.1 Description ...................................................................................................202
1204.1.2 Geologic Mapping and Water Point Inventory .....................................202
1204.1.3 Georesistivity Survey............................................................................202
1204.1.6 Well Drilling .........................................................................................202
1204.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................209
PART G MISCELLANEOUS WORKS .....................................................................211
ITEM 1300 – SANITARY LANDFILL ...........................................................................211
1300.1 Description ...................................................................................................211
1300.5 Basis for Payment ........................................................................................220
List of Tables
Table 200.1 Grading Requirements................................................................................................................. 23

Table 311.1 Grading Requirements for Fine Aggregates ............................................................................... 27
Table 311.2 Grading Requirements for Coarse Aggregate............................................................................. 27
Table 311.3.22 Strength Deficiencies of Concrete Specimens....................................................................... 45
Table 311.3.22 Payment Adjustments per Deficiency in Average Thickness Per Lot.................................... 47
Table 405.1- Grading Requirements for Coarse Aggregate ........................................................................... 57
Table 714.1 Acceptance Criteria for Questionable Water Supplies ............................................................. 104
Table 900.1 Maximum Permissible Water-Cement Ratios for Concrete (Method 1) ................................... 112
Page 9
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transport Officials

ACI American Concrete Institute
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction, Specification
ASTM American Standard for Testing of Materials
AWS American Welding Society
BOQ Bill of Quantities
DAED Detailed Architectural and Engineering Design
ESWMA Ecological Solid Waste Management Act of 2000
PSA Product Standards Agency
LGU Local Government Unit
LISCOP Laguna de bay Institutional Strengthening and Community Participation Project
Page 10
VOLUME I TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS for HIGHWAYS, DRAINAGE, SLOPE PROTECTION and

Miscellaneous Structures
VOLUME I
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
for
DRAINAGE, SLOPE PROTECTION and

MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES
Page 11
GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
Part A
PART A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A1.1 Scope of Work
This section shall include the mobilization and demobilization of Contractor’s plant, equipment,
materials and employee to the site; construction of Contractor’s office and facilities; compliance with
the contract requirements; providing and maintaining the facilities for the Engineer.
This section shall include the furnishing of labor, materials, transportation, tools, supplies, plant,
equipment and appurtenances to complete satisfactorily the construction of the proposed subproject.
A1.2 Mobilization and Demobilization
The Contractor upon receipt of the Notice to Proceed shall immediately mobilize and transport his
plant, equipment, materials and employees to the site and demobilize or remove the same at the
completion of subproject.
A1.3 Contractor’s Field Office and Facilities
A1.3.1 Field Office
During the performance of the contract, the Contractor shall construct and maintain a field office and
facilities at the site of the work at which he or his authorized agent shall be holding office at all times,
while the work is in progress. The location, dimensions and layout of such field office shall be subject
to the approval of the Engineer and local authorities having jurisdiction thereof. Construction
shanties, sheds and temporary facilities provided as required for the Contractor’s convenience shall
be maintained in good condition and neat appearance including finishes as required by the Engineer.
Also, a medical room together with all necessary supplies shall be located in the Contractor’s field
office. The medical room could be a building or room designated and used exclusively for this
purpose.
A1.3.2 Temporary Light and Power
The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary electrical service including installation of
temporary power and lighting within the construction site. The electrical services shall be adequate in
capacity to supply power to construction tools and equipment without over-loading the temporary
facilities and shall be made available to supply power, lighting and construction operations of all
trades. All temporary equipment and wiring for power and lighting shall be in accordance with the
applicable provisions of the local governing codes. At the completion of the construction work all
temporary wiring, lighting, equipment and devices shall be removed.
A1.3.3 Temporary Toilet
Page 12
The Contractor shall provide and maintain in sanitary condition enclosed toilet for the use of all
construction personnel located within the contract limits, complete with fixtures, water and sewer
connections and all appurtenances. Installation shall be in accordance with ESWMA and all
applicable codes and regulations of the local authorities having jurisdiction thereof. Upon completion
of the work, temporary toilet and their appurtenances shall be removed.
A1.3.4 Temporary Water Service
The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary water supply service, complete with necessary
connections and appurtenances. Installed water supply shall be used as a source of water for
construction purposes subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall pay the cost of
operation, maintenance and restoration of the water system. All temporary water service including
equipment and piping shall be removed upon completion of the work and all worn out and damaged
parts of the permanent system shall be replaced and restored in first class condition equal to new.
A1.3.5 Security
The Contractor shall provide sufficient security in the construction site to prevent illegal entry or work
damaged during nights; holidays and other period when work is not executed; and during working
hours. The Contractor shall take ample precautions against fire by keeping away flammable
materials, and ensure that such materials are properly handled and stored. Fires shall not be built
within the area of construction, except when permitted by the Engineer.
A1.4 Facilities for the Engineer
The Contractor shall provide and maintain a field office and temporary utilities for the Engineer to
include but not limited to the following items:
A1.4.1 Field Office
The field office shall be located at a site designated by the Engineer. The field office shall be of
wooden construction with 19mm thick plywood flooring and 12mm thick plywood sidings and
partitions. Roofing shall be a gauge 26 corrugated G.I. sheet. It shall be furnished with at least office
table one (1) drafting table, chairs, one (1) blackboard, filing cabinet, shelves for plans and office
supplies. The field office shall be elevated to avoid flooding during wet season. The field office shall
be used by the Engineer for the duration of construction.
A1.4.2 Site Utilities
Site utilities including potable water supply, light and power, drainage, temporary toilet, temporary
fence, barricades and refuse collection.
A1.5 Compliance with Contract Requirements
A1.5.1 Control of on Site Construction
Prior to the start of any definable feature of the work, the Contractor must perform the necessary
inspection to include as follows:
(1) Review of Contract Documents to make sure that materials, equipment and products have
been tested, submitted and approved.
(2) Physical examination of materials and equipment to assure its conformity to the specifications,
plans, shop drawings and other data.
Page 13
(3) As soon as the work has been started the Contractor shall conduct initial inspection to check
and review the workmanship in compliance with the contract requirements for a particular item
of work.
(4) The Contractor shall perform these inspections on a regular basis to assure continuing
compliance with the contract requirements until completion of a particular type of work.
A1.5.2 Preconstruction Meetings
Prior to the start of construction, Contractor’s material men or vendors whose presence is required,
must attend preconstruction meetings as directed for the purpose of discussing the execution of
work.
A1.5.3 Progress Meetings
Progress meetings shall be called upon by the following for the purpose of discussing the
implementation of the work.
(1) When called upon by the Engineer or the Procuring Entity or his representative for the
purpose of discussing the execution of work. Contractor’s material men or vendors whose
presence is necessary or requested must attend progress meetings. Each of such meeting
shall be held at the time and place designated by the Engineer or his representative.
Decisions and instructions agreed on these meetings shall be binding and conclusive on the
contract. Minutes of this meeting shall be recorded and reasonable number of copies shall be
furnished to the Contractor for distribution to various materials men and vendors involved.
(2) The Contractor may also call for a progress meeting for the purpose of coordinating,
expediting and scheduling the work. In such meeting Contractor’s material men or vendors,
whose presence is necessary or requested are required to attend.
A1.5.4 Progress Reports and Construction Logbook
The Contractor shall prepare and submit progress reports to the Engineer weekly and every 30 days
for each month from the start of the sub-project’s mobilization up to its completion, showing the work
completed, work remaining to be done, the status of construction equipment, labor, and materials at
the site and deliveries. Construction logbook shall be available showing actual works in daily basis
including other information such as weather conditions, truck delivery, visitors, etc.
A1.5.5 Survey Data
The Contractor shall layout his work from established based lines and bench mark indicated in the
drawing and shall be responsible for all measurement in connection therewith. The Contractor shall
furnish, at his own expense, all stakes, templates, platforms, equipment, tools, materials and labor
as may be required in laying out any part of the work, out of established base lines and bench
mark. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain and preserve all stakes and other
marks unit he is authorized to remove them. If such marks are destroyed by the Contractor through
his negligence prior to the authorized removal, they shall be replaced at the expense of the
Contractor.
A1.5.6 Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall submit and furnish shop drawings and samples accompanied with transmittal
forms in accordance with the provision of the Conditions of Contract. The term “Shop Drawings” as
Page 14
used herein shall be understood to include detailed design calculations, construction drawings, lists,
graphs, and others.
(1) Transmittal forms shall be filled out in typewritten or ink with no alterations or interlineations
unless initialed and dated before submittal. Shop drawings shall be submitted as the same
size as the contract drawings when practicable, but in no case it shall exceed dimension of
the contract drawings. The Contractor shall make preliminary check of all shop drawings for
compliance with the contract documents and he shall stamp each print with statement of
compliance with the requirements. The contractor may authorize his supplier to deal directly
with the Engineer with regard to shop drawings, however ultimate responsibility for accuracy
and completeness in the submittal shall remain with the Contractor.
(2) The said shop drawing and transmittal shall be submitted at a time sufficiently early, to allow
review of the same by the Engineer and to accommodate the rate of construction progress
required under the contract. The contractor shall submit print copies of shop drawings with
transmittal forms, and copies of brochures with transmittal forms, as required by the Engineer.
(3) Any shop drawings and samples, submitted not accompanied by transmittal forms or where all
applicable items on the forms are not completed will be returned for resubmittal. The Engineer
who will check and evaluate mentioned shop drawings will retain print copy for his file and
return the rest to the Contractor with notation. Returned shop drawings marked “No
Exceptions Taken” or “Make Corrections Noted”, means formal revision of said drawings
will not be required. If it is marked “Amend-Resubmit” or “Rejected-Resubmit”, the Contractor
shall revise said drawing and shall submit revised drawing to the Consultant.
(4) The Engineer shall process the submission and indicate the appropriate action on the shop
drawings and transmittal forms. Construction of an item shall not be commenced before the
Engineer has reviewed the pertinent shop drawing and returned it to the Contractor, marked
as mentioned above. Revisions indicated on shop drawing shall be considered as changes
necessary to meet the requirements of the contract drawings and specifications, and shall not
be taken as the basis of claims for extra work. The Contractor shall have no claim for
damages or extension of time due to any delay, resulting from having Contractors make the
required revisions, unless review by the Engineer was delayed beyond reasonable period of
time and unless the Contractor can establish that such delay in revision resulted in delay of
the project.
(5) Resubmittal procedure shall follow the same procedure as the initial submittal.
A1.5.7 Construction Photographs
The Contractor shall take photographs during the progress of the work once a month, all taken
where directed by the Engineer. At the completion of one project final photographs shall be taken by
the Contractor as directed by the Engineer. Two prints of each photographs shall be sent to the
Procuring Entity and one print to the Engineer The photographs shall be neatly labeled, dated, and
identified in a little box in the lower right hand corner, showing the date of exposure, project name,
location and direction of view.
All negatives and/or electronic copies shall be retained by the Contractor until completion of the work
at which time they shall become the property of the Procuring Entity.
A1.5.8 Cleaning-up
The Contractor shall at all times keep the construction area including storage area used by him free
from accumulations of waste material or rubbish. Upon completion of construction, the Contractor
Page 15
shall leave the work and premises in clean, neat and workmanlike conditions satisfactory to the
Procuring Entity.
A1.5.9 Documents to be Submitted
The following documents shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer and Procuring Entity
prior to final payment and before issuance of final certificate of payment in accordance with the
provisions of the Conditions of Contract.
(1) The guarantee required by the Conditions of Contract and any other extended guarantees
stated in the technical sections of the specifications.
(2) A set of As-Built drawings shall be submitted showing accurate record of changes or
deviations from the contract documents and the shop drawings indicating the work as actually
installed. Records shall be arranged in order, in accordance with the various sections of the
specifications and properly indexed with certifications of endorsement thereof, that each of the
revised print of the drawings and specifications are complete and accurate. Prior to the
application for final payment, and as a condition to its approval by the Engineer and the
Procuring Entity, the Contractor shall deliver the records, drawings, and specifications
arranged in proper order, indexed and endorsed as herein specified.
A1.6 Method of Measurement
Work prescribed in this Section shall be measured as follows:
(1) This item shall be quantified in term one (1) unit item to include the cost of construction of
Contractor and Engineer field office including its furniture and accessories.
(2) Cost incurred in providing and maintaining Contractor’s field office, temporary light and power,
temporary toilet, water and security services, including cost of mobilization and
demobilization, and cost incurred in the compliance of contract requirements shall not be
measured and paid separately, same shall be deemed to be included in the cost of other
items of work, as part of the Contractor’s construction overheads.
A1.7 Basis of Payment
The accomplished work item shall be paid for at the appropriate contract price of the particular pay
item shown in the Bill of Quantities which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing and maintaining such items.
Page 16
EARTHWORK
Part B
PART B EARTHWORK
ITEM 100 - CLEARING AND GRUBBING
100.1 Description
This item shall consist of clearing, grubbing, removing and disposing all vegetable and debris as
designated in the Contract, except those objects that are designated to remain in place or are to be
removed in consonance with other provisions of this Specification. The work shall also include the
preservation from injury or defacement of all objects designated to remain.
100.2 Construction Requirements
100.2.1 General
The Engineer will establish the limits of work and designate all trees, shrubs, plans and other things to remain.
The Contractor shall preserve all objects designated to remain. Paint required for cut or seared surface of
trees or shrubs selected for retention shall be an approved asphaltum base paint prepared especially for tree
pruning.
100.2.2 Clearing and Grubbing
All surface objects and all trees, stumps, roots and other protruding obstructions, not designated to remain,
shall be cleared and/or grubbed, including mowing as required, except as provided below:
(1) Removal of undisturbed stumps and roots and non-breakable solid objects with a minimum of 900mm (36
inches) below sub grade or slope of embankments will not be required.
(2) In areas outside of the grading limits of cut and embankment area, stumps and non-breakable solid
objects shall be cut off not more than 150mm (6 inches) above the ground line or low water level.
(3) In areas to be rounded at the top of cut slopes, stumps shall be cut off flush with or below the surface of
the final slope line.
(4) Grubbing of pits, channel changes and ditches will be required only to the depth necessitated by the
proposed excavation within such areas.
Except in areas to be excavated, stumps holes and other holes from which obstructions were removed shall
be backfilled with suitable material and compacted to the required density.
Page 17
If perishable material is burned, it shall be burned under the constant care of competent watchmen at such
times and in such a manner that the surrounding vegetation, other adjacent property, or anything designated
to remain on the right of way not be jeopardized. If permitted, burning shall be done in accordance with
applicable laws, ordinances, and regulations.
The Contractor shall use high intensity burning procedures, (i.e. incinerators, high stacking or pit and ditch
burning with forced air supplements) that produce intense burning with little or no visible smoke emission
during the burning process. At the conclusion of each burning session, the fire shall be completely
extinguished so that no smoldering debris remains.
In the event that the Contractor is directed by the Engineer not to start burning operations or to suspend such
operations because of hazardous weather conditions, material to be burned which interferes with subsequent
construction operations shall be moved by the Contractor to temporary locations clear of construction
operations and later, if directed by the Engineer, shall be placed on a designated spot and burned.
Materials and debris, which cannot be burned and perishable materials, may be disposed of by methods and
at locations approved by the Engineer, on or off the project. If disposal is by burying, the debris shall be
placed in layers with the material so disturbed to avoid nesting. Each layer shall be covered or mixed with
earth material by the landfill method to fill all voids. The top layer of material buried shall be covered with at
least 300mm (12 inches) of earth or other approved material and shall be graded, shaped and compacted to
present a pleasing appearance. If the disposal location is off the project, the Contractor shall make all
necessary arrangements with property owners in writing for obtaining suitable disposal locations, which are
outside the limits of view from the project. The cost involved shall be included in the unit bid price. A copy of
such agreement shall be furnished to the Engineer. The disposal areas shall be seeded, fertilized and
mulched at the Contractor’s expense.
Woody material may be disposed of by chipping. The wood chips may be used for mulch, slope erosion
control or may be uniformly spread over selected areas as directed by the Engineer. Wood chips used as
mulch for slope erosion control shall have a maximum thickness of 12 mm (1/2 inch) and faces not exceeding
3900 mm2 (6 square inches) on any individual surface area. Wood chips not designated for use under other
sections shall be spread over the designated areas in layers not to exceed 75 mm (3 inches) loose thickness.
Diseased trees shall be buried or disposed of as directed by the Engineer.
All merchantable timber in the clearing area, which has not been removed from the right of way prior to the
beginning of construction, shall become the property of the Contractor, unless otherwise provided.
Low hanging branches and unsound or unsightly branches on trees or shrubs designated to remain shall be
trimmed as directed. Branches of trees extending over the roadbed shall be trimmed to give a clear height of
6m (20 feet) above the roadbed surface. All trimming shall be done by skilled workmen and in accordance
with good tree pruning practices.
Timber cut inside the area staked for clearing shall be felled within the area to be cleared.
100.2.3 Individual Removal of Trees or Stumps
Individual trees or stumps designated by the Engineer for removal and located in areas other than those
established for clearing and grubbing and roadside cleanup shall be removed and disposed of as specified
under Subsection 100.2.2 except trees removed shall be cut as nearly-flush with the ground as practicable
without removing stumps.
100.3 Method of Measurement
Page 18
Measurement will be by one or more of the following alternate methods:
1. Area Basis – The work to be paid for shall be the number of hectares and fractions thereof acceptably
cleared and grubbed within the limits indicated on the Plans or as may be adjusted in field staking by the
Engineer. Areas not within the clearing and grubbing limits shown on the Plans or not staked for clearing
and grubbing will not be measured for payment.
2. Lump-Sum Basis – When the Bill of Quantities contains a Clearing and Grubbing Lump Sum Item; no
measurement of area will be made for such item.
3. Individual Unit Basis (Selective Clearing) The diameter of trees will be measured at a height of 1.4m (54
inches) above the ground. Trees less than 150 mm (6 inches) in diameter will not be measured for
payment.
When Bill of Quantities indicated measurement of trees by individual unit basis, the units will be
designated and measured in accordance with the following schedule of sizes.
Diameter at height of 1.4m Pay Item Description
Over 150 mm to 900mm Small

Over 900 mm Large
100.4 Basis of Payment
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 100.3 shall be paid for at the contract unit price
for each of the Pay Item listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities, which price and payment shall be
full compensation for furnishing all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work
prescribed in this Item.
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement
100 (1) Site Preparation Square meter

including clearing
and grubbing
100 (2) Individual Removal of Each

Trees, Small
100 (3) Individual Removal of Each

Trees, Large
ITEM 102 - EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING AND DISPOSAL
Page 19
102.1 Description
The Contractor shall perform all earthworks both for roadway, structures, drainage and borrow excavation and
the disposal of material in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades and
dimensions shown on the Plans or established by the Engineer.
102.2.1 General
When there is evidence of discrepancies on the actual elevations and that shown on the Plans, a pre-
construction survey referred to the datum plane used in the approved Plan shall be undertaken by the
Contractor under the control of the Engineer to serve as basis for the computation pf the actual volume of the
excavated materials.
All excavations shall be finished to reasonably smooth and uniform surfaces. No materials shall be wasted
without authority of the Engineer. Excavation operation shall be conducted so that material outside of the
limits of slopes will not be disturbed. Prior to excavation, all necessary clearing and grubbing in the area shall
have been performed in accordance with Item 100, Clearing and Grubbing.
The Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain all supports and shoring that may be required for the sides of
the excavations, and all pumping, ditching or other approved measures for the removal or exclusion of water,
including taking care of storm water and waste water reaching the site of the work from any source so as to
prevent damage to the work or adjoining property.
102.2.2 Conservation of Topsoil
Where provided for on the Plans or in Special provisions, suitable topsoil encountered in the excavation and
on areas where embankment is to be placed shall be removed to such extent and to such depth as the
Engineer may direct. The removed topsoil shall be transported and deposited in storage piles at locations
approved by the Engineer. The topsoil shall be completely removed to the required depth from any
designated area prior to the beginning of excavation or embankment work in the area and shall be kept
separate from other excavated materials for later use.
102.2.3 Utilization of Excavated Materials
All suitable material removed from the excavation shall be used in the formation of the embankment,
subgrade, shoulders, slopes, bedding and backfill for structures, and for other purposes shown on the Plans
or as directed.
The Engineer will designate as unsuitable those soils that can not be properly compacted in the
embankments. All suitable materials shall be disposed off as shown on the Plans or as directed without delay
to the Contractor.
Only approved materials shall be used in the construction of embankments and backfills. All excess material,
including rock and boulders that can not be used in embankments shall be disposed off as directed. Materials
encountered in the excavation and determined by the Engineer as suitable for topping, road finishing, slope
protection, or other purposes shall be conserved and utilized as directed by the Engineer.
102.2.4 Excavation of Ditches, Gutters, etc.
Page 20
All materials excavated from side ditches and gutters, channel changes, inlet and outlet ditches, and such
other ditches as may be designated on the Plans or staked by the Engineer, shall be utilized as provided in
Subsection 102.2.3.
The Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain all supports and shoring that may be required for the sides of
the excavations, and all pumping, ditching or other approved measures for the removal or exclusion of water,
including taking care of storm water and waste water reaching the excavation to prevent damage.
Ditches shall conform to the slope, grade, and shape of the required cross-section with no projections of
roots, stumps, rock, or similar matter. The contractor shall maintain and keep open and free from leaves,
sticks and other debris all ditches dug by him until final acceptance of the work.
102.2.5 Removal of Unsuitable Materials
Where the Plans show the bottom portion of the disposal cell bed to be selected, all unsuitable materials shall
be excavated to the depth necessary for replacement of the selected clay liner to the required compacted
thickness.
Where excavation to the finished graded section results in a subgrade or slopes of unsuitable soil, the
Engineer may require the Contractor to remove the unsuitable material and backfill to the finished graded
section with approved material. The Contractor shall conduct his operations in such a way that the Engineer
can take the necessary cross-sectional measurements before the backfill is placed.
The cost of excavation of material which is incorporated in the works or other areas of fill shall be deemed to
be included in the Items of work where the material is used.
For measurement purposes, surplus suitable material shall be calculated as the difference between the net
volume of suitable material required to be used in embankment or cover material corrected by applying a
shrinkage factor or swell factor in case of rock excavation, determined by laboratory tests to get its original
volume measurement, and the net volume of suitable material from excavation in the original position.
Separate pay items shall be provided for surplus common, unclassified and rock material.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the contract unit prices all costs of obtaining land for the
disposal of unsuitable or surplus material.
Page 21
102.4 Basis of Payments
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 102.3, shall be paid for the contract unit price for
each of the particular pay items listed below that are included in the Bill of Quantities which price and payment
shall be full compensation for the removal and disposal of excavated materials including all labor, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this item.
102 (1) Unsuitable Excavation m3

102 (2) Surplus Common
Excavation m3
102 (3) Surplus Rock Excavation m3
102 (4) Surplus Unclassified
Excavation m3
Page 22
SUB-BASEAND
BASECOURSES
Part C
PART C - SUB-BASE AND BASE COURSE
ITEM 200 AGGREGATE SUB-BASE COURSE
200.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing, placing, and compacting an aggregate sub-base course on a prepared
sub-grade in accordance with this specification and the lines, grades and cross sections shown on the Plans,
or as directed by the Engineer.
200.2 Material Requirements
Aggregate for sub base shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of crushed stone, crushed slag, or
crushed or natural gravel and filler of natural or crushed sand or other finely divided mineral matter. The
composite material shall be free from vegetation and lumps or balls of clay, and shall be of such nature that it
can be compacted readily to form a firm, stable sub-base.
The sub- base material shall conform to Table 200.1.
Table 200.1 Grading Requirements

Sieve Designation
Mass Percent Passing
Standard mm Alternative US Standard
50 2” 100
25 1” 55-85
9.65 3/8 40-75
0.075 No. 200 0-12
The fraction passing the 0.075 mm (No.200) sieve shall not be greater than 0.66 (two thirds) of the fraction
passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve.
The fraction passing the 0.425 (No.40 sieve shall have a liquid limit not greater than 35 and plasticity index
not greater than 12 as determined by AASHTO T 89 and T 90, respectively.
The coarse portion, retained on a 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve, shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding
50 by the Los Angeles Abrasion Tests as determined by AASHTO T 96.
The material shall have a soaked CBR value of not less than 25 percent as determined by AASHTO T 193.
The CBR value shall be obtained at the maximum true density as determined by AASHTO T 180, Method D.
Page 23
200.3.1 Preparation of Existing Surface
The existing surface shall be graded and finished as provided under Subsection 12.2, Sub-grade Preparation,
before placing the sub-base material.
200.3.2 Placing
The aggregate sub-base material shall be placed as a uniform mixture on a prepared sub-grade in a quantity,
which will provide the required compacted thickness. When more than one layer is required, each layer shall
be shaped and compacted before the succeeding layer is placed.
200.3.3 Spreading Compacting
When uniformly mixed, the mixture shall be spread to the plan thickness, for compaction.
Where the required thickness is 150 mm or less, the material may be spread and compacted in one layer.
Where the required thickness is more than 150 mm, the aggregates sub-base shall be spread and compacted
in two or more layers of approximately equal thickness, and the maximum compacted thickness of any one
layer shall not exceed 150 mm. All subsequent layers shall be spread and compacted in a similar manner.
The moisture content of sub-base material shall, if necessary, be adjusted prior to compaction by watering
with approved sprinkles mounted on trucks or by drying out, as required in order to obtain the required
compaction.
Immediately following final spreading and smoothening, each layer shall be compacted to the full width by
means of approved compaction equipment. Rolling shall progress gradually from the sides to the center,
parallel to the centerline of the road, and shall continue until the whole surface has been rolled. Any
irregularities or depressions that develop shall be corrected by loosening the material at these places and
adding or removing material until the surface is smooth and uniform. Along curbs, headers, and walls, and at
all places not accessible to the roller, the sub-base material shall be compacted thoroughly with approved
tampers or compactors.
If the layer of sub-base material, or part thereof, does not conform to the required finish, the Contractor shall,
at his own expense, make the necessary corrections.
Compaction of each layer shall continue until a field density of at least 100 percent of the maximum dry
density determined in accordance with AASHTO T 180, Method D has been achieved. In place density
determination shall be made in accordance with AASHTO T 191.
200.3.4 Trial Sections
Before sub-base construction is started, the Contractor shall spread and compact trial sections as directed by
the Engineer. The purpose of the trial sections is to check the suitability of the materials and the efficiency of
the equipment and construction method, which is proposed to be used by the Contractor. Therefore the
Contractor must use the same material, equipment, and procedures that he proposes to use for the same
main work. One trial section of about 500m2 shall be made for every type of material and/or construction
equipment/procedure proposed for use.
Page 24
After final compaction of each trial section, the Contractor shall carry out such field density tests and other
tests required as directed by the Engineer.
If a trial section shows that the proposed materials, equipment or procedures in the Engineer’s opinion are not
suitable for sub-base, the material shall be removed at the Contractor’s expense, and a new trial section shall
be constructed.
If the basic conditions regarding the type of material or procedure change during the execution of the work,
new trial sections shall be constructed.
200.3.5 Tolerance
Aggregate sub-base shall be spread with equipment that will provide a uniform layer, which when compacted
will conform to the designed level and transverse slopes as shown on the Plans. The allowable tolerance shall
be as specified hereunder.
Permitted variation from design

THICKNESS OF LAYER ±20mm
LEVEL OF SURFACE ±10mm
-20mm
Permitted SURFACE IRREGULARITY

MEASURED by 3m straight edge 20mm
CROSSFALL or CAMBER ±03%
LONGITUDINAL GRADE over 25m length ±01%
Aggregate Subbase Course will be measured by the cubic meter (m3). The quantity to be paid for shall be the
design volume compacted in-place as shown on the Plans, and accepted in the completed course. No
allowance will be given for materials placed outside the design limits shown on the cross-sections. Trial
sections shall not be measured separately but shall be included in the quantity of subbase herein measured.
The basis of payment shall be lump sum as shown on the bill of quantities under each item for the access
road with site improvement, Aggregate Subbase Course in the Bill of Quantities. This includes supply of
granular material as specified.
200 Aggregate Subbase cubic meter

Course
Page 25
SURFACE
COURSES
Part D
PART D – SURFACE COURSES
ITEM 311 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
311.1 Description
This item shall consist of pavement of Portland Cement Concrete, with or without reinforcement, constructed
on the prepared base in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades, thickness
and typical cross-section shown on the Plans.
311.2.1 Portland Cement
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 700 of ASTM, Hydraulic Cement. Only Type 1 Portland
Cement shall be used unless otherwise provided for in the Special Provisions. Different brands or the same
brands from different mills shall not be mixed nor shall they be used alternately unless the mix is approved by
the Engineer.
Cement, which for any reason, has become partially set or which contain lumps of caked cement will be
rejected. Cement salvaged from discarded or used bags shall not be used.
Samples of cement shall be obtained in accordance with AASHTO T 127.
311.2.2 Fine Aggregates
It shall consist of natural sand, stone screenings or other inert materials with similar characteristic, or
combinations thereof, having hard, strong and durable particles approved by the Engineer. Fine aggregate
from different sources of supply shall not be mixed or stored in the same pile nor used alternately in the same
class of concrete without the approval of the Engineer.
It shall not contain more than three mass percent of material passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200 sieve) by
washing nor more than one mass percent each of clay lumps or shale. The use of beach sand will not be
allowed without the approval of the Engineer.
If the fine aggregate is subjected to five cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test, the weighted loss shall
not exceed 10 mass percent.
Page 26
The fine aggregate shall be free from injurious amounts of organic impurities and if a color darker than the
standard is produced, it shall be rejected. However, when tested for the effect of organic impurities of strength
of mortar by AASHTO T 71, the fine aggregate may be used if the relative strength at 7 and 28 days is not
less than 95 mass percent.
The fine aggregate shall be well graded from coarse to fine and shall conform to Table 311.1.
Table 311.1 Grading Requirements for Fine Aggregates

Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing
9.5 mm (3/8 in) 100
4.75 mm (No. 4) 95-100
1.18 mm (No. 16) 45-80
0.300 mm (No. 50) 5-30
0.150 mm (No. 100) 0.10
311.2.3 Coarse Aggregate
It shall consist of crushed stone, gravel, blast furnace slag, or other approved inert materials of similar
characteristics, or combinations thereof, having hard, strong, durable pieces and free from any adherent
coatings.
It shall contain not more than one mass percent of material passing the 0.075mm (No. 200) sieve, not more
than 0.25 mass percent of clay lumps, nor more than 3.5 mass percent of soft fragments. If the coarse
aggregate is subjected to five cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test, the weighted loss shall not exceed
12 mass percent.
It shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 40 when tested by AASHTO T 96.
If slag is used, its density shall not be less than 1120kg/m3 (70 lb/cu.ft.). The gradation of the coarse
aggregate shall conform to Table 311.2. Only one grading specification shall be used from any source.
Table 311.2 Grading Requirements for Coarse Aggregate

SIEVE DESIGNATION MASS PERCENT PASSING
Standard Alternate US
Grading A Grading B Grading C
mm Standard
75.0 3 in 100 - -
63.0 2 ½ in 90-100 100 100
50.0 2 in - 90-100 95-100
37.5 1 ½ in 25-60 35-70 -
25.0 1 in - 0-15 35-70
19.0 3/4 in 0-10 - -
2.5 1/2 in 0-5 0-5 10-30
4.75 No. 4 - - 0-5
Page 27
311.2.4 Water
Water used in mixing, curing, or other designated applications shall be reasonably clean and free of oil, salt,
acid, alkali, grass or other substances injurious to the finished product. Water will be tested in accordance
with and shall meet the requirements of Item 714, Water. Water which is drinkable may be used without test.
Where the source of water is shallow, the intake shall be so enclosed as to exclude silt, mud, grass, or other
foreign materials.
311.2.5 Reinforcing Steel
It shall confirm to the requirements of Item 404, Reinforcing Steel. Dowel and tie bars shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M 31 or M 42, except that rail steel shall not be used for tie bars that are to be bent
and re-straightened during construction. Tie bars shall be deformed bars. Dowels shall be plain round bars.
Before delivery to the Site of work, one-half of the length of each dowel shall be painted with one coat of
approved lead or tar paint.
311.2.6 Joint Fillers
Poured joint fillers shall be mixed asphalt and mineral or rubber filler conforming to the applicable
requirements of Item 705, Joint Materials.
Performed joint filler shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 705 of ASTM. It shall be punched to
admit the dowels where called for in the Plans. The filler for each joint shall be furnished in a single place for
full depth and width required for the joint.
311.2.7 Admixtures
Air-entraining admixtures shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 154. Admixture should be added
only to the concrete mix to produce some desired modifications to the properties of concrete where
necessary, but not as partial replacement of cement.
311.2.8 Curing Materials
Cotton mats, burlap clothe, waterproof paper, liquid membrane forming compounds, or sheeting (film)
materials shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 708, Concrete Curing Materials and
Admixtures.
311.2.9 Calcium Chloride
It shall conform to AASHTO M 144, if specified or permitted by the Engineer.
311.2.10 Storage of Cement and Aggregate
All cements shall be stored, immediately upon delivery at the Site, in weatherproof building, which will protect
the cement from dampness. The floor shall be raised from the ground. The buildings shall be placed in
locations approved by the Engineer. Provisions for storage shall be ample, and the shipments of cement as
received shall be separately stored in such a manner as to allow the earliest deliveries to be used first and to
provide easy access for identification and inspection of each shipment. Storage buildings shall have capacity
for storage of a sufficient quantity of cement to allow sampling at least twelve days before the cement is to be
used. Bulk cement, if used, shall be transferred to elevated air tight and weatherproof bins. Stored cement
Page 28
shall meet the test requirements at any time after shortage when wrested is ordered by the Engineer. At the
time of use, all cements shall be free of lumps.
The handling and storing of concrete aggregates shall be such as to prevent segregation or the inclusion of
foreign materials. The Engineer may require that aggregates be stored on separate platforms at satisfactory
locations.
In order to secure greater uniformity of concrete mix, the Engineer may require that the coarse aggregate be
separated into two or more sizes. Different sizes of aggregates shall be stored in separate bins or in separate
stockpiles sufficiently remote from each other to prevent the material at the edges of the piles from becoming
intermixed.
311.2.11 Proportioning, Consistency and Strength of Concrete
The Contractor shall prepare the design mix based on the absolute volume method as outlined in the
American Concrete Institute (ACI) Standard 211.1 “Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for
Normal and Heavy Weight Concrete”.
It is the intent of this Specification to require approximately 9.0 bags of cement per cubic meter of concrete
based on a 40 kg per bag of cement. However, richer mixes may be used in order to meet the minimum
strength requirements. The Engineer shall determine from laboratory test of the materials to be used, the
cement content and the proportions of aggregate and water that will produce a workable concrete having a
slump of between 40 and 75 mm (1- ½ and 3 inches) if not vibrated or between 10 and 40 mm (1/2 and 1 ½
inches if vibrated, and a flexural strength of not less than 3.8 MPa (550 psi) when tested by the third point
method or 4.5 MPa (650 psi) when tested by the midpoint method; or a compressive strength of 24.1 MPa
(3500 psi) when tested at fourteen days in accordance with AASHTO T 97, T 177 or 22, respectively.
Slump shall be determined using AASHTO T 199.
The designer shall consider the use of lean concrete (econocrete) mixtures using local materials or
specifically modified conventional concrete mixes in base course and in the lower course of composite,
monolithic concrete pavements using a minimum of 75 mm (3 inches) of conventional concrete as the surface
course.
The mix design shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall be accompanied with certified test
data from an approved laboratory demonstrating the adequacy of the mix design. A change in the source of
materials during the progress work may necessitate a new design mix.
311.3.1 Quality Control of Concrete
1. General
The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality control of all materials during the handling, blending,
mixing and placement operations.
2. Quality Control Plan
Page 29
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a Quality Control Plan detailing his production control
procedures and the type and frequency of sampling and testing to insure that the concrete he produces
complies with the Specification. The Engineer shall be provided free access to recent plant production
records, and if requested, informational copies of mix design, material certifications and sampling and
testing reports.
3. Qualification of Workmen
Experienced and qualified personnel shall perform all batching or mixing operations for the concrete mix,
and shall be present at the plant and job site to control the concrete productions whenever the plant is in
operation. They shall be identified and duties defined as follows:
a. Concrete Batcher – The person performing the batching or mixing operation shall be
capable of accurately conducting aggregate surface moisture determinations and
establishing correct scale weight for concrete materials. He shall be capable of assuring that
the proportioned batch weight of materials is in accordance with the mix design.
b. Concrete Technician – The person responsible for concrete production control and sampling
and testing for quality control shall be proficient in concrete technology and shall have a
sound knowledge of the specifications as they relate to concrete production. He shall be
capable of conducting tests on concrete and concrete materials in accordance with these
specifications. He shall be capable of adjusting concrete mix designs for improving
workability and specification compliance and preparing trial mix design. He shall be qualified
to act as the concrete batcher in the batcher’s absence.
4. Quality Control Testing
The Contractor shall perform all sampling, testing and inspection necessary to assure quality control of
the component materials and the concrete.
The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the gradation of fine and coarse aggregates and for
testing the concrete mixture for slump, air content, water-cement ratio and temperature. He shall conduct
his operations so as to produce a mix conforming to the approved mix design.
5. Documentation
The Contractor shall maintain adequate records of all inspections and tests. The records shall indicate
the nature and number of observations made, the number and type of deficiency found, the quantities
approved and nature of any corrective action taken.
The Engineer may take independent assurance samples at random location for acceptance purposes, as
he deems necessary.
311.3.2 Equipment
Equipment and tools necessary for handling and performing all parts of the work shall be approved by the
Engineer as to design, capacity, and mechanical condition. The equipment shall be at the jobsite sufficiently
ahead of the start of construction operations to be examined thoroughly and approved.
1. Batching Plant and Equipment
Page 30
a. General – the batching plant shall include bins, weighing hoppers, and scales for the fine
aggregate and for each size of coarse aggregate. If cement is used in bulk, a bin, a hopper,
and separate scale for cement shall be included. The weighing hopper shall be properly
sealed and vented to preclude dusting operation. The batch plant shall be equipped with a
suitable non-resettable batch counter, which will correctly indicate the number of batches
proportioned.
b. Bins and Hoppers – Bins with adequate separate compartments for fine aggregate and for each
size of coarse aggregate shall be provided in the batching plant.
c. Scales – Scales for weighing aggregates and cement shall be of either the beam type or the
sprinkles-dial type. They shall be accurate within one-half percent throughout the range of use.
Poises shall be designed to be locked in any position and to prevent unauthorized change.
Scale shall be inspected and sealed as often as the Engineer may deem necessary to assure their
continued accuracy.
d. Automatic Weighing Devices – Unless otherwise allowed on the Contract, batching plants shall be
equipped with automatic weighing devices of an approved type to proportion aggregates and bulk
cement.
2. Mixers
a. General – Concrete may be mixed at the site of construction or at a central plant or wholly or in part
in truck mixers. Each mixer shall have a manufacturer’s place attached in a prominent place showing
the capacity of the drum in terms of volume of mixed concrete and the speed of rotation of the mixing
drum or blades.
b. Mixers at Site of Construction – Mixing shall be done in an approved mixer capable of combining the
aggregates, cement, and water into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the specified mixing
and discharging and distributing the mixture without segregation on the prepared grade. The mixer
shall be equipped with an approved timing device, which will automatically lock the discharge lever
when the drum has been charged and release it at the end of the mixing period. In case of failure of
the timing device, the mixer may be used for the balance of the day while it is being repaired,
provided that each batch is mixed 90 seconds. The mixer shall be equipped with a suitable non-
resettable batch counter, which shall correctly indicate the number of batches mixed.
c. Truck Mixer and Truck Agitators – Truck mixes used for mixing and hauling concrete, and truck agitator
is used for hauling central-mixed concrete shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 157.
d. Non-Agitator Trucks – Bodies of non-agitating hauling equipment for concrete shall be smooth,
mortar-tight metal containers and shall be capable of discharging the concrete at a satisfactory
controlled rate without segregation.
3. Paving and Finishing Equipment
The concrete shall be placed with an approved paver designed to spread, consolidate, screed and float
finish the freshly placed concrete in one complete pass of the machine in such a manner that a minimum
of hand finishing will be necessary to provide a dense and homogenous pavement in conformance with
the Plans and Specifications.
Page 31
The finishing machine shall be equipped with at least two oscillating type transverse screed.
Vibrators shall operate at a frequency of 8,300 to 9,600 impulses per minute under load at a maximum
spacing of 60 cm.
4. Concrete Saw
The Contractor shall provide sawing equipment in adequate number of units and power to complete the
sawing with a water-cooled diamond edge blade or an abrasive wheel to the required dimensions and at
required rate. He shall provide at least one stand-by saw in good working condition and with an ample
supply of saw blades.
5. Forms
Forms shall be of steel or wood, of an approved section, and of a depth equal to the thickness of the
pavement at the edge. The base of the forms shall be of sufficient width to provide necessary stability in
all directions. The flange braces must extend outward on the base to not less than 2/3 the height of the
form.
311.3.3 Preparation of Grade
After the sub-grade or base has been placed and compacted to the required density, the areas which will
support the paving machine and the grade on which the pavements are to be constructed shall be trimmed to
the proper elevation by means of a properly designed machine extending the work at least 60 cm beyond
each edge of the proposed concrete pavement. If loss of density results from the trimming operations, it shall
be restored by additional compaction before concrete is placed. If any traffic is allowed to use the prepared
sub-grade or base, the surface shall be checked and corrected immediately ahead of the placing concrete.
The sub-grade or base shall be uniformly moist when the concrete is placed.
311.3.4 Setting Forms
1. Base Support
The foundation under the forms shall be hard and true to grade so that the form when set will be firmly in
contact for its whole length and at the specified grade. Any roadbed, which at the form line is found below
established grade, shall be filled with approved granular materials to grade in lifts of 3 cm or less, and
thoroughly rerolled or tamped. Imperfections or variations above grade shall be corrected by tamping or
by cutting as necessary.
2. Form Setting
Forms shall be set sufficiently in advance at the point where concrete is being placed. After the forms
have been set to correct grade, the base shall be thoroughly tamped, mechanically or by hand, at both
the inside and outside edges of the base of the forms. The forms shall not deviate from true line by more
than 1 cm at any point.
3. Grade and Alignment
The alignment and grade elevations of the forms shall be checked and corrections made by the
Contractor immediately before placing the concrete. Testing as to crown and elevation, prior to placing of
Page 32
concrete can be made by means of holding an approved template in a vertical position and moved
backward and forward on the forms.
When any form has been disturbed or any grade has become unstable, the form shall be reset and
rechecked.
311.3.5 Conditioning of Sub-grade or Base Course
When side forms have been securely set to grade, the sub-grade or base course shall be brought to proper
cross-section. High areas shall be trimmed to proper elevation. Low areas shall be filled and properly
compacted. The finished grade shall be maintained in a smooth and compacted until the pavement is placed.
Unless waterproof sub-grade or base course cover material is specified, the sub-grade or base course shall
be uniformly moist when the concrete is placed. If it subsequently becomes too dry, the sub-grade or base
course shall be sprinkled, but the method of sprinkling shall not be such as to form mud or pools of water.
311.3.6 Handling, Measuring and Batching Materials
The batch plant site, layout, equipment and provisions for transporting material shall be such as to assure a
continuous supply of material to the work. Stockpiles shall be built up in layers of not more than one meter in
thickness. Each layer shall be completely in place before beginning the next, which shall not be allowed to
“cone” down over the next lower layer. Aggregates from different sources and of different grading shall not be
stockpiled together.
All washed aggregate and aggregates produced or handled by hydraulic methods, shall be stockpiled or
binned for draining at least twelve hours before being batched.
When mixing is done at the site of the work, aggregates shall be transported from the batching plant to the
mixer in batch boxes, vehicle bodies, or other containers of adequate capacity and construction to properly
carry the volume required. Partitions separating batches shall be adequate and effective to prevent spilling
from one compartment to another while in transit or being dumped. When bulk cement is used, the Contractor
shall use a suitable method of handling the cement from weighing hopper to transporting container or into the
batch itself for transportation to the mixer, white chute, boot or other approved device. This is to prevent loss
of cement, and to provide positive assurance of the actual presence in each batch of the entire cement
content specified.
Bulk cement shall be transported to the mixer in tight compartments carrying the full amount of cement
required of the batch. However, if allowed in the Special Provisions, it may be transported between the fine
and coarse aggregate. When cement is placed in content with the aggregates, batches may be rejected
unless mixed within 1-1/2 hours of such contact. Cement in original shipping packages may be transported on
top of the aggregates, each batch containing the number of sacks required by the job mix.
The mixer shall be charged without loss of cement. Batching shall be so as to result in the weight to each
material required within a tolerance of one percent for cement and two percent for aggregates.
Water may be measured either by volume or by weight. The accuracy of measuring the water shall be within a
range of error of not over one percent. Unless the water is to be weighed, the water-measuring equipment
tank shall be equipped with an outside tap and valve to provide for checking the setting, unless other means
are provided for readily and accurate determining the amount of water in the tank. The volume of the auxiliary
tank shall be at least equal to that of the measuring tank.
311.3.7 Mixing Concrete
Page 33
The concrete may be mixed at the site in a central mix plant, or in truck mixers. The mixer shall be of an
approved type and capacity. Mixing time will be measured from the time all materials, except water, are in the
drum. Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with requirement of AASHTO M
157, except that the minimum required revolutions at the mixing speed for transit-mixed concrete may be
reduced to not less than that recommended by the mixer manufacturer. The number of revolutions
recommended by the mixer manufacturer shall be indicated on the manufacturer’s serial plate attached to the
mixer. The Contractor shall furnish test data acceptable to the Engineer verifying that the make and model of
the mixer will produce uniform concrete conforming to the provisions of AASHTO M 157 at the reduced
number of revolutions shown on the serial plate.
When mixed at the Site or in a central mixing plant, the mixing time shall not be less than fifty seconds nor
more than ninety seconds, unless mixer performance tests prove adequate, mixing of the concrete is a
shorter time period.
Four seconds shall be added to the specified mixing time if timing starts at the instant the skip reaches its
maximum raise position. Mixing time ends when the discharge chute opens. Transfer time in multiple drum
mixers is included in mixing time. The contents of an individual mixer drum shall be removed before a
succeeding batch is emptied therein.
The mixer shall be operated at the drum speed as shown on the manufacturer’s nameplate attached on the
mixer. Any concrete mixed less than the specified expense. The volume of concrete mixed per batch shall not
exceed the mixer’s nominal capacity in cubic meters, as shown on the manufacturer’s standard rating plate on
the mixer, except that an overload up to ten percent above the mixer’s nominal capacity may be permitted
provided concrete test data for strength, segregation, and uniform consistency are satisfactory, and provided
no spillage of concrete takes place.
The batches shall be so charged into the drum that a portion of the mixing water shall enter in advance of the
cement and aggregates. The flow of water shall be uniform and all water shall be in the drum by the end of
the first 15 seconds of the mixing period. The throat of the drum shall be kept free of such accumulations as it
may restrict the free flow of materials into the drum.
Mixed concrete from the central mixing plant shall be transported in truck mixers, truck agitators or non-
agitating trucks specified in Subsection 4.5.2, Equipment. The time elapsed from the time water is added to
the mix until the concrete is deposited in place at the Site shall not exceed 45 minutes when the concrete is
hauled in non-agitating trucks, nor 90 minutes when hauled in truck mixers or truck agitators, except that in
hot weather or under other conditions contributing to quick hardening of the concrete, the maximum allowable
time may be reduced by the Engineer.
Retempering concrete by adding water or by other means shall not be permitted, except that when concrete is
delivered in truck mixers, additional water may be added to the batch materials and additional mixing
performed to increase the slump to meet the specified requirements, if permitted by the Engineer, provided all
these operations are performed within 45 minutes after the initial mixing operation and the water cement ratio
is not exceeded. Concrete that is not within the specified slump limits at the time of placement shall not be
used. Admixtures for increasing the workability or for accelerating the setting of the concrete will be permitted
only when specifically approved by the Engineer.
311.3.8 Limitation of Mixing
No concrete shall be mixed, placed or finished when natural light is insufficient, unless an adequate and
approved artificial lighting system is operated. During hot weather, the Engineer may require that steps be
taken to prevent the temperature of mixed concrete from exceeding a specified maximum temperature of 90º
F (32º C)..
Page 34
Concrete is not place within 90 minutes from the time the ingredients were charged into the mixing drum or
that has developed initial set shall not be used. Retempering of concrete or mortar, which has partially
hardened, that is remixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water shall not be permitted.
In order that the concrete may be properly protected against the effects of rain before the concrete is
sufficiently hardened, the Contractor will be required to have available at all times materials for the protection
of the edges and surface of the unhardened concrete.
311.3.9 Placing Concrete
Concrete shall be deposited in such a manner to require minimal re-handling. Unless truck mixers or non-
agitating hauling equipment are equipped with means to discharge concrete without segregation of the
materials, the concrete shall be unloaded into an approved spreading device and mechanically spread on the
grade in such manner as to prevent segregation. Placing shall be continuous between transverse joints
without the use of intermediate bulkheads. Necessary hand spreading shall be done with shovels, not rakes.
Workmen shall not be allowed to walk in the freshly mixed concrete with boots or shoes coated with earth or
foreign substances.
Where concrete is to be placed adjoining a previously constructed lane and mechanical equipment will be
operated upon the existing lane, that previously constructed lane shall have attained the strength for 14-day
concrete. If only finishing equipment is carried on the existing lane, paving in adjoining lanes may be
permitted after three days.
Concrete shall thoroughly be consolidated against and along the faces of all forms and along the full length
and on both sides of all joint assemblies, by means of vibrators inserted in the concrete. Vibrators shall not be
permitted to come in contact with a joint assembly, the grade, or a side form. In no case shall the vibrator be
operated longer than 15 seconds in any one location.
Concrete shall be deposited as near as possible to the expansion and contraction joints without disturbing
them, but shall not be dumped form the discharge bucket or hopper into a joint assembly unless the hopper is
well centered on the joint assembly. Should any concrete material fall on or be worked into the surface of a
complete slab, it shall be removed immediately.
311.3.10 Test Specimens
As work progresses, at least one set consisting of three concrete beam test specimens, 150 mm x 150 mm x
525 or 900 mm shall be taken form 330 sq. mm of pavement, 230 mm depth, or fraction thereof placed each
day. Test specimens shall be made under the supervision of the Engineer, and the Contractor shall provide all
concrete and other facilities necessary in making the test specimens and shall protect them from damage by
construction operations.
The beam shall be made, cured, and tested in accordance with AASHTO T 23 and T 97.
311.3.11 Strike-Off of Concrete and Placement of Reinforcement
Following the placing of the concrete, it shall be struck off to conform to the cross-section shown on the plans
and to an elevation such that when the concrete is properly consolidated and finished, the surface of the
pavement will be at the elevation shown on the Plans. When reinforced concrete pavement is placed in two
layers, the bottom layer shall be struck off and consolidated to such length and depth that the sheet of fabric
Page 35
or bar mat may be laid full length on the concrete in its final position without further manipulation. The
reinforcement shall then be placed directly upon the concrete, after which the top layer of the concrete shall
be placed, struck off and screened. Any portion of the bottom layer of concrete, which has been placed more
than 30 minutes without being covered with the top layer, shall be removed and replaced with freshly, mixed
concrete at the Contractor’s expense. When reinforced concrete is placed in one layer, the reinforcement may
be firmly positioned in advanced of concrete placement of it may be placed at the depth shown on the Plans
in plastic concrete, after spreading by mechanical or vibratory means.
Reinforcing steel shall be free from dirt, oil, paint, grease, mill scale and loose or thick rust which could impair
bond of the steel with the concrete.
311.3.12 Joints
Joints shall be constructed of the type and dimensions, and at the locations require by the Plans or Special
Provisions. All joints shall be protected from the intrusion of injurious foreign material until sealed.
1. Longitudinal Joint
Deformed steel tie bars of specified length, size, spacing and materials shall be placed perpendicular to the
longitudinal joint; they shall be placed by approved mechanical equipment rigidly secured by the chair or other
approved supports to prevent displacement. Tie bars shall not be painted or coated with asphalt or other
material, or enclosed in tubes or sleeves. When shown on the Plans and when adjacent lanes of pavement
are constructed separately, steel aside forms shall be used which will form a keyway along the construction
joint. Tie bars, except those made of rail steel, may be bent at right angles against the form of the first lane
constructed and straightened into final position before the concrete of the adjacent lane is placed, or in lieu of
bent tie bars, approved two-piece connectors may be used.
Longitudinal formed joints shall consist of a groove or cleft, extending downward from and normal to, the
surface of the pavement. These joints shall be affected or formed by an approved mechanical or manually
operated device of the dimensions and line indicated on the manually operated device is in a plastic state.
The groove or cleft shall be filled with either a pre-molded strip or poured material as required.
The longitudinal joint shall be continuous; there shall be no gaps in either transverse or longitudinal joints at
the intersection of the joints.
Longitudinal sawed joints shall be cut by means of approved concrete saws to the depth, width and line
shown on the Plans. Suitable guidelines or devices shall be used to assure cutting the longitude joint on the
true line. The longitudinal joint shall be sawed before the end of the curing period or shortly thereafter and
before any equipment or vehicles are allowed on the pavement.
The sawed area shall be thoroughly cleaned and if required, the joint shall immediately be filled with sealer.
Longitudinal pavement insert type joints shall be formed by placing a continuous strip of plastic material,
which will not react adversely with the chemical constituent of the concrete.
2. Transverse Expansion Joint
The expansion joint filler shall be continuous from form to form shaped to the sub-grade and to the
keyway along the form. Preformed joint filler shall be furnished in length equal to the pavement width or
equal to the width of one lane. Damaged or repaired joint filler shall not be used.
The expansion joint filer shall be held in a vertical position. An approved installing bar, or other device,
shall be used if required to secure preformed expansion joint filler at the proper grade and alignment
Page 36
during placing and finishing of the concrete. Finished joint shall not deviate more than 6 mm from a
straight line.
If joint fillers are assembled in sections, there shall be no offsets between adjacent units. No plugs of
concrete shall be permitted anywhere within the expansion space.
3. Transverse Contraction Joint
When shown on the Plans, it shall consist of planes of weakness created by forming or cutting grooves in
the surface of the pavement and shall include loaded transfer assemblies.
a. Transverse Strip Contraction Joint
It shall be formed by installing a parting strip to be left in place as shown on the Plans.
b. Formed Groove
It shall be made by depressing and approved tool or device into the plastic concrete. The tool or
device shall remain in place at least until the concrete has attained its initial set and shall then be
removed without disturbing the adjacent concrete, unless the device is designed to remain in the
joint.
c. Sawed Contraction Joint
It shall be created by sawing grooves in the surface of the pavement of the width, depth, and the
spacing and lines shown on the Plans, with an approved concrete saw. After each joint is sawed, it
shall be thoroughly cleaned including the adjacent concrete surface.
Sawing of the joints shall commence as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit
sawing without excessive raveling, usually within 24 hours. All joints shall be sawed before
uncontrolled shrinkage cracking takes place. If necessary the sawing operations shall be carried on
during the day or night, regardless of weather condition. The sawing of any joint shall be omitted if
crack occurs at or near the joint location prior to the time of sawing. Sawing shall be discounted
when a crack develops ahead of the saw. In general, all joints should be sawed in sequence. If
extreme conditions exist which make it impractical to prevent erratic cracking by early sawing, the
contraction joint groove shall be formed prior to initial set of concrete as provided above.
4. Transverse Construction Joint
It shall be constructed when there is an interruption of more than 30 minutes in the concerning
operations. No transverse joint shall be constructed within 1.50 m of an expansion joint, contraction
joint, or plane of weakness. If sufficient concrete has been mixed at the time of interruption to form a
slab of at least 1.50 m long, the excess concrete from the last preceding joint shall be removed and
disposed of as directed.
5. Load Transfer Device
Dowels, when used, shall be held in position parallel to the surface and centerline of the slab by a metal
device that is left in the pavement.
The portion of each dowel painted with once coat of lead or tar, in conformance with the requirements of
Item 404 of ASTM, Reinforcing Steel, shall be thoroughly coated with approved bituminous materials,
e.g., MC-70, or an approved lubricant, to prevent the concrete from binding to that portion of the dowel.
Page 37
The sleeves for dowels shall be metal designed to cover 50 mm plus or minus 5 mm (1/4 inch), of the
dowel with a watertight closed end and with a suitable stop to hold the end of the sleeves at least 25 mm
(1 inch) from the end of the dowel.
In lieu of using dowel assemblies at contraction joints, dowel may be placed in the full thickness of
pavement by a mechanical device approved by the Engineer.
311.3.13 Final Strike-off (Consolidation and Finishing)
1. Sequence
The sequence of operations shall be the strike-off and consolidation, floating and removal of Latinate,
straight edging and final surface finish. Work bridges or other devices necessary to provide access to the
pavement surface for the purpose of finishing straight-edging, and make correction as hereinafter
specified, shall be provided by the Contractor.
In general, the addition of water to the surface of the concrete to assist in finishing operations will not be
permitted. If the application of water to the surface is permitted, it shall be applied as fog spray by means
of approved spray equipment.
2. Finishing at Joints
The concrete adjacent to joints shall be compacted or firmly placed without voids or segregation against
the joint material, also under and around all load transfer devices, joint assembly units, and other features
designed to extend into the pavement. Concrete adjacent to joints shall be mechanically vibrated as
required in Subsection 4.5.9, Placing Concrete.
After the concrete has been placed and vibrated adjacent to the joints as required in Subsection 4.5.12,
the finishing machine shall be brought forward, operating in a manner to avoid damage or misalignment
of joints. If uninterrupted operation of the finishing machine, to over and beyond the joints causes
segregation of concrete, damage to, or misalignment of the joints, the finishing machine shall be stopped
when the front screed is approximately 20 cm (8 inches) from the joint. Segregated concrete shall be
removed from in front of and off the joint. The front screed shall be lifted and set directly on top of the
joint and the forward motion of the finishing machine resumed. When the second screed is close enough
to permit the excess mortar in front of it to flow over the joint, it shall be lifted and carried over the joint.
Thereafter, the finishing machine may be run over the joint without lifting the screeds, provided there is
no segregated concrete immediately between the joint and the screed or on top of the joint.
3. Machine Finishing
a. Non-vibratory Method
The concrete shall be distributed or spread as soon as placed. As soon as the concrete has been
placed, it shall be struck off and screened by an approved finishing machine. The machine shall go
over each area of pavement as many times and at such intervals as necessary to give the proper
compaction and leave a surface of uniform texture. Excessive operation over a given area shall be
avoided. The tops of the forms shall be kept clean by an effective device attached to the machine
and the travel of the machines on the forms shall be maintained true without wobbling or other
variation tending to affect the precision finish.
During the first pass of the finishing machine, a uniform ridge of concrete shall be maintained ahead
of the front screened in its entire length.
Page 38
b. Vibratory Method
When vibration is specified, vibrators for full width vibration of concrete paving slabs shall meet the
requirements in Subsection 4.5.2. Equipment. If uniform and satisfactory density of the concrete is
not obtained by the vibratory method at joints, along forms, at structures, and throughout the
pavement, the Contractor will be required to furnish equipment and method, which will produce
pavement conforming to the Specifications. All the provisions in item 1 above not in conflict with the
provisions for the vibratory method shall govern.
4. Hand Finishing
Hand finishing methods may only be used under the following conditions:
a. In the event of breakdown of the mechanical equipment, hand methods may be used to finish the
concrete already deposited on the grade.
b. In narrow widths or areas of irregular dimensions where operations of the mechanical equipment are
impractical, hand methods may be used.
Concrete, as soon as placed, shall be struck off and screeded. An approved portable screed shall be
used. A second screed shall be provided for striking off the bottom layer of concrete if reinforcement
is used.
The screed for the surface shall be at least 60 cm (2 feet) longer that the maximum width of the slab
to be struck off. It shall be of approved design, sufficiently rigid to retain its shape, and constructed
either of metal or to other suitable materials shod with metal.
Consolidation shall be attained by the use of a suitable vibrator or other approved equipment.
In operation, the screed shall be moved forward on the forms with a combined longitudinal and
transverse shearing motion, moving always in the direction in which the work is progressing and so
manipulated that neither end is raised from the side forms during the striking off process. If
necessary, this shall be repeated until the surface is of uniform texture, true to grade and cross-
section, and free from porous areas.
5. Floating
After the concrete has been struck off and consolidated, it shall be further smoothed, trued and
consolidated by means of a longitudinal float, either by hand or mechanical method.
a. Hand Method
The hand operated longitudinal float shall be not less than 265 cm (feet) in length and 15 cm (6
inches) in width, properly stiffened to prevent flexibility and warping. The longitudinal float, operated
foot bridges resting on the side forms and spanning but not touching the concrete, shall be worked
with a sawing motion while held in a floating position parallel to the road center line, and moving
gradually from one side of the pavement to the other. Movement ahead along the centerline of the
pavement shall be in successive advances of not more than one-half length of the float. Any excess
water or soupy material shall be wasted over the side forms on each pass.
Page 39
b. Mechanical Method
The mechanical longitudinal float shall be of a design approved by the Engineer and shall be in good
working condition. The tracks from which the float operates shall be accurately adjusted to the
required crown. The float shall be accurately adjusted and coordinated with the adjustment of the
transverse finishing machine so that a small amount of mortar is carried ahead of the float at all
times. The forward screed shall be adjusted so that the float will lap the distance specified by the
Engineer on each transverse trip. The float shall pass over each area of pavement at least two
times, but excessive operation over a given area will not be permitted. Any excess water or soupy
material shall be wasted over the side forms on each pass.
c. Alternative Mechanical Method
As an alternative, the Contractor may use a machine composed of a cutting and smoothing float or
floats suspended from and guided by a rigid frame. The frame shall be carried by four or more visible
wheels riding on, and constantly in contact with the side forms. If necessary, following one of the
preceding methods of floating, long handled floats having blades not less than 150 cm (5 feet) in
length and 15 cm (6 inches) in width may be used to smooth and fill in open-textured areas in the
pavement. Long handled floats shall not be used to float the entire surface of the pavement. Long
handled flats shall not be used to float the entire surface of the pavement in lieu of, or
supplementing, one of the preceding methods of floating. When strike off and consolidations are
done by the hand method and the crown of the pavement will not permit the use of the longitudinal
float, the surface shall be floated transversely by means of the long-handled float. Care shall be
taken not to work the crown out of the pavement during the operation. After floating, any excess
water and Latinate shall be removed from the surface of the pavement by a 3-m straightedge or
more in length. Successive drags shall be lapped one-half the length of the blade.
6. Straight Edge Testing and Surface Correction
After the floating has been completed and the excess water removed, but while the concrete is still
plastic, the surface of the concrete shall be tested for trueness with a 300 cm long straight edge. For this
purpose, the Contractor shall furnish and use an accurate 300-cm straight edge swing from handles 100
cm (3 feet) longer than one-half the width of the slab. The straight edge shall be held in contact with the
surface in successive positions parallel to the road centerline and the whole area gone over from one
side of the slab to the other as necessary. Advances along the road shall be in successive stages of not
more than one-half the length of the straight edge. Any depressions found shall be immediately filled with
freshly mixed concrete, struck off, consolidated and refinished. Special attention shall be given to assure
that the surface across joints meets the requirements for smoothness. Straight edge testing and surface
correction shall be continued until the entire surface is found to be free from observable departures form
the straight edge and the slab conforms to the required grade and cross-section.
7. Final Finish
If the surface texture is broom finished, it shall be applied when the water sheen has practically
disappeared. The broom shall be drawn from the center to the edge of the pavement with adjacent
strokes slightly overlapping. The brooming operation should be so executed that the corrugations
produced in the surface shall be uniform in appearance and not more than 1.5 mm in depth. Brooming
shall be competed before the concrete is in such condition that the surface will be unduly roughened by
the operation. The surface thus finished shall be free from tough and porous areas, irregularities, and
depressions resulting from improper handling of the broom. Brooms shall be of the quality, size and
construction and be operated so as to produce a surface finish meeting the approval of the Engineer.
Page 40
Subject to satisfactory results being obtained, and approval of the Engineer. The Contractor will be
permitted to substitute mechanical brooming in lieu of the manual brooming as herein described.
If the surface texture is belt finished, when straight-edging is complete and water sheen has practically
disappeared and just before the concrete becomes non-plastic, the surface shall be belted with a 2-ply
canvass belt not less than 20 cm wide and at least 100 cm longer than the pavement width. Hand belts
shall have suitable handles to permit controlled, uniform manipulation. The belt shall be operated with
short strokes transverse to the centerline and with a rapid advance parallel to the centerline.
If the surface texture is drag finished, a drag shall be used which consists of a seamless strip of damp
burlap or cotton fabric, which shall produce a uniform of gritty texture after dragging it longitudinally along
the full width of pavement. For pavement 5m or more in width, the drag shall be mounted on a bridge,
which travels on the forms. The dimensions of the drag shall be such that a strip of burlap or fabric at
least 100 cm wide is in contact with the full width of pavement surface while the drag is used. The drag
shall consist of not less than two layers of burlap with the bottom layer approximately 15 cm wider than
the layer. The drag shall be maintained in such condition that the resultant surface is of uniform
appearance and reasonably free from grooves over 1.5 mm in depth. Drag shall be maintained clean and
free from encrusted mortar. Drags that cannot be cleaned shall be discarded and new drags be
substituted.
Regardless of the method used for final finish, the hardened surface of pavement shall have a coefficient
of friction of 0.25 or more. Completed pavement that is found to have a coefficient of friction less than
0.25 shall be grounded or scored by the Contractor at his expense to provide the required coefficient of
friction.
8. Edging at Forms and Joints
After the final finish, but before the concrete has taken its initial set, the edges of the pavement along
each side of each slab, and on each of transverse expansion joints, formed joints, transverse
construction joints, and emergency construction joints, shall be worked with an approved tool and
rounded to the radius required by the Plans. A well-defined and continuous radius shall be produced and
a smooth, dense mortar finish obtained. The surface of the slab shall not be unduly disturbed by tilting the
tool during the use.
At all joints, any tool marks appealing on the slab adjacent to the joints shall be eliminated by brooming
the surface. In doing this, the rounding of the corner of the slab shall not be disturbed. All concrete on top
of the joint filler shall be completely removed.
All joints shall be tested with a straightedge before the concrete has sent and correction made if one
edge of the joint is higher than the other.
311.3.14 Surface Test
As soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the pavement surface shall be tested with a 3m
straightedge or other specified device. Area showing high spots of more than 3 mm but not exceeding 12 mm
in 3 m shall be marked and immediately ground down with an approved grinding tool to an elevation where
the area or spot will not show surface deviation in excess of 3 mm when tested with 3 m straightedge. Where
the departure from correct cross-section exceeds 12 mm, the pavement shall be removed and replaced by
and at the expense of the Contractor.
Any section to be removed shall be not less than 1.5 m in length and not less than the full width of the lane
involved. When it is necessary to remove and replace a section of pavement, any remaining portion of the
slab adjacent to the joints that is less than 1.5 m in length, shall also be removed and replaced.
Page 41
311.3.15 Curing
Immediately after the finishing operations have been completed and the concrete has sufficiently set, the
entire surface of the newly placed concrete shall be cured in accordance with either one of the methods
described herein. Failure to provide sufficient cover material of whatever kind the Contractor may elect to use,
lack of water to adequately take care of both curing and other requirements, shall be a cause for immediate
suspension of concreting operations. The concrete shall not be left exposed for more than ½ hour between
stages of curing or during the curing period.
1. Cotton or Burlap Mats
The surface of the pavement shall be entirely covered with mats. The mats used shall be of such length
(or width) that as laid extends at least twice thickness of the pavement beyond the edges of the slab. The
mat shall be placed so that the entire surface and the edges of the slab are completely covered. Prior to
being placed, the mats shall be saturated thoroughly with water. The mat shall be so placed and weighed
down so as to cause them to remain in intimate contact with the surface covered. The bats shall be
maintained fully wetted in position for 72 hours unless otherwise specified.
2. Waterproof Paper
The top surface and sides of the pavement shall be entirely covered with waterproof paper, the units shall
be lapped at least 45 cm. The paper shall be so placed and weighed down so as to cause it to remain in
intimate contact with the surface covered. The paper shall have such dimensions but each unit as laid will
extend beyond the edges of the slab at least twice the thickness of the pavement, or at pavement width
and 60 cm strips of paper for the edges. If laid longitudinally, paper not manufactured in sized which will
provide this width shall be surely sewed or cemented together, the joints being securely sealed in such a
manner that they do not open up or separate during the curing period. Unless otherwise specified, the
covering shall be maintained in place for 72 hours after the concrete has been placed. The surface of the
pavement shall be thoroughly wetted prior to the placing of the paper.
3. Straw Curing
When this type of curing is used, the pavement shall be cured initially with burlap or cotton mats, until
after final set of the concrete or, in any case, for as hours after placing the concrete. As soon as mats are
removed, the surface and sides of the pavement shall be thoroughly wetted and covered with at least 20
cm of straw or hay, thickness of which is to be measured after wetting. If the straw or hay covering
becomes displaced during the curing period, it shall be replaced to the original depth and saturated. It
shall be kept thoroughly saturated with water for 72 hours and thoroughly wetted down during the
morning of the fourth day, and the cover shall remain in place until the concrete has attained the required
strength.
4. Impervious Membrane Method
The entire surface of the pavement shall be sprayed uniformly with white pigmented curing compound
immediately after the finishing of the surface and before the set of the concrete has taken place, or if the
pavement is cured initially with jute or cotton mats, it may be applied upon removal of the mats. The
curing compound shall not be applied during rain.
Curing compound shall be applied under pressure at the rate of 4L to not more than 14 m2 by
mechanical sprayers. The spraying equipment shall be equipped with a wind guard. At the time of use,
the compound shall be in a thoroughly mixed condition with the pigment uniformly dispersed throughout
the vehicle. During application, the compound shall be stirred continuously by effective mechanical
Page 42
means. Hand spraying of odd widths or shaped and concrete surface exposed by the removal of forms
will be permitted. Curing compound shall not be applied to the inside faces of joints to be sealed, but
approved means shall be used to insure proper curing at least 72 hours and to prevent the intrusion of
foreign material into the joint before sealing has been completed. The curing compound shall be of such
character that the firm will harden within 30 minutes after application. Should the film be damaged from
any cause within the 72-hour curing period, the damaged portion shall be repaired immediately with
additional compound.
5. White Polythene Sheet
The top surface and sides of the pavement shall be entirely covered with polythene sheeting. The units
used shall be lapped at least 45 cm. The sheeting shall be so placed and weighed down so as to cause it
to remain in intimate contact with the surface covered. The sheeting as prepared for use shall have such
dimension that each unit as laid will extend beyond the edges of the slab at least twice the thickness of
the pavement. Unless otherwise specified, the covering shall be maintained in place for 72 hours after the
concrete has been placed.
311.3.16 Removal of Forms
After forms for concrete shall remain place undisturbed for not less than twenty-four hours after concrete
pouring. In the removal of forms, crowbars should be used in pulling out nails and pins. Care should be taken
so as not to break the edges of the pavement. In case portions of the concrete are spelled, they shall be
immediately repaired with fresh mortar mixed in the proportion of one part of Portland cement and two parts
fine aggregates. Major honeycombed areas will be considered as defective work and shall be removed and
replaced at the expense of the Contractor. Any area or section so removed shall not be less than the distance
between weakened place joint or less than the full width of the lane involved.
311.3.17 Sealing Joints
Joints shall be sealed soon after completion of the curing period and before the pavement is opened to traffic,
including the Contractor’s equipment. Just prior to sealing, each joint shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign
materials including membrane-curing compound and the joint faces shall be cleaned and surface dried when
the seal is applied.
The sealing material shall be applied to each joint opening to conform to the details shown on the Plans or as
directly by the Engineer. Materials for seal applied hot shall be stirred during heating so that localized
overheating does not occur. The pouring shall be done in such a manner that the material will not be spilled
on the exposed surfaces of the concrete. The use of sand or similar material as a cover for the seal will not be
permitted.
Preformed electrometric gaskets for sealing joints shall be of the cross-sectional dimensions shown on the
Plans. Seals shall be installed by suitable tools, without elongation and secured in place with an approved
lubricant adhesive which shall cover both sides of the concrete joints. The seals shall be installed in a
compressive condition and shall at time of placement be below the level of the pavement surface by
approximately 6 mm.
The seals shall be in one piece for the full width of each transverse joint.
311.3.18 Protection of Pavement
The Contractor shall protect the pavement and its appurtenances against both public traffic and traffic caused
by his own employees and agents. This shall include watchmen to direct traffic and the erection of and
Page 43
maintenance of warning signs, lights, pavement bridges or cross-over, etc. The Plans or Special Provisions
will indicate the location and type of device or facility required to protect the work and provide adequately for
traffic.
Any damage to the pavement occurring prior to final acceptance shall be repaired or the pavement be
replaced.
311.3.19 Concrete Pavement – Slip Form Method
If the Contract calls for the construction of pavement without the use of fixed forms, the following provisions
shall apply:
1. Grade
After the grade or base has been placed and compacted to the required density, the areas, which will
support the paving machine, shall be cut to the proper elevation by means of properly designed machine.
The grade on which the pavement is to be constructed shall then be brought to the proper profile by
means of properly designed machine. If the density of the base is disturbed by the grading operation, it
shall be corrected by additional compaction before concrete is placed. The grade should be constructed
sufficiently in advance of the placing of the concrete. If any traffic is allowed to use the prepared grade,
the grade shall be checked and corrected immediately before the placing of concrete.
2. Placing Concrete
The concrete shall be placed with an approved slip-form paver designed to spread, consolidate, screed
and float-finish the freshly placed concrete in one complete pass of the machine in such a manner that a
minimum of hand finish will be necessary to provide a dense and homogenous pavement in conformance
with the Plans and Specifications. The machine shall vibrate the concrete for the full width and depth of
the strip of pavement being placed. Such vibration shall be accompanied with vibrating tubes or arms
working in the concrete or with a vibrating screed or pan operating on the surface of the concrete. The
sliding forms shall be rigidly held together laterally to prevent spreading of the forms. The forms shall trail
behind the paver for such a distance that no appreciable slumping of the concrete will occur. And that
necessary final finishing can be accomplished while the concrete is still within the forms. Any edge slump
of the pavement, exclusive of edge rounding, in excess of 6 mm shall be corrected before the concrete
has hardened.
The concrete shall be held at a uniform consistency, having a slump of not more than 40 mm (1 ½
inches). The slip form paver shall be operated with as nearly as possible a continuous forward movement
and that all operation of mixing, delivering and spreading concrete shall be coordinated so as to provide
uniform progress with stopping and starting of the paver held to a minimum. If, for any reason, it is
necessary to stop the forward movement of the paver the vibratory and tamping elements shall also be
stopped immediately. No tractive force shall be applied to the machine, except that which is controlled
form the machine.
3. Finishing
The surface smoothness and texture shall meet the requirements of Subsections 311.3.13 and 311.3.14.
4. Curing
Unless otherwise specified, curing shall be done in accordance with one of the methods included in
Subsection 4.5.15. The curing medial shall be applied at the appropriate time and shall be applied
uniformly and completely to all surfaces and edges of the pavement.
Page 44
5. Joints
All joints shall be constructed in accordance with Subsection 311.3.12.
6. Protection Against Rain
In order that the concrete may be properly protected against rain before the concrete is sufficiently
hardened, the Contractor will be required to have available at all times, materials for the protection of the
edges and surface of the unhardened concrete. Such protective materials shall consist of standard metal
forms or wood planks having a nominal thickness of not less than 50 mm (2 inches) and a nominal width
of not less than the thickness of the pavement at its edge for the protection of the pavement edges, and
covering materials such as burlap or cotton mats, curing paper or plastic sheeting material for the
protection of the surface of the pavement. When rain appears imminent, all paving operations shall stop
and all available personnel shall begin placing forms against the side of the pavement and covering the
surface of the unhardened concrete with the protective covering.
311.3.20 Acceptance of Concrete
The strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive
strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength, fc1 and no individual strength test result is
deficient by more than 15 percent of the specified strength, fc1.
Concrete deemed to be not acceptable using the above criteria may be rejected unless the Contractor can
provide evidence, by means of core tests, that the quality of concrete represented by failed test results is
acceptable in place. At least three representative cores shall be taken from each member or area of concrete
in place that is considered deficient. The Engineer shall determine the location cores so that there will be least
impairment of the strength of the structure. Obtaining and testing of drilled cores shall be in accordance with
AASHTO T 24.
Concrete in the area represented by the cores will be considered adequate if the average strength of the
cores is equal to at least 85 percent of, and if no single core is less that 75 percent of the specified strength,
fc1.
If the strength of control specimens does not meet the requirements of this Subsection, and it is not feasible
or not advisable to obtain cores from the stricter due to structural considerations, payment of the concrete will
be made at an adjusted price due to strength deficiency of concrete specimens as specified on Table
311.3.22 here under.
Table 311.3.22 Strength Deficiencies of Concrete Specimens

Deficiency in Strength of Concrete Percent of Contract Price
Specimens (Percent) Allowed
Less than 5 100
5 to less than 10 80
25 or more 0
Page 45
311.3.21 Opening to Traffic
The Engineer will decide when the pavement may be opened to traffic. The road will not be opened to traffic
until test specimens molded and cured in accordance with AASHTO T 23 have attained the minimum strength
requirements in Subsection 4.4. If such tests are not conducted prior to the specified age the pavement shall
not be opened to traffic until 14 days after the concrete was placed. Before opening to traffic, the pavement
shall be cleaned and joint sealing completed.
311.3.22 Tolerance and Pavement Thickness
1. General
The thickness of the pavement will be determined by measurement of cores from the completed
pavement in accordance with AASHTO T 148.
The completed pavement shall be accepted on a lot basis. A lot shall be considered as 1000 linear
meters of pavement when a single traffic lane is poured or 500 linear meters when two lanes are poured
concurrently. The last unit in each slab constitutes a lot in itself when its length is at least ½ of the normal
length. If the length of the last unit is shorter than ½ of the normal lot length, it shall be included in the
previous lot.
Other areas such as intersections, entrances, crossovers, ramps, etc., will be grouped together to form a
lot. Small irregular areas may be included with other unit areas to form a lot. Each lot will be divided into
five equal segments and one core will be obtained from each segment in accordance with AASHTO T 24.
2. Pavement Thickness
It is the intent of this Specification that the pavement has a uniform thinned as called for on the Plans for
the average of each lot as defined. After the pavement has met all surface smoothness requirements,
cores for thickness measurements will be taken.
In calculating the average thickness of the pavement, individual measurements, which are in excess of
the specimen thickness plus 5 mm, and measurement, which are less than the specified thickness by
more than 25 mm, shall not be included in the average. When the average thickness for the lot is
deficient, the contract unit price will be adjusted for thickness in accordance with item C below.
Individual areas within a segment found deficient in thickness by more than 25 mm shall be evaluated by
the Engineer, and if in his judgment, the deficient areas warrant removal, they shall be removed and
replaced by the Contractor with pavement of the specified thickness at his entire expense. However, if
the evaluation of the Engineer is that the deficient area should not be removed and replaced, such area
will not be paid.
When the measurement of any core is less than the specified thickness by more than 25 mm, the actual
thickness of the pavement in this area will be determined by taking additional cores at not less than 5 m
intervals parallel to the center line in each direction from the affected location until a core is found in each
direction which is not deficient in thickness by more 25 mm. The area of slab for which no payment will be
made shall be the product of the paving width multiplied by the distance along the centerline of the road
between transverse sections found not deficient in thickness by more than 25 mm. The thickness of the
remainder of the segment to be used to get the average thickness of each lot shall be determined by
taking the average thickness of the additional cores, which are not deficient, by more than 25 mm.
3. Adjustment for Thickness
Page 46
When the average thickness of the pavement per lot is deficient, payment for the lot shall be adjusted as
follow;
Table 311.3.22 Payment Adjustments per Deficiency in Average Thickness Per Lot
Deficiency in the Average Thickness
Percent of Contract Price Per Lot
Per Lot (mm)
0 –5 100% payment
6 – 10 95% payment
11 – 15 85% payment
16 – 20 70% payment
21 – 25 50% payment
More than 25 Remove & Replace (No payment)
The area to be paid for under this item shall be the number of square meters (m2) of concrete pavement
placed and accepted in the completed pavement including forms and reinforcement. The width will be from
outside edge to outside edge of completed pavement as placed in accordance with the Plans or as otherwise
required by the Engineer in writing. The length will be measured horizontally along the centerline of each
roadway or ramp. Any curb and gutter placed shall not be included in the area of concrete pavement
measured.
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in paragraph D above, shall be paid for at the contract unit
price to Portland Cement Concrete Pavement, which price and payment shall be full compensation for
preparation of roadbed and finishing of shoulders, unless otherwise provided by the Special Provisions,
furnishing all material, mixing, placing, finishing and curing all concrete, for furnishing and placing all joint
materials, for sawing weaken controlling traffic, and for furnishing all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the item.
Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
311 (1) PCC Pavement Square meter

(Plain)
Page 47
Page 48
SUPER
STRUCTURES
CONSTRUCTION
Part E
PART E SUPER STRUCTURES CONSTRUCTION
ITEM 403 METAL STRUCTURES
403.1 Description
This work shall consist of steel structures and the steel structure portions of composite structures, in
reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the Plans.
The work will include the fabricating, hauling, erecting, welding and painting of structural metals called for in
the Special Provision or shown on the Plans. Structural metals will include structural steel, rivet, welding,
special and alloy steel, steel forging and castings, and iron castings. This work will also include furnishings of
all plant, tools, equipment, materials and labor in the installation of metal framing, roof framing and roofing,
including miscellaneous sheet metal works as required in accordance with these Specifications, Plans and
Special Provisions.
403.2 Materials Requirements
Materials shall meet the requirements of Item 712, Structural Metal; Item 409, Welded Structural Steel and
Welded Structural Steel; and Item 709, Paints.
403.3.1 Inspection
The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least fifteen (15) days notice prior to the beginning of work at the
mill or shop, so that the mill, shop or foundry where material for the work is to be manufactured or fabricated.
No material shall be rolled or fabricated until said inspection has been provided.
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with copies of the certified mill reports of the structural steel,
preferably before but not later than the delivery of the steel to the job site.
The Contractor shall furnish all facilities for inspection and the Engineer shall be allowed free access to the
mill or shop and premises at all times. The Contractor shall furnish, without charge, all labor, machinery,
material and tools necessary to prepare test specimens.
Inspection at the mill or shop is intended as a means of facilitating the work and avoiding errors and it is
expressly understood that it will not relieve the contractor from any responsibility for imperfect material or
workmanship and the necessity for replacing same. The acceptance of any material or finished member at the
Page 49
mill or shop by the Engineer shall not preclude their subsequent rejection if found defective before final
acceptance of the work. Inspection of welding will be in accordance with the provision of Section 5 of the
“Standard Code for arc and gas welding in Building Construction” of the American Welding Society.
403.3.2 Stock Material Control
When so specified in the Contract, stock material shall be segregated into classes designated as “identified”
or “unidentified”. Identified material is material which can be positively identified as having been rolled from a
given heat for which certified mill test can be produced. Unidentified material shall include all other general
stock materials. When it is proposed to use unidentified material, the Engineer shall be notified of such
intention at least fifteen (15) days in advance of commencing fabrication to permit sampling and testing. When
so indicated or directed, the Contractor shall select such material as he wishes to use from stock, and place it
in such position that it will be accessible for inspection and sampling. The Contractor shall select identified
material from as few heat numbers as possible, and furnish the certified mill test reports on each of such heat
numbers. Two samples shall be taken from each heat number as directed, one for a tension test and one for a
bend test.
In case of unidentified stock, the Engineer may, at his discretion, select any number of random test
specimens.
Structural material, either plain or fabricated, shall be stored above the ground upon platforms, skids, or other
supports. It shall be kept free from dirt, grease or other foreign matter, and shall be protected as far as
practicable from corrosion.
403.3.3 Fabrication
These Specifications apply to welded construction. The Contractor may, however, with the approval of the
Engineer, substitute high tensile strength steel bolts equivalent to the welds in any connection.
Workmanship and finish shall be in accordance with the best general practice in modern shops. Portions of
the work exposed to view shall be finished neatly. Shearing, flame cutting, and chipping shall be done
carefully and accurately.
Structural material, either plain or fabricated, shall be stored above the ground upon platforms, skids or other
supports. Rolled material before being laid off or worked must be straight. If straightening is necessary, it shall
be done by methods that will not injure the metal. Sharp kinks and bends will be cause for rejection of the
material.
Preparation of material shall be in accordance with AWS D 1.1, paragraph 3.2 as modified by AASHTO
Standard Specification for Welding of Structural Steel Highway Bridges.
403.3.4 Finishing and Shaping
Finished members shall be true to line and free from twists, bends and open joints.
1. Edge Planing
Sheared edges of plates more than 15.9 mm. in thickness and carrying calculated stresses shall be planed to
a depth of 6.3 mm. Re-entrant cuts shall be filleted before cutting.
2. Facing of Bearing Surfaces
Page 50
The surface finish of bearing and based plates and other bearing surfaces that are to come in contact with
each other or with concrete shall meet the American National Standards Institute surface roughness
requirements as defined in ANSI B-46, 1-47, Surface Roughness Waviness and lay, Part I:
Steel Slabs ANSI 2,000

Heavy plates in contact in shoes to be welded ANSI 1,000
Milled ends of compression members, stiffeners and fillers ANSI 500
Bridge rollers and rockers ANSI 250
Pins and pin holes ANSI 125
Sliding bearings ANSI 125
3. Abutting Joints
Abutting joints in compression members and girders flanges, and in tension members where so specified on
the drawings, shall be faced and brought to an even bearing. Where joints are not faced, the opening shall not
exceed 6.3 mm.
4. End Connection Angles
Floor beams, stringers and girders having end connection angles shall be built to plan length back to back of
connection angles with a permissible tolerance of 0 mm. to minus 1.6 mm. If end connections are faced, the
finished thickness of the angles shall not be less than shown on the detail drawings, but in no case less than
9.5 mm.
5. Lacing bars
The ends of lacing bars shall be neatly rounded unless another form is required.
6. Fabrication of Members
Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, steel plates for main members and splice plates for flanges and main
tension members, not secondary members, shall be cut and fabricated so that the primary direction of rolling
is parallel to the direction of the main tensile and/or compressive stresses.
Fabricated members shall be true to line and free from twists, bends and open joints.
403.3.5 Shop Assembly
The field connections of main members of trusses, arches, continuous beam spans, bents, towers (each
face), plate girders and rigid frames shall be assembled in the shop with milled ends of compression members
in full bearing, and then shall have their sub-size holes reamed to specified size while the connections are
assembled. Assembly shall be “Full Truss or Girders Assembly” unless “Progressive Chord Assembly” or
“Special Complete Structure Assembly” is specified in the Special Provisions or on the Plans.
Check assemblies with Numerically-Controlled Drilled Fields Connections shall be in accordance with the
provision of 2 (f) of this Subsection.
Truss, Purlins and Tank Structures
(1) Structural Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars
Unless otherwise shown or specified on the drawings, structural steel shapes plates and bars shall conform to
ASTM specification A36/A36M.
Page 51
(2) Hot-Formed Steel Sheet and Strip
Unless otherwise shown or specified on the drawings, hot-formed steel sheet and strip shall conform to ASTM
A570.
(3) Bolts, Nuts, and Washer
It shall conform to specification ASTM A370, with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi, unless otherwise
shown in the drawings. Heavy hexagonal structural bolts, heavy hexagonal nuts, and hardened washers, shall
be quenched and tampered medium-carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers complying with ASTM A325.
(4) Screw and Expansion Bolts
Screws and expansion bolts shall be of standard commercial grade, and of the sizes and types indicated as
approved by the Consultant.
(5) Electrodes
Electrodes for arc welding shall be E60 or E70, AWS D1.1.
(6) Pipe Columns and Hand Rails
Pipe Columns and Hand rails shall be zinc-coated steel pipe of standard weight conforming to ASTM A53.
(7) Galvanizing
Unless otherwise specified, galvanizing shall be of standard quality, hot-dipped process of 1.25 ounces per
square foot of coating. Galvanized surfaces that are damaged prior to final acceptance shall be repaired using
an approved repair compound to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(8) Miscellaneous Metals
Miscellaneous metal including fastenings, anchorages and incidentals not specifically mentioned herein or in
other sections of this specifications but are required to complete the work, for which there are no detailed
drawings, shall be provided and installed in accordance with standard practice of the traders as approved by
the Engineer.
(9) Delivery, Storage and Handling
Fabricated materials delivered to job site shall be stored in clean and protected dry area in manufacturer’s
protective packaging. Structural steel materials to be stored shall be placed on skids above the ground. It
shall be kept clean and properly drained. Long members, such as purlins and chords, shall be supported by
skids placed near enough together to prevent injury from deflection. The Contractor shall check the quantity
and quality of materials turned over to him against the delivery lists and report promptly in writing any
shortage or damage discovered.
------------------ includes
Page 52
403.4.1 Unit Basis
The quantity of structural steel to be paid for shall be number of kilograms complete in place and accepted.
For the purpose of measurement for payment components fabricated from metals listed in (1) below, such as
casting, alloy steels, steel plates, anchor bolts and nuts, shoes, rockers, rollers, pins and nuts, expansion
dams, roadway drains and souppers, weld metal, bolts embedded in concrete, cradles and brackets, posts,
conduits and ducts, and structural shapes for expansion joints and pier protection will be considered as
structural steel.
Unless otherwise provided, the mass of metal paid for shall be computed and based upon the following mass:
1. Unit Density, kg/m3
Aluminum, cast or rolled 2,771.2

Bronze or copper alloy 8,585.9
Copper sheet 8,938.3
Iron, cast 7,128.2
Iron, malleable 7,528.7
Lead, sheet 1,122.9
Steel, cast or rolled, including alloy copper bearing and stainless 7,849
Zinc 7,208.3
2. Shapes, Plates Railing and Flooring
The mass of steel shapes and plates shall be computed on the basis of their nominal mass and dimensions
as shown on the approved shop drawings, deducting for copes, cuts and open holes, exclusive of rivets holes.
The mass of all plates shall be computed on the basis of nominal dimensions with no additional for overrun.
The mass of railing shall be included as structural steel unless the Bill of Quantities contains as pay item for
bridge railing under Item 401, Railings.
The mass of steel grid flooring shall be computed separately.
3. Welds
The mass of shop and field fillet welds shall be assumed as follows:
Size of Weld (mm) Kg. per linear meter

6.3 0.984
7.9 1.213
9.5 1.771
12.7 2.690
5.9 3.936
19.0 5.379
22.2 7.314
25.4 9.774
The mass of other welds will be computed on the basis of the theoretical volume from dimensions of the
welds, with an addition of 50 mass percent as an allowance for overrun.
4. Other Items
The quantities of other Contract Items which enter into the completed and accepted structure shall be
measured for payment in the manner prescribed in Subsection 403.5.1 (4).
Page 53
403.5.1 Structural Steel
1. Furnished, fabricated and Erected
The quantity, determined as provided above, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per kilogram
for “Structural Steel, furnished, fabricated and erected”, which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing, galvanizing, fabricating, radiographing, magnetic particle inspection,
delivering, erecting ready for use, and painting all steel and other metal including all labor, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work, except as provided in Subsections 403.5.2, 403.5.3
and 403.5.4
403.5.2 Material Considered as Structural Steel
For the purpose of subsection 403.5.1 and unless otherwise shown on the Plans, castings, forgings, special
alloy steels and steel plates, wrought iron, and structural shapes of expansion joints and pier protection shall
be considered as structural steel except that when quantities and unit price for certain alloy steels, forgings,
castings or other specific categories of metal are called for in the Bill of Quantities, the mass of such selected
material, determined as provided above, shall be paid for at the respective contract unit price per kilogram for
“Structural Steel (Alloy steel, forgings, castings, and/or other category), furnished and fabricated, and erected”
or “ Structural Steel (Subsection 403.4.1), furnished and fabricated” as named in the Bill of Quantities.
403.5.3 Other Items
The quantities of all other Contract Items which enter into the completed and accepted structure shall be paid
for at the contract unit prices for the several Pay Items as prescribed for the Items involved.
403.5.4 Payment as Reinforcing Steel
When the Bill of Quantities does not contain a pay item for structural steel, the quantities of metal drains,
scuppers, conduits, ducts and structural shapes for expansion joints and pier protection, measured as
provided above will be paid for as Reinforcing Steel under Item 404.
403 (1) Structural Steel,

Furnished, fabricated and erected Kilogram (kgs.)
403 (2) Structural Steel,
Furnished, fabricated and erected Kilogram (kgs.)
403 (3) Furnished, fabricated and erected Kilogram (kgs.)
Where separate payment is to be made for certain metals or for certain particular components, other than
under the general provision for structural steel, designation of those particular cases shall be inserted in the
spaces provided in the pay names for Item 404 (2), 403 (4) or 403 (6), as the case may be.
Page 54
ITEM 404 REINFORCING STEEL
404.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing, bending, fabricating and placing of steel reinforcement of the type, size,
shape and grade required in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the requirements
shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
Reinforcing steel shall meet the requirements of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope.
404.3.1 Order List
Before materials are ordered, all order lists and bending diagrams shall be furnished by the Contractor, for
approval of the Engineer. The approved of order lists and bending diagrams by the Engineer shall in no way
relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the correctness of such lists and diagrams. Any expense incident to
the revisions of materials furnished in accordance with such lists and diagrams to make them comply with the
Plans shall be borne by the Contractor.
404.3.2 Protection of Material
Steel reinforcement shall be stored above the surface of the ground upon platforms, skid or other supports
and shall be protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by
exposure to conditions producing rust. When placed in the worked, reinforcement shall be free from dirt,
detrimental rust, loose scale, paint, grease, oil, or other foreign materials. Reinforcement shall be free from
injurious defects such as cracks and laminations. Rust, surface seams, surface irregularities or mill scale will
not be cause for rejection, provided the minimum dimension, cross sectional area and tensile properties of the
material meets the physical requirements for the size and grade of steel specified.
404.3.3 Bending
All reinforcing bars requiring bending shall be cold-bent to the shapes shown on the Plans or required by the
Engineer. Bars shall be bent around a circular pin having the following diameter (D) in relation to the diameter
of the bar (d):
Bends and Hooks

Nominal diameter, (d), mm Pin diameter (D)
10 to 20 6d
25 to 28 8d
32 and greater 10d
Bends and hooks in stirrups or ties may be bent to the diameter of the principal bar enclosed therein.
404.3.4 Placing and Fastening
All steel reinforcement shall be accurately placed in the position shown on the Plans and firmly held there
during the placing and setting of the concrete. Bars shall be tied at all intersections except where spacing is
Page 55
less than 300 mm in each directions, in which case, alternate intersections shall be tied. Ties shall be
fastened on the inside.
Distance from the forms shall be maintained by means of stays, blocks, ties, hangers, or other approved
supports, so that it does not vary from the position indicated on the Plans by more than 6 mm. Blocks for
holding reinforcement from contact with the forms shall be precast mortar blocks of approved shapes and
dimensions. Layers of bars shall be separated by precast mortar blocks or by other equally suitable devices.
The use of peebles, pieces of broken stone or brick, metal pipe and wooden blocks shall not be permitted.
The minimum distance between bars shall be 40 mm. Reinforcement any member shall be placed, inspected
and approved by the Engineer before the concrete begins. Concrete placed in violation of this provision may
be rejected and removal may be required.
404.3.5 Splicing
All reinforcement shall be furnished in the full lengths indicated on the Plans. Splicing of bars except where
shown on the Plans will not be permitted without the written approval of the Engineer. Splices shall be
staggered as far as possible and with a minimum separation of not less than 40 bar diameters. Not more than
one-third of the bars may be spliced in the same cross-section, except where shown on the Plans.
Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, bars shall be tapped a minimum distance of:
Splice Grade 40 Grade 60 But not less than
Tension 24 bar dia. 36 bar dia 300 mm
Compression 20 bar dia 24 bar dia 300 mm
In tapped splices, the bars shall be placed in contact and wired together. Lapped splices will not be permitted
at locations where the concrete section is insufficient to provide minimum clear distance of one and one-third
(1 1/3) the maximum size of coarse aggregate between the splice and the nearest adjacent bar. Welding of
reinforcing steel shall be done only if detailed on the Plans or if authorized by the Engineer in writing. Spiral
reinforcement shall be spliced by lapping at least one and a half turns or by butt welding unless otherwise
shown on the Plans.
The quantity of reinforcing steel to be paid for will be the final quantity placed and accepted in the completed
structure. No allowance will be made for tie-wires, separators, wire chairs and other material used in fastening
the reinforcing steel in place. No measurement or payment will be made for splices added by the Contractor.
When there is no item for reinforcing steel in the Bill of Quantities, costs will be considered as incidental to the
other items (i.e. structural concrete, masonry, etc.) in the Bill of Quantities.
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 404.4 shall be paid for at the contract unit price for
Reinforcing Steel which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials,
including all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this item.
404 (1) Reinforcing Steel (d) Kilogram (kgs.)
Page 56
ITEM 405 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
405.1 Description
405.1.1 Scope of Work
This item shall consist of furnishing, bending, placing and finishing concrete in all structures except
pavements in accordance with this Specification and conforming to the lines, grades, and dimensions shown
on the Plans. Concrete shall consist of a mixture of Portland Cement, fine aggregate, course aggregate,
admixture when specified or approved by the Engineer.
405.1.2 Classes and Uses of Concrete
Five classes of concrete are provided for in this item, namely: A, B, C, P and Seal. Each class shall be used
in that part of the structure as called for on the Plans. The classes of concrete will generally be used as
follows:
Class A – All superstructures and heavily reinforced substructures. The important parts of the structure
included are slabs, beams, girders, columns, arch ribs, box culverts, reinforced abutments, retaining walls,
and reinforced footings.
Class B – Footings, pedestals, massive pier shafts, pipe bedding, and gravity walls, unreinforced or with only
a small amount of reinforcement.
Class C – Thin reinforced sections, precast R.C. piles and cribbing and for filler in steel grid floors.
Class P – Prestressed concrete structures and members.
Seal – Concrete deposited in water.
It shall conform to all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.1
405.2.2 Fine Aggregate
It shall conform to all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.2.
405.2.3 Coarse Aggregate
It shall conform to all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.3 except that graduation shall conform to Table
405.1.
Table 405.1- Grading Requirements for Coarse Aggregate
Standard Alternate Class A Class B Class C Class D Class Seal
(Mm) US
Standard
63 2- ½”
50 2’ 100 100
37.5 1- ½” 95- 100 - 100
Page 57
25 1” - 35 -70 - 100 95 - 100

19.0 ¾” 35-70 - 100 - 25 - 60
12.5 ½” - 10 - 30 90 - 100 - 25 - 60
9.5 3/8” 10 -30 - 40-70 20-55 -
4.75 No. 4 0- 5 0-5 0 – 15” 0 – 10” 0 – 10”
“ The measured cement content shall be within plus (+) or minus (-) 2 mass percent of the design cement content.
405.2.4 Water
It shall conform to all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.4.
405.2.5 Reinforcing Steel
It shall conform to all the requirements of Item 404, Reinforcing Steel and Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and
Wire Rope. For Deformed Billet-Steel Bars (AASHTO M 31/ ASTM A615).
405.2.5.1 Placing Reinforcement
(1) General
Steel reinforcement shall be provided as indicated, together with all necessary wire ties, chairs, spacers,
supports and other devices necessary to install and secure the reinforcement properly. All reinforcement,
when placed, shall be free from loose, flaky rust and scale, oil grease, clay, and other coating and foreign
substances that would reduce or destroy its bond with concrete. Reinforcement shall be placed accurately
and secured in place by use of metal or concrete supports, spacers and ties. Such supports shall be of
sufficient strength to maintain the reinforcement in place throughout the concreting operations. The supports
shall be used in such manner that they will not be exposed or contribute in any way to the discoloration or
deterioration of the concrete.
(2) Splicing
Splices shall be by lapping to develop the full strength of the bars unless otherwise indicated, the minimum
splice length shall be 40 times the bar diameter or the development length shown in Subsection 404.3.5, and
Item 710, Reinforcing Steel-Splicing..
405.2.5.2 Admixtures
Admixtures shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 311.2.7.
405.2.5.3Curing Materials
Curing materials shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 311.2.8.
405.2.4 Storage of Cement and Aggregates
Storage of cement and aggregates shall conform to all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.10.
405.3 Sampling and Testing of Structural Concrete
As work progresses, at least one (1) sample consisting of three (3) concrete cylinder test specimens, 150mm
x 300mm (6 “x12”) shall be taken from each seventy five (75) cubic meter of each class of concrete or fraction
thereof placed each day.
Page 58
Compliance with the requirements of this section shall be determined in accordance with the following
standard methods of AASHTO:
Sampling of fresh concrete T 141

Weight per cubic meter and air content (gravi-metric) of concrete T 121
Sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregates T 27
Slump of Portland Cement Concrete T 119
Specific gravity and absorption of fine aggregate T 84
Test for strength shall be made in accordance with the following:
Making and curing concrete compressive and flexural test

Specimens in the field T 23
Compressive strength of molded concrete cylinders T 22
405.4 Production Requirements
405.4.1 Proportioning and Strength of Structural Concrete
The concrete materials shall be proportioned in accordance with the requirements for each class of concrete
as specified in Table 405.4.1, using the absolute method as outlined in the American Concrete Institute (ACI)
Standard 211.1. “Recommended Practice for Selecting proportions for Normal and Heavyweight Concrete”.
Other methods of proportioning may be employed in the mix design with prior approval of the Engineer. The
mix shall either be designed or approved by the Engineer. A change in the source of materials during the
progress of work may necessitate a new mix design.
The strength requirements for each class of concrete shall be as specified in Table 405.4.1.
Table 405.4.1 – Composition and Strength of Concrete for use in Structure

Class Minimum Maximum Consistency Designated Minimum
of Cement Water Cement Range in Size of Coarse Compressive
Concrete Content Per m³ Ratio Slump Aggregate Strength of
Kg Kg/kg Mm (inch) 150 mm x
(bag **) Square 300mm
Opening Std. Conc. Cylinder
mm Specimen at
28 days,
MN/m³ (psi)
A (360) 0.53 50 – 100 37.5 – 4.75 20.7
(9 bags) (2 – 4) (1 – ½” – (3000)
No.4)
B (320) 0.58 50 – 100 50 – 4.75 16.5
(8 bags) (2 – 4) (2” – No.4) (2400)
C 380 0.55 50 – 100 12.5 – 4.75 20.7
(9.5 bags) (2 – 4) (1/2” – No. 4) (3000)
P 440 0.49 100 max. 19.0 – 4.75 37.7
(11 bags) (4 max.) ¾” – No.4) (5000)
Seal 380 0.58 100 – 200 25 – 4.75 20.7
(9.5 bags) (4 – 8) (1” – No.4) (3000)
“ The measured cement content shall be within plus (+) or minus (-) 2 mass percent of the design cement content.
** Based on 40 kg/bag
Page 59
405.4.2 Consistency
Concrete shall have a consistency such that it will be workable in the required position. It shall be of such a
consistency that it will flow around reinforcing steel but individual particles of the coarse aggregate when
isolated shall show a coating of mortar containing its proportionate amount of sand. The consistency of
concrete shall be gauged by the ability of the equipment to properly place it and not by difficulty in mixing and
transporting. The quantity of mixing water shall be determined by the Engineer and shall not be varied without
his consent. Concrete as dry as it is practical to place with the equipment specified shall be used.
405.4.3 Mixing and Delivery
Concrete may be mixed at the site of the construction, at a central point or by a combination of central point
and truck mixing or by a combination of central point mixing and truck agitating. Mixing and delivery of
concrete shall be in accordance with the appropriate requirement of AASHTO M 157 except as modified in the
following paragraphs of this section, for truck mixing or a combination of central point and truck mixing or truck
agitating. Delivery of concrete shall be regulated so that placing is at a continuous rate unless delayed by
placing operations. The intervals between delivery of batches shall not be so long as to allow the concrete in
place to harden partially, and in no case shall such an interval exceed 30 minutes.
In exceptional cases and when volumetric measurements are authorized, for small project requiring less than
75 cubic meters per day of pouring, the weight proportions shall be converted to equivalent volumetric
proportions. In such cases, suitable allowance shall be made for variations in the moisture condition of the
aggregates, including the bulking effect in the fine aggregate. Batching and mixing shall be in accordance with
ASTM C 685, Section 6 through 9.
405.4.3.1 Mixing Concrete: General
Concrete shall be thoroughly mixed in a mixer of an approved size and type that will insure a uniform
distribution of the materials through out the mass.
All concrete shall be mixed in mechanically operated mixers. Mixing plant and equipment for transporting and
placing concrete shall be arranged with an ample auxiliary installation to provide minimum supply of concrete
in case of breakdown of machinery or in case the normal supply of concrete is disrupted. The auxiliary supply
of concrete shall be sufficient to complete the casting of a section up to a construction joint that will meet the
approval of the Engineer.
405.4.3.2 Mixing Concrete at Site
Concrete mixers may be of the revolving drum or the revolving blade type and the mixing drum or blades shall
be operated uniformity at the mixing speed recommended by the manufacturer. The pick-up and throw-over
blades of mixers shall be restored or replaced when any part or section is worn 20mm or more below the
original height of the manufacturer’s design. The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer shall
contain a sufficient excess of cement, sand and water to coat inside the drum without reducing the required
mortar content of the mix.
When the aggregate contains more water than the quantity necessary to produce a saturated surface dry
condition, representative samples shall be taken and the moisture content determined for each kind of
aggregate.
The batch shall be so charged into the mixer that some water will enter in advance of cement and aggregate.
All water shall be in the drum by the end of the first quarter of the specified mixing time. Cement shall be
Page 60
batched and charged into the mixer so that it will not result in loss of cement due to the effect of wind,
hoppers, or other conditions which reduce or vary the required quantity of cement in the concrete mixture.
The entire content of a batch mixer shall be removed from the drum before materials for a succeeding batch
are placed therein. The materials composting a batch except water shall be deposited simultaneously into the
mixer.
All concrete shall be mixed for a period of not less than 1 – ½ minutes after all materials, including water, are
in the mixer. During the period of mixing, the mixer shall operate at the speed for which it has been designed.
When mixing is to cease for a period of one hour or more, the mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned. Mixers and
agitators which have an accumulation of hard concrete or mortar shall not be used.
405.5 Formwork Construction
Concrete forms shall be mortar-tight, true to the dimensions, lines and grades of the structure and with
sufficient strength, rigidity, shape and surface smoothness as to leave the finished works true to the
dimension shown on the Plans or required by the Engineer and the surface finish as specified.
The inside surfaces of form shall be cleaned of all dirt, mortar and foreign material. Forms which will later be
removed shall be thoroughly coated with form oil prior to use. The form oil shall be of commercial quality form
oil or other approved coating which will permit the ready release of the forms and will not discolor the
concrete.
Concrete shall not be deposited in the forms until all work in connection with constructing the forms has been
completed, all inspected and approved said forms and materials. Such work shall include the removal of all
dirt, chips, sawdust and other foreign material from the forms.
The rate of depositing concrete in forms shall be such to prevent bulging of the forms or form panels in excess
of the deflections permitted by this Specification. . Forms shall have sufficient strength to withstand the
pressure resulting from placement and vibration of the concrete, and shall be maintained rigidly in correct
position
405.5.1 Removal of Forms and Falsework
Forms and falsework shall not be removed without the consent of the Engineer. The Engineer’s consent shall
not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the safety of the work. Blocks and bracing shall be removed at
the time the forms are removed and in no case shall any portion of the wood forms be left in the concrete.
Falsework removal for continuous or cantilevered structures shall be as directed by the Engineer or shall be
such that the structure is gradually subjected to its working stress.
When concrete strength tests are used for removal of forms and supports, such removal should not begin until
the concrete has attained the percentage of the specified design strength shown in the table below;
Table 405.1 – Requirements for Removal of Forms

Minimum Time Minimum Percentage
Element
Design Strength
Centering under beams frames or arches, girders 14 days 80 %
Floor slabs: 14 days 70 %
Walls 1 day 70 %
Columns 2 days 70 %
Sides of Beams and all other vertical surfaces 1 day 70 %
Page 61
Forms and falsework shall not be released from under concrete without first determining if the concrete has
gained adequate strength without regard to the time element. In the absence of strength determination, the
forms and falsework are to remain in place until removal is permitted by the Engineer.
To facilitate finishing, forms used on ornamental work, railing, parapets and exposed vertical surfaces shall be
removed in not less than 12 or more than 48 hours, depending upon the weather condition of concrete in
columns, forms shall always be removed from them before the removal of shoring from beneath beams and
girders.
405.5.2 Construction Joints
Construction joints shall be made only where shown on the Plans or called for in the pouring schedule, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer. Shear keys or reinforcement shall be used, unless otherwise specified,
to transmit shear or to bond the two sections together.
Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete which has hardened, the forms shall be retightened.
The surface of the hardened concrete shall be roughened as required by the Engineer, in a manner that will
not leave loose particles of aggregate or damage concrete at the surface.
The placing of concrete shall be carried continuously from joint to joint. The face edges of all joints which are
exposed to view shall be carefully finished true to line and elevation.
405.5.3 Concrete Surface Finishing
Surface finishing shall be classified as follows:
Class 1 - Ordinary Finish
Immediately following the removal of forms, all formwork and irregular protection shall be removed from all
surfaces except from those which are not to be exposed or are not to be waterproofed. On all surfaces the
cavities produced by form ties and all other holes, honeycomb spots, broken corners or edges and other
defects shall be thoroughly cleaned, and having been kept saturated with water and made true wit a mortar
and fine aggregate mixed in the proportions used in the grade of concrete being finished. Mortar to be used
shall not be more than one (1) hour old. The mortar patches shall be cured as specified under Subsection
407.3.8. All construction and expansion joints in the completed work shall be left carefully tooled and free of
all mortar and concrete. The joint filler shall be left exposed for its full length, with clean and true edges.
All concrete shall be given Class 1, Ordinary Finish and additionally any further finish as specified. The
resulting surfaces shall be true and uniform. All repaired surfaces, the appearance of which is not satisfactory
to the Engineer, shall be “rubbed” as specified below.
Class 2 - Rubbed Finish
After removal of forms, the rubbing of concrete shall be started as soon as its condition will permit.
Immediately before starting this work, the concrete shall be kept thoroughly saturated wit water foe a
minimum period of three hours. Sufficient time shall have elapsed before the wetting down to allow the mortar
used to thoroughly set. The mortar shall be composed of cement and fine sand mixed in the proportions used
in the grade of concrete being finished. Rubbing shall be continued until all form marks, protections and
irregularities have been removed, all voids have been filled, and a uniform surface has been obtained.
Unless otherwise specified, the following surfaces shall be given a Class 2, Rubbed Finish.
(1) The exposed faces of piers, abutments, wingwalls and retaining walls.
Page 62
(2) The outside faces of girders, T-beams, slabs, columns, brackets, curbs, headwalls, railings,
arch rings, spandrel walls and parapets.
The quantity of structural concrete to be paid for will be the final quantity placed and accepted in the
completed structure. No deduction will be made for the volume occupied less than 100 mm (4 inches) in
diameter or by reinforcing steel, anchor, conduits, weep hole or expansion joint materials.
The accepted quantities measured prescribed in Section 405.5., shall be paid for at the contract unit price for
each of the pay item listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities. Forms and accessories shall
likewise be included in each item.
Payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, placing and finishing concrete including all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in the item.
405 (1) Structural concrete, Class A Cubic meter
405 (2) Structural concrete, Class B Cubic meter
405 (3) Structural concrete, Class C Cubic meter
405 (4) Structural concrete, Class P Cubic meter
405 (5) Seal Concrete Cubic meter
ITEM 409 - WELDED STRUCTURAL STEEL
409.1 Description
This work shall consist of the joining of structural steel members with welds of the type, dimensions, and
design shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
It is the intent of this specification to provide for work of a quality comparable to that required under the
Standard Specifications for Welded Highway and Railway Bridges of the American Welding Society. In case
of dispute or for situations not adequately provided for in this Specification, those designated Standard
Specifications shall be considered as the final authority and shall govern except as amended by the Special
Provisions.
Welding of structural Steel shall be done only when shown on the Plans or authorized in writing by the
Engineer.
Steel base metal to be welded shall be open-hearth or electric furnace steel conforming to AASHTO M 183.
Page 63
All arc-welding electrodes shall conform to the requirements of American Welding Society Specifications.
Electrodes shall be of classification numbers E7016, E7018 or E7028 as required for the positions, type of
current and polarity, and other conditions of intended use, and to conform to any special requirements
indicated on the Plans.
Filler material to be used in the repair or strengthening of old structures or for joining new parts to existing
steel members, shall be adopted to the material to be welded and may depart from the foregoing
requirements only if agreed by the Engineer.
409.3.1 Equipment
409.3.1.1 General
All items of equipment for welding and gas cutting shall be so designed and manufactured and in such
condition as to enable qualified welders to follow the procedures and attain the results prescribed in this
specification.
409.3.1.2 Arc-Welding Equipment
Welding generators and transformers shall be designed expressly for welding. They shall be capable of
delivering steady currents adjustable through a range ample for the work requirements. They shall respond
automatically and quickly to changes in power requirements due to variations in arc length and shall deliver
full current promptly on striking an arc.
Welding cable shall have sufficient conductivity to avoid overheating and inadequate current at the arc and
shall be effectively insulated against welding circuit voltage. Earth or ground connections and circuits shall be
secured and adequate to carry the welding currents.
Electrode holders shall grip the electrode firmly and with good electrical contact.
Approved automatic welding heads may be used, with suitable auxiliary handling equipment to provide
automatic instead of manual control of electrode and welding arc.
409.3.1.3 Gas-Cutting Equipment
Torches and tips shall be of proper size and type of the work at hand. Suitable regulators shall afford the
welder complete control over the pressure and rate of flow of each gas.
409.3.1.4 Protective Equipment
All personnel protective equipment shall conform to the American Standard Association Code for such
equipment.
The Contractor shall enforce the use of approved accessories necessary for the protection and convenience
of the welders and for the proper and efficient execution of the work.
Suitable protection against the light of the arc shall be maintained by the Contractor when arc-welding
operation might be viewed within harmful range by persons other than the actual welders and inspectors.
409.3.2 Welding
409.3.2.1 General
Page 64
Welding shall be performed by the metal-arc process, using the electrodes specified with either direct or
alternating current.
Surfaces to be welded shall be smooth, uniform and free from fins, tears and other defects which would
adversely affect the quality of the weld. Edges of the material shall be trimmed by machining, chipping,
grinding or machine gas-cutting to produce a satisfactory welding edge wherever such edge is thicker than:
13 mm. for sheared edge of material; 16 mm. for toes of angles or rolled shapes (other than wide flange
sections); 25 mm. for universal mill plate or edges of flange sections.
The width of root face used, shall be not more than 1.5 mm. for parts less than 10 mm. in thickness nor more
than 3 mm. for parts 10 mm. or more in thickness.
Butt welds shall be proportioned so that their surface contours will lie in gradual transition curves. For butt
welded joints between base metal parts of unequal thickness, a transition shall be provided on a slope or level
not greater than 1 in 2.5 to join the offset surfaces. This transition may be provided by sloping the surface of
the weld metal or beveling the thicker part or by combination of these two methods.
Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust grease or other material that will prevent
proper welding. Scale mill that withstands vigorous wire brushing or a light film of drying oil or rust inhibitive
coating may remain. Surfaces
409.3.2.2 Welders
All welding shall be done by approved competent and experienced and fully qualified welders.
409.3.2.3 Preparation of Materials for Welding
Dimensional tolerance, straightness and flatness of the structural shapes and plates shall be within the limits
prescribed in this Specification.
Structural steel which is to be welded shall preferably not be painted until all welding is completed.
Preparation of edges by gas-cutting shall, wherever practicable, be done by machine gas-cutting. Machine
gas-cutting edges shall be substantially as smooth and regular as those produced by edge planning and shall
be left free of slag. Manual gas cutting shall be permitted only where machine gas-cutting is not practicable
and with the approval of the Engineer. The edge resulting from manual gas-cutting shall be inspected and
smoothed with special care. All re-entrant corners shall be filleted to a radius at least 19 mm. The cut lines
shall not extend beyond the fillet and all cutting shall follow closely the line prescribed.
409.3.2.4 Assembly
The parts to be joined by fillet welds shall be brought into a close contact as practicable, and no event shall be
separated more than 5 mm. If the separation is 1.5 mm. or greater, the leg of the fillet weld shall be increased
by the amount of separation. The separation between faying surfaces of lap joints and of butt joints landing on
a backing structure shall not exceed 1.5 mm. The fits of joints which are not sealed by welds throughout their
length shall be sufficiently close to exclude water after painting. Where irregularities in rolled shape or plates,
after straightening, do not permit contact within the above limits, the procedure necessary to bring the material
within these limits shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Cutting parts to be joined by butt welds shall be carefully aligned. Where the parts are effectively restrained
against bending due to eccentricity or alignment, a maximum offset of 10 percent of the thickness or the
thinner part joined, but in no case more than 3 mm., may be permitted as a departure from the theoretical
alignment. In connecting alignment in such cases, the parts shall not be drawn into a greater slope than two
Page 65
(2) degrees (1 in 30). Measurement of offset shall be between centerline of parts unless otherwise shown on
the Plans.
When parts abutting edge to edge differ in thickness, the joint shall be of such form that the slope of either
surface through the transition zone does not exceed 1 in 2.5, the thicker part being beveled, if necessary.
Members to be welded shall be brought into correct alignment and held in position by bolts, clamps, wedges,
guy lines, strut and other suitable devices or tack welds until welding has been completed. The use of jigs and
fixtures is recommended where applicable. Such fastening devices as may be used shall be adequate to
insure safety.
Plug and slot welds may be used to transmit shear in a lap joint or to prevent the buckling or separation of
lapped parts.
The diameter of the hole for a plug weld shall not be less than the thickness of the part containing it plus 8
mm. nor shall it be grater than 2.25 times the thickness of the weld.
The minimum center spacing of plug welds shall be four times the diameter of the hole.
The length of the slot for a slot weld shall not exceed ten times the thickness of the weld. The width of the slot
shall not be less than the thickness of the part containing it plus 8 mm. nor shall it be greater than 2.25 times
the thickness of the weld.
The ends of the slot shall be semicircular or shall have the corners rounded to a radius not less than the
thickness of the part containing it, except those ends which extend to the edge of the part.
The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in a direction transverse to their length shall be 4 times the width
of the slot. The minimum center to center spacing in a longitudinal direction on any line shall be 2 times the
length of the slot.
The thickness of plug or slot welds in material 16 mm. or less in thickness shall be equal to the thickness of
the material. In material over 16 mm. in thickness, it shall be at least one-half the thickness of the material but
not less than 16 mm.
Tack welds, located where the final welds will later be made, shall be subject to the same quality
requirements as the final weld. Tack welds shall be as small as practicable and where encountered in the final
welding, shall be cleaned and fused thoroughly with the final weld. Defective, cracked or broken tack welds
shall be removed before final welding.
Members or component parts of structures shall be assembled and matchmarked prior to erection to insure
accurate assembly and adjustment of position on final erection. Painted assembly marks shall be removed
from any surface to be welded.
409.3.2.5 Control of Distortion and Shrinkage Stresses
In assembling and joining parts of a structure or a built-up member and in welding reinforcing parts to existing
members, the procedure and sequence of welding shall be such as will avoid distortion and minimize
shrinkage stresses.
As far as practicable, long parallel lines of welding on a part or member shall be executed concurrently, and
all welds shall be deposited in a sequence that will balance the applied heat of welding on various sides as
much as possible while the welding progresses.
Page 66
Before the commencement of welding on a structural member in which severe shrinkage stresses or distortion
are likely to occur, a complete program for welding sequence and distortion control shall be submitted to the
Engineer and shall be subject to his approval.
The direction of the general progression in welding on a member shall be from points where parts are
relatively fixed in position, with respect to each other, towards points which have a greater relative freedom of
movement.
Where part or member is to be welded on both ends into a rigid structure or assembly, the connection at
which the greatest shrinkage will occur in the direction of the length of the part or member, shall be made
while the part or member is free to move in the direction of the shrinkage; and the connection involving the
least shrinkage shall be made last.
A weld designed to sustain tensile stress shall be made in such a way that their welding is being performed at
any point and all parts that would offer restraint against shrinkage can shrink, deform or move enough to
preclude serious shrinkage stresses.
The ends of all butt welds in flanges of beams and girders shall be made with extension bars regardless of the
thickness of such flanges.
Welding shall not be done when surfaces are wet from condensation or rain which is falling on the surfaces to
be welded; nor during periods of high winds unless the welding operator and the work are properly protected.
409.3.2.6 Technique of Arch-Welding
The welding current shall conform with respect to voltage and current (and polarity, of direct current is used)
to the recommendations of the manufacturer of the electrode being used, as indicated in the instructions that
are included with each container of electrodes. Arc lengths and electrical potential and current shall be suited
to the thickness of material, type of groove and other circumstances attendant to the work.
The maximum size of electrode permitted shall be 5 mm. with the following exceptions:
1. The maximum size for flat position welding of all passes except the root pass shall be 8 mm.
2. The maximum size for horizontal fillet welds shall be 6 mm.
The electrode for the single pass fillet weld and for the root passes of all multiple layer welds in all cases shall
be of the proper size to insure thorough fusion and penetration with freedom from slag inclusions.
A single layer of the weld metal, whether deposited in one pass or made up of several parallel beads, shall
not exceed 3 mm. in thickness except that the bead at the root may be 6 mm. in thickness if the position of
welding and the viscosity of the weld metal permit control of the latter so that it does not over flow upon
unfused base metal.
In vertical welding the first root pass shall be formed from the bottom upward. Succeeding passes may be
formed by any technique that will fulfill the requirements of the Specification and Plans.
The electrode fusion between the base metal and the deposited weld metal is obtained.
1. Complete fusion between the base metal and the deposited weld metal is obtained.
2. The melted base metal is replaced by weld metal so that no undercut remains along the edges of the
finished weld.
3. The molten metal floats all slag, oxide and gases to the surface behind the advancing arc.
Page 67
Each time the arc is started, either to begin a weld or to continue partly completed weld, the arc shall be
manipulated to obtain complete fusion of the deposited weld metal with the base metal and with any
previously deposited weld metal, before any progression of the arc along the joint.
At the completion of a pass or weld, the arc shall be manipulated so as to fill the crater with sound metal.
Before welding over previously deposited metal, the slag shall be removed and the weld and adjacent base
metal shall be brushed clean. This requirement shall apply not only to cratered areas but also when is
resumed after any interruption. It shall not, however, restrict the making of plug and slot welds, in accordance
with the following paragraphs.
In making plug welds the following techniques shall be used:
1. For flat welds, the arc shall be carried around the root of the joint and then weaved along a spiral
path to the center of the hole, fusing and depositing a layer of weld metal in the root and bottom of
the joint. The arc shall then be carried to the periphery of the hole, and the procedure repeated,
fusing and depositing successive layers to fill the hole to the depth required. The slag covering the
weld metal shall be kept molten, or nearly so, until the weld is finished. If the arc is broken, except
briefly for changing electrodes, the slag must be allowed to cool and shall be completely removed
before restarting the weld.
2. For vertical welds, the arc shall be started at the root of the joint, at the lower side of the hole and
carried upward on the zigzag path, depositing a layer about 5 mm. thick on the exposed face at the
thinner plate and fused to it and to the side of the hole. After cleaning the slag from the weld, other
layers shall be similarly deposited to fill the hole to the required depth.
3. For overhead welds, the procedure shall be the same as for flat welds except that the slag shall be
allowed to cool and shall be completely removed after depositing each successive layer until the hole
is filled to the required depth.
Slot welds shall be made with a technique similar to that specified above for plug welds, except that if the
length of the slot exceeds three times the width, or the slot extends to the edges of the part of the technique
specified above for making plug welds shall be followed for the type of flat position welds.
409.3.2.7 Details of Welds
The following tabulation shows that the relation between weld size and the maximum thickness of material on
which various sizes of fillet welds may be used:
Size of Fillet Weld Maximum Thickness of Part

5 mm 13 mm
6 mm 19 mm
8 mm 32 mm
10 mm 51 mm
13 mm 152 mm
16 mm over 152 mm
The maximum size of fillet weld that may be used along the edge of material 6 mm. or more in thickness shall
be 1.5 mm less than the thickness of the material.
The minimum effective length of fillet weld shall be four times its size and in no case less than 38 mm.
409.3.2.8 Quality of Welds
Page 68
Weld metal shall be solid throughout except that very small gas pockets and small inclusions of oxide or slag
may be accepted if well dispersed and if none exceeds 1.5 mm in greatest dimension, and if the sum of the
greatest dimensions of all such defects of weld metal area does not exceed 15 mm. in an area of 10 cm².
There shall be complete fusion between the weld metal and the base metal and between successive passes
throughout the joint.
Welds shall be free from overlap and the base metal free from undercutting. All craters shall be filled to the full
cross-section of the welds.
409.3.2.9 Correction
In lieu of rejection of an entire piece of member containing welding which is unsatisfactory or indicates inferior
workmanship, the following corrective measures may be permitted by the Engineer whose specific approval
shall be obtained for making each correction:
1. Removal of parts or all of the welds shall be affected by chipping, grinding or gas-gouging.
2. Defective or unsound welds shall be corrected wither by removing and replacing the welds, or as
follows:
a. Excessive convexity – Reduce to size by removal of excess weld metal.

b. Shrinkage crack in base metal, craters and excessive porosity – Remove defective portion of
base and weld metal down to sound metal and deposit additional weld metal.
c. Undercutting, undersize and excessive concavity – Clean and deposit additional weld metal.
d. Overlapping and lack of fusion – Remove and replace the defective length of weld.
e. Slag inclusion – Remove those parts of the weld containing slag and fill with weld metal.
f. Removal of adjacent base metal during welding – Clean and form full size by depositing
additional weld metal.
3. Where corrections require the depositing of additional weld metal, the electrode used shall be
smaller than the electrode used in making the original weld.
4. A cracked weld shall be removed throughout its length, unless by the use of acid etching, magnetic
inspection or other equally positive means, the extent of the crack can be ascertained to be limited,
in which case sound metal 50 mm. or more beyond each end of the crack need not be removed.
5. In removing defective parts of a weld, the gas-gouging, chipping or grinding shall not extend into the
base metal any substantial amount beyond the depth of the web penetration unless cracks or other
defects exist in the base metal.
6. Where the work performed subsequent to the making of a deficient weld has rendered the weld
inaccessible or has caused new conditions which would make the correction of the deficiency
dangerous or ineffectual, the original condition shall be restored by renewal of welds or members, or
both before making the necessary corrections, or else the deficiency shall be compensated by
additional work according to a revised design approved by the Engineer.
7. Caulking of weld shall not be done.
8. Before adding weld metal or re-welding, the surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly. Where incomplete
fusion is disclosed by chipping, grinding or gas gouging, to correct defects, that part of the weld shall
be removed and rewelded.
409.3.2.10 Stress Relieving
Peening to reduce residual stress of multi-layer welds may be used only if authorized and ordered by the
Engineer. Care shall be exercised to prevent overpeening which may cause overlapping, scaling, flecking or
excessive cold working of weld and base metal.
409.3.2.11 Cleaning and protective Coatings
Page 69
Painting shall not be done until the work has been accepted and shall be in accordance with the Specification.
The surface to be painted shall be cleaned of spatter, rust, loose scale, oil and dirt. Slag shall be cleaned from
all welds.
Welds that are to be galvanized shall be treated to remove every particle of slag.
409.3.2.12 Identification
The operator shall place his identification mark with crayon, or paint, near the welds made by him.
409.3.2.13 Inspection
On completion of the welding work, inspection shall be carried out by as inspector appointed by the Engineer.
The size and contour of welds shall be measured with suitable gauges. The inspector shall identify with a
distinguishing mark all welds that he has inspected and accepted.
The Contractor shall remove and replace, or correct as instructed, all welds found defective or deficient. He
shall also replace all methods found to produce inferior results, with methods which will produce satisfactory
work.
409.4 Measurement and Payment
Unless otherwise provided in the Special Provisions, welded structural steel structures shall not be measured
and paid for separately, but the cost thereof shall be considered as included in the contract price for other
items.
ITEM 411 PAINTINGS
411.1 Description
This item covers all paint materials including Vehicles, Pigment, Pastes, Driers, Thinners, and Mixed Paints
for steel, wooden and concrete structures. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect the
work during application and shall be responsible for any and all damage to the work until completion.
Page 70
411.2.1 General
Paints, except aluminum paint, shall consist of pigments of the required fineness and composition ground to
the desired consistency in linseed oil in a suitable grinding machine, to which shall be added additional oil, or
thinner and drier as required.
Aluminum paints shall consist of aluminum bronze powder or paste of the required fineness and composition
to which shall be added the specified amount of vehicle.
The paint shall be furnished for use in ready mixed, paste or powder form. All paint shall meet the following
general requirement, otherwise specified in the Plans;
(a) The paint shall show no excessive setting and shall easily be re-dispensed with a paddle to a
smooth, homogenous state. The paint shall show no curdling, livering, caking or color separation and shall be
free from lumps and skins.
(b) The paint as received shall brush easily, possess good leveling properties and shall show no running
or sagging when applied to a smooth vertical surface.
(c) The paint shall not skin within 48 hours in three quarters (3/4) filled closed container.
411.2.2 The paint shall conform to the requirements of the Specifications indicated as follows:
Type As Required
Red Lead ready mixed paint AASHTO M 72 & PNS, Type I, II, III and IV
Aluminum paint AASHTO M 69, Type I and II
White and Tinted ready mixed paint AASHTO M 70
Foliage Green paint AASHTO M 67
Basic Lead Silicon Chromate AASHTO M 68
Ready mixed primer AASHTO M 229
Ready mixed Aluminum Paint AASHTO M 260 and PNS
411.3.1 Proportion of Mixing
It is the intent of this Specification to provide a paint of proper brushing consistency, which will not run, steak
or sag and which will have satisfactory drying qualities.
411.3.2 Aluminum Paint, Field Coats on Structural Steel
The paint shall be mixed in the proportioned of 240 grams of aluminum powder or paste per liter of vehicle of
long oil spar varnish. This makes a paint containing 21 percent pigment and 79 percent vehicle. The weighted
amount of powder or paste shall be placed in a suitable mixing container and the measured volume of vehicle
poured over it.. The paste or powder shall be incorporated in the paint by vigorous stirring with a paddle. The
powder or paste will readily disperse in the vehicle. Before removing any paint from the container, the paint
shall be thoroughly stirred to insure a uniform mixture, and the paint shall be suitably stirred during use. The
paint shall be mixed on the job and only enough for one day’s use shall be mixed at one time.
Page 71
When two field coats of aluminum paint are specified, the first coat shall be tinted with lampblack paste or
Prussian blue paste in the quantity of 24 grams/liter of paint. The exact quantity used shall be sufficient to give
a contrast in color which can be readily distinguished. When three field coats of aluminum paint are specified,
the second coat shall be tinted.
411.3.3 Aluminum Paint, Field Coats on Creosoted Timber
The paint shall be mixed as specified for Aluminum paint for Structural Steel except that the proportions shall
be 270 grams of aluminum powder or paste to one liter of vehicle.
Other paint composition may be used when and as stipulated in the Special Provisions.
411.3.4 Containers and Markings
All paints shall be shipped to strong substantial containers plainly marked with the weight, color and volume in
liters of the paint content, a true statement of the percentage composition of the pigment, the proportions of
the pigment to vehicle, the name and address of the manufacturers, and the stencil of the authorized
inspecting agency. Any package or container not so marked will not be accepted for use.
411.3.5 Sampling and Testing
Method of sampling shall be as follows:
(1) One 20-litre can sample in original unopened container shall be obtained for 100 cans of the
delivered material or 10% fraction thereof.
(2) One 4-litre can sample in original unopened container shall be obtained for 100 cans or fraction
thereof of the delivered material.
Methods of testing will be in accordance with the applicable AASHTO or ASTM Methods.
411.3.6 Painting
The Contractor shall examine carefully all surfaces to be painted and before beginning any of his work, shall
see that the work of other trades has been left or installed in workmanlike condition to receive paint.
Metal surfaces shall be clean, dry, and free from mill scale, rust, grease, oil, or any other substances, which
could affect the quality of the painting.
Each coat of paint shall be applied at proper consistency and brushed evenly, free of brush marks, sags, runs, and
with no evidence of poor workmanship. Care shall be exercised to avoid lapping of paint on glass or hardware.
Paint shall be sharply cut to lines and finished paint surfaces shall be free from defects or blemishes.
Protective covering shall be used to protect floors, fixtures, and equipment. Care shall be exercised to prevent
paint from being spattered onto surfaces, which are not to be painted. Surfaces from which such paint cannot
be removed satisfactorily shall be painted or repainted, as required, to produce a finish satisfactory to the
Engineer.
No painting shall be done under conditions of weather, moisture, or temperature unsuited to good work, nor
until previous coat is hard and dry.
All painting materials shall be used in strict accordance with manufacturer’s directions, spread or flowed on
smoothly with proper film thickness and without runs, sags, or other defects.
411.3.6.1 Storage of Materials
Page 72
The Contractor shall store all painting materials and equipment not in immediate use in a room approved by
the Engineer for that purpose. The receiving and opening of all paint materials and mixing shall be done in
this room.
Necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent fire. Rags, waste, etc., soiled with paint shall be removed
from the premises at the end of each day’s work, or stored in metal containers with metal covers.
411.3.6.2 Preparation of Paint
Paint containers shall be delivered to the job site in the manufacturer’s unopened containers and shall be opened
only when required for use. Paint shall be mixed only in the designated room or space in the presence of owner’s
representative. Paint shall be thoroughly stirred or agitated to a uniformly smooth consistency suitable for proper
application. Unless otherwise specified or approved, no materials shall be reduced, changed, or used except in
accordance with manufacturer’s label or tag on the container. In all cases, paint shall be prepared and handled in
a manner to prevent deterioration and inclusion of foreign matter.
411.3.6.3 Clean Up
Upon completion of his work, the Contractor shall remove all surplus materials. All paint spills shall be
removed and the entire premises shall be free from rubbish, debris, etc., caused by his work. He shall present
the work clean and free from blemish so that it is acceptable in every way. All glass shall be cleaned of paint
spots and polished, and the job made ready for occupancy by the Owner.
411.3.6.4 Colors and Samples
All finish colors shall be as selected by the Owner. In multicoated work using color pigmented paints, each
coat shall have sufficient variation of color to easily distinguish it from preceding coat. Using specified or
approved materials, three (3) sample panels of each finish, including all coats thereof shall be prepared and
submitted for the Owner’s approval. Completed work shall match approved colors and samples.
411.4 Preparation of Surfaces
411.4.1 General
Except as otherwise specified, surfaces to be painted shall be clean, smooth, and dry. The Contractor shall
report to the Engineer in writing any surface, which cannot be properly prepared for painting. If work is
commenced before defects have been reported and corrected, any unsatisfactory finish shall be rectified by
the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
411.4.2 Painting Concrete and Masonry
All concrete and masonry surface shall cure thirty (30) days prior to painting. Dirt, dust, oil, grease,
efflorescence, and other deleterious matter shall be removed and surface roughened when necessary to
insure good paint adhesion. The method of surface preparation shall be left to the discretion of the Contractor,
provided results obtained are satisfactory to the Engineer. Before application of resin emulsion paint, surfaces
shall be prepared in accordance with manufacturer’s direction. Before application of oil base or latex paints,
surfaces shall be tested for presence of alkali. If alkali is present, surface shall be neutralized as
recommended by the manufacturer of the paint materials to be applied.
Page 73
Dirt, dust, loose plaster, and other deleterious matter, which would prevent good paint adhesion, shall be
removed. All holes, cracks, and depressions shall be neatly filled with patching plaster mixed and applied to
match the existing plaster. Patches shall be sanded flush and smooth and properly sealed before applying
prime coat. After priming surfaces, suction spots shall be touched up with additional prime coat material until
surfaces evidence a uniform coating. Enamel undercoats on smooth plaster shall be sandpapered by hand
(with No. 00 sandpaper) and dusted clean before applying the succeeding coat.
411.4.3 Painting Structural Steel
Dirt, scale, and rust shall be removed by scrapping, wire brushing, and sanding or sandblasting as required.
Mill scales shall be completely removed from fabricated parts of the new-elevated steel tank either in the
shops or in the field. Mill scales can be removed in the shop either by cleaning or pickling. In such case, the
steel must be painted before rusting or surface soiling occurs with zinc dust, phenolic primers to effect proper
adhesion of the first field coat. If mill scales are removed in the field prior to welding, all welded joints should b
e cleared of slag and weld spatter by blasting either by nozzle or with spot blasting equipment. Where blasting
is not practical, grinding, sanding, or brushing may be used provided satisfactory degree of cleaning is
obtained.
Oil and grease shall be removed with mineral spirits or appropriate solvent. Before painting, ferrous metal,
surfaces, including galvanized ferrous metal surfaces shall be pretreated with approved phosphoric acid
etching cleaner in accordance with manufacturer’s direction to produce a chemically clean surface. Unless
already performed in accordance with specifications of other sections, abrasions and bare spots in shop prime
coatings shall be touched up with metal primer matching shop coatings. Enamel undercoats shall be
sandpapered by hand (with No. 00 sandpaper) and dusted clean before applying succeeding coats.
411.4.4 Painting Woodwork
Unless already properly sanded, woodwork shall be sandpapered smooth by hand. Before priming surfaces,
knots pitch pocket and sap streaks shall be thoroughly cleaned of residue and touched up with shellac varnish
coating. After priming surface, nail holes, cracks, and depressions shall be neatly filled with putty or other
approved filler, colored to match required finish. Enamel undercoats shall be sanded by hand (with No. 00
sandpaper) and dusted clean before applying succeeding coat.
411.4.5 Application of Paint
411.4.5.1 General
All painting and finishing shall be performed by skilled craftsman. Each coat of paint shall be applied at proper
consistency, evenly, and free of laps, sags, and runs and cut sharply to require lines. Except as otherwise
specified or required, paint shall be applied only under dry and dust-free conditions that will insure properly
finished surfaces, free of defects and blemishes. Paint shall not be applied when temperature is likely to be
above 32°C (90°F). Sufficient time shall be allowed between coats to insure proper drying. All primer and
intermediate coats shall be unscarred and completely integral at time of application of each succeeding coat.
The Engineer shall be notified when each coat has been applied and is ready for inspection. Until each coat is
inspected and approved by Engineer, no succeeding coats shall be applied. Whenever two coats of a dark
colored paint are specified, the first coat shall contain sufficient powdered aluminum to act as an indicator for
proper coverage when applying the second coat.
411.4.5.2 Methods of Application
Page 74
Except as otherwise specified or when, in the opinion of the Engineer, a particular method would produce
unsatisfactory results, paint may be applied by brush, spray, or other application method at the option of the
Contractor.
Priming and Back Painting
1. Priming
Before installation, all surfaces of millwork, which are to be painted, shall be primed, giving particular
attention to sealing of cross-grained surfaces. In all cases, all work shall be primed as soon as possible
after delivery to buildings, before or after installation, as required, or, in case of prefabricated items, at
fabricator’s shop or mill before shipment, if practicable. Except as otherwise specified, priming shall
consist of first coat hereinafter specified under Section 14.10, Painting Systems.
2. Back Painting
Woodwork millwork, and casework to be installed against concrete, masonry, or plaster shall be back painted
with one coat of exterior oil paint.
411.5 Measurement and Payment
Painting shall not be measured and paid for separately, but the cost thereof shall be considered as included in
the contract unit price of the Items where called for.
Page 75
DRAINAGEAND
SLOPE
PROTECTION
Part F
PART F DRAINAGE AND SLOPE PROTECTION
ITEM 500 PIPE CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS
500.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the construction or reconstruction of pipe culverts and storm drains, hereinafter
referred to as “conduits” in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the lines and grades
shown on the Plans or as established by the Engineer.
Material shall meet the requirements specified in the following specifications:
Zinc coated (galvanized corrugated iron or steel culverts and underdrains AASHTO M 36
Cast iron culvert pipe AASHTO M 64
Concrete sewer, Storm drain and culvert Pipe AASHTO M 86
Reinforced concrete culvert, Storm drain and sewer Pipe AASHTO M 170
Joint Mortar – Joint mortar for concrete pipes shall consist of 1 part, by volume of Portland cement and two
parts of approved sand with water as necessary to obtain the required consistency.
Portland cement and sand shall conform to the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete. Mortar shall be
used within 30 minutes after its preparation.
Rubber Gaskets AASHTO M 198
Oakum – Oakum for joints in bell and spigot pipes shall be made from hemp (cannavis sativa) line or Benares
Sunn fiber or from a combination of these fibers. The oakum shall be thoroughly corded and finished and
practically free from lumps, dirt and extraneous matter.
Hot poured joint sealing compound AASHTO M 173
Bedding material shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 500.3.6, Bedding.
Page 76
When the location of manufacturing plants allow, the plants will be inspected periodically for compliance with
specified manufacturing methods, and material samples will be obtained for laboratory testing for compliance
with materials quality requirements. This shall be the basis for acceptance of manufacturing lots as to quality.
Prior to and during incorporation of materials in the work, these materials will be subjected to the latest
inspection and approval of the Engineer.
Trenches shall be excavated in accordance with the requirement of Item 103, Structure Excavation, to a width
sufficient to allow for proper jointing of the conduit and thorough compaction of the bedding and backfill
materials under and around the conduit. Where feasible, trench wall shall be vertical.
The completed trench bottom shall be firm for its full length and width. Where required, in the case of crop
drains, the trench shall have a longitudinal camber of the magnitude specified.
When so specified on the Plans, the excavation for conduits placed in embankment fill, shall be made after
the embankment has been completed to the specified or directed height above the designed grade of the
conduit.
500.3.2 Bedding
The bedding shall conform to one of the classes specified. When no bedding class is specified, the
requirements for Class C bedding shall apply.
Class A bedding shall consist of a continuous concrete cradle conforming to the plan details.
Class B bedding shall consist of bedding the conduit to a depth of not less than 30 percent of the vertical
outside diameter of the conduit. The minimum thickness of bedding material beneath the pipe shall be 100
mm. The bedding material shall be sand or selected sandy soil all of which passes a 9.5 mm. sieve and not
more than 10 percent of which passes a 0.075 mm. sieve. The layer of the bedding material shall be shaped
to fit the conduit for at least 15 percent of its total height. Recesses in the trench bottom shall be shaped to
accommodate the bell when bell and spigot type conduit is used.
Class C bedding shall consist of bedding the conduit to a depth of not less than 10 percent of its total height.
The foundation surface, completed in accordance with Item 103, Structure Excavation, shall be shaped to fit
the conduit and shall have recesses shaped to receive the bells, if any.
For flexible pipe, the bed shall be roughly shaped and a bedding blanket of sand or fine granular material as
specified above shall be provided as follows:
Pipe Corrugation Depth Minimum Bedding Depth
10 mm 25 mm
25 mm 50 mm
50 mm 75 mm
For large diameter structural plate pipes the shaped bed need not exceed the width of bottom plate.
500.3.3 Laying Conduit
The conduit laying shall begin at the downstream end of the conduit line. The lower segment of the conduit
shall be in contact with the shaped bedding throughout its full length. Bell or groove ends of rigid conduits and
Page 77
outside circumferential laps of flexible conduits shall be placed facing upstream. Flexible conduit shall be
placed with longitudinal laps or seams at the sides.
Paved or partially-lined conduit shall be laid such that the longitudinal center line of the paved segment
coincides with the flow line. Elliptical and elliptically reinforced conduits shall be placed with the major axis
500.3.4 Jointing Conduit
Rigid conduits may either be of bell and spigot or tongue and groove design unless another type is specified.
The method of joining conduit sections shall be such that the ends are fully entered and the inner surfaces are
reasonably flush and even.
Joints shall be made with (a) Portland cement mortar, (b) Portland cement grout, (c) rubber gasket, (d) oakum
and mortar, (e) oakum and joint compound, (f) plastic sealing compound, or by a combination of these type, or
any other type, as may be specified. Mortar joints shall be made with an excess of mortar to form a
continuous bead around the outside of the conduit and finished smooth on the inside. Foe grouted joints,
molds or runners shall be used to retain the poured grout. Rubber ring gasket shall be installed so as to form
a flexible water-tight seal. Where oakum is used, the joint shall be called with this material and then sealed
with the specified material.
When Portland cement mixtures are used, the completed joints shall be protected against rapid drying by any
suitable covering material.
Flexible conduits shall be firmly joined by coupling bands.
Conduits shall be inspected before any backfill is placed. Any pipe found to be out of alignment, unduly
settled, or damaged shall be taken up and relaid or replaced.
500.3.5 Field Strutting
When required by the Plans, vertical diameter of round flexible conduit shall be increased 5 % by shop
elongation or by means of jacks applied after the entire line of conduit has been installed on the bending but
before backfilling. The vertical elongation shall be maintained by means of sills and struts or by horizontal ties
shall be used on paved invert pipe.
Ties and struts shall be 300 mm. in place until the embankment is completed and compacted, unless
otherwise shown on the Plans.
These construction specifications shall also apply in the case of relaid conduits. In addition, all conduits
salvaged for relaying shall be cleaned of all foreign materials prior to reinstallation.
500.3.6 Backfilling
Materials for backfilling on each side of the conduit for the full trench width and to an elevation of 300 mm
above the top of the conduit shall be fine, readily compactible soil or granular material selected from
excavation or from a source of the Contractor’s choice, and shall not contain stones that would be retained on
a 50 mm sieve, chunks or highly plastic clay, or other objectionable material. Granular backfill material shall
have not less than 95 percent retained on a 4.75 mm. sieve. Oversized material, if present, shall be removed
at the source of the material, except as directed by the Engineer.
When the top of the conduit is flushed with or below the top of the trench, backfill material shall be placed at
or near optimum moisture content and compacted in layers not exceeding 150 mm (compacted) on both sides
to an elevation 300 mm. above the top of the conduit. Care shall be exercised to thoroughly compact the
backfill under the haunches of the conduit. The backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the conduit
Page 78
for the full required length. Except where negative projecting embankment-type installation is specified, the
backfill material shall be placed and compacted for the full depth of the trench.
Compaction to the density specified in Item 104, Embankment, shall be achieved by use of mechanical
tampers or by rolling.
All conduits after being bedded and backfill as specified in this subsection shall be protected by one meter
cover of fill before heavy equipment is permitted to cross during construction of the roadway.
500.3.7 Imperfect Trench
Under this method, for rigid conduit, the embankment shall be completed as described in subsection 500.3.6,
Backfilling, to a height above the conduit equal to the vertical outside diameter of the conduit plus 300 mm. A
trench equal in width to the outside horizontal diameter of the conduit and to the length shown on the Plans or
as directed by the Engineer shall then be excavated to within 300 mm. of the top of the conduit, trench walls
being as nearly vertical as possible. The trench shall be loosely filled with highly compressible soil.
Construction of embankment above shall then proceed in a normal manner.
Conduit of the different types and sizes, both new and relaid, will be measured by the linear meter in place.
Conduit with sloped or skewed ends will be measured along the invert.
Each section will be measured by the number of units installed.
Branch connection and elbows will be included in the length measurement for conduit, or they may be
measured by the number of units installed.
Class B bedding material placed and approved shall be measured by the cubic meter in place.
When the Bid Schedule contains an estimated quantity for “Furnishing and Placing Backfill Material, Pipe
Culvert”, the quantity to be paid for will be the number of cubic meter complete in place and accepted,
measured in final position between limits as follows:
1. Measurement shall include backfill material in the trench up to the top of the original ground line but
will not include any material placed outside of vertical planes 450 mm. up outside of and parallel to
the inside wall of pipe at its widest horizontal dimension.
2. When the original ground line is less than 300 mm. above the top of the pipe, the measurement will
also include the placing of all backfill materials, above the original ground line adjacent to the pipe for
a height of 300 mm above the top of pipe and for a distance on each side of the pipe not greater than
the widest horizontal dimension of the pipe.
3. The measurement shall include the placing of backfill material in all trenches of the imperfect trench
method. Materials re-excavated for imperfect trench construction will be measured for payment
under Item 103, Structure Excavation.
The accepted quantities of conduits, determined as provided in Section 500.4, Method of measurement shall
be paid for at the contract unit price per linear meter for the conduit of type and sizes specified complete in
place. End sections and, when so specified, branch connections and elbows, shall be paid for at the contract
unit price per piece for the kind and size specified complete in place.
Page 79
Excavation for culverts and storm drains, including excavation below flow line grade and for imperfect trench,
shall be measured and paid for as provided in Item 103, Structural Excavation.
Concrete for Class A bedding will be paid for under Item 405 Structural Concrete.
When the Bid schedule does not contain as estimated quantity for “Furnishing and Placing Backfill material,
Pipe Culvert”, payment for placing backfill material around pipe culverts will be considered as included in the
payment for excavation of the backfill material.
500 (1) Pipe Culverts, mm Class- Linear meter

500 (2) Storm Drain, mm Class- Linear meter
Page 80
ITEM 502 MANHOLES, INLETS AND CATCH BASINS
502.1 Description
This item shall consist of the construction, reconstruction or adjustment of manholes, inlets and catch basins
in accordance with this Specification and in reasonably close conformity with the lines and grades shown on
the Plans or as established by the Engineer.
Concrete for these structures shall meet the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete. Other materials
shall meet the following specifications:
Corrugated Metal Units – The units shall conform to Plan dimensions and the metal to AASHTO M 36.
Bituminous coating, when specified, shall conform to ASTM D 1187, Asphalt-base Emulsion for use as
protective Coating for metal.
Sewer and manhole brick

(made from clay or shale ) AASHTO M 91
Building brick (solid masonry units

(made from clay or shale) AASHTO M 114
Joint Mortar – Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, joints mortar shall be composed of one part Portland
cement and two parts fine aggregates by volume to which hydrated lime has been added in an amount equal
to 10 percent of the cement by weight. All materials for mortar shall meet the requirements of Item 405,
Structural Concrete.
Frames, Gratings, Covers and Ladder Rungs – Metal units shall conform to the plan dimensions and to the
following specification requirements for the designated materials.
Metal gratings and covers which are to rest on frames shall bear on them evenly. They shall be assembled
before shipment and so marked that the same pieces may be reassembled readily in the same position when
installed. Inaccuracy of bearings shall be corrected by machining, if necessary. A frame and a grating or cover
to be used with it shall constitute one pair.
All casting shall be uniformly coated with asphalt-based emulsion for use as protective coating for metal.
Samples of the material in casting shall be taken during the casting of the units and shall be separate casting
poured from the same material as the casting they represent.
Gray Iron Casting AASTHO M 105
Mild to Medium-Strength Carbon Steel

Casting for general application AASHTO M 103
Structural Steel AASHTO 183
Galvanizing, where specified for these

Units, shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 111
Reinforcing Steel AASHTO M 31
Page 81
Pre-cast Concrete Units – These units shall be cast in substantial permanent steel forms. Structural concrete
used shall attain a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 20.682 Mpa (3000 psi). The pre-cast units shall
be cured in accordance in accordance with AASHTO M 171. Water absorption of individual cores taken from
such units shall not exceed 7 percent. Additional reinforcement shall be provided as necessary to provide for
handling of the pre-cast units.
A sufficient number of cylinders shall be cast from the concrete for each unit permit compression tests at 7, 14
and 28 days, and to allow for at least 3 cylinders for each test. If the strength requirement is met at 7 or 14
days, the units shall be certified for use 14 days from the date of casting. If the strength is not met at 28 days,
all units made from that batch or load will be rejected.
Cracks in units, honeycombed or patched areas in excess of 2,000 square millimeters, excessive water
absorption and failure to meet strength requirements shall be the causes for rejection. Pre-cast reinforced
concrete manhole risers and tops shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 199.
The plants will be inspected periodically for compliance with specified manufacturing methods, and material
samples will be obtained for laboratory testing for compliance with material quality requirements. This may be
the basis for acceptance of manufacturing lots as the quality.
All materials shall be subjected to inspection for acceptance as to condition at the latest practicable time the
Engineer has the opportunity to check for compliance prior to or during incorporation of materials into the
work.
Concrete construction shall conform to the requirements for Item 405, Structural Concrete.
Metal frames shall be set in full mortar bed. Pipe sections shall be flushed on the inside of the structure wall
and projected outside sufficiently for proper connection with next pipe section. Masonry shall fit neatly and
tightly around the pipe.
When grade adjustment or existing structures is specified, the frames, covers and gratings shall be removed
and the walls reconstructed as required. The cleaned frames shall be reset at the required elevation. Upon
completion, each structure shall be cleaned of any accumulation of silt, debris or foreign matter of any kind
and shall be kept clear of such accumulation until final acceptance of the work.
Excavation and backfill shall be done in accordance with Item 103, Structure Excavation.
Standard manholes, inlets and catch basins, both new and reconstructed as applicable, will be measured by
the unit. Any additional concrete reinforcing steel, or masonry required for authorized increases in heights of
structures paid for under this Item and in excess of the standard height shown on the Plans will be measured
and paid for under Item 405, Structural Concrete and Item 404, Reinforcing Steel, as applicable. Structures
noted on the Plans as “junction boxes” will be measured for payment as manholes.
The number of concrete covers, pairs of metal frames and gratings, and pairs of metal frames and covers will
be measured as acceptably completed.
The number of existing manholes, inlets and catch basins adjusted as directed will be measured as
acceptably completed.
Page 82
The accepted quantities, determined as provided in Section 502.4, Method of Measurement of the Pay Items
in the Bill of Quantities will be paid for at the contract unit prices, which shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing and placing all materials and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete
the Item.
Excavation and backfill will be measured and paid for as provided in Item 103, Structure Excavation.
502 (1) Manholes Each

502 (2) Inlets, type Each
502 (3) Catch Basins Each
502 (4) Concrete Covers Each
502 (5) Metal frames and
gratings, type Pair
502 (6) Metal frames
and covers Pair
502 (7) Adjusting manholes Each
502 (8) Adjusting inlets Each
502 (9) Adjusting catch basin Each
Page 83
ITEM 505 RIPRAP AND GROUTED RIPRAP
505.1 Description
This item shall consist of the furnishing and placing of riprap with or without as the case may be , with or
without filter backing, furnished and constructed in accordance with this Specification and to the lines and
grades and dimensions shown on the Plans.
505.2.1 Stones
Stones for riprap shall consist of rock as neatly as rectangular in section as is practical, except that riprap of
Class A may consist of round natural stones. The stones shall be sound, tough, durable, dense, resistant to
the action of air and water, and suitable in all respects for the purpose intended.
Stones for riprap shall be one of the following classes as shown on the Plans or determined by the Engineer.
Class A - Stones ranging from a minimum of 15 kg to a maximum of 25 kg with at least 50

percent of the stones weighing more than 20 kg.
Class B - Stones ranging from a minimum of 30 kg to a maximum of 70 kg with at least 50

percent of the stones weighing more than 50 kg
Class C - Stones ranging from a minimum of 60 kg to a maximum of 100 kg with at least 50

Class D - Stones ranging from a minimum of 60 kg to a maximum of 200 kg with at least 50

Sound pieces of broken concrete obtained from the removal of bridges, culverts and other structures may be
substituted for stone with the approval of the Engineer.
505.2.2 Filter Materials
When required, the riprap shall be placed on a filter layer to prevent fine embankment materials to be washed
out through the voids of the face stones. The grading of the filter material shall be as specified on the Plans,
or in the Special Provisions. If not so specified, it will be required that D15 of the filter is at least 4 times the
size D85 for the embankment material, where D15 percent and 85 percent respectively, passing (by mass) in a
grain size analysis. Aggregate passing grading requirements for Item 405, Structural Concrete, will satisfy
foregoing requirements (ASTM D-422).
505.2.3 Mortar
Mortar for grouted riprap shall consist of sand, cement and water conforming to the requirement given under
Item 405, Structural Concrete, mixed in the proportion of one part cement to three parts sand by volume, and
sufficient water to obtain the required consistency.
The horizontal and vertical contact surface between stones shall be embedded by cement mortar having a
minimum thickness of 20 mm. Sufficient mortar shall be used to completely fill all voids leaving the face of the
stones exposed.
Page 84
505.3.1 Excavation
The bed for riprap shall be excavated to the required depths and properly compacted, trimmed and shaped.
The riprap shall be founded in a toe trench dug below the depth of scour as shown on the Plans or as ordered
by the Engineer. The toe trench shall be filled with stone of the same class as that specified for the riprap,
unless otherwise specified.
505.3.2 Placing
Stones placed below the water line shall be distributed so that the minimum thickness of the riprap is not less
than that specified.
Stones above the water line shall be placed by hand or individually by machines. They shall be laid with close,
broken joints and shall be firmly bedded into the slope and against the adjoining stones. Each stone shall be
laid with its longest axis perpendicular to the slope in close contact with adjacent stone. The riprap shall be
thoroughly rammed into place as construction progresses and the finished surface shall present an even, tight
surface. Interstices between stones shall be filled with small broken fragments firmly rammed into place.
Unless otherwise provided, riprap shall have the following minimum thickness, measured perpendicular to the
slope:
Class A – 300 mm
Class B – 500 mm
Class C – 600 mm
Class D – 800 mm
The surface of riprap shall not vary from the theoretical surface by more than 100 mm at any point.
505.3.3 Grouting
When grouted riprap is specified, stones shall be placed by hand or individually by machine as specified for
riprap placed above the water line. The spaces between the stones shall then be filled with cement mortar
throughout the thickness of the riprap as specified in Subsection 504.2.3, Mortar. Sufficient mortar shall be
used to completely fill all voids, except that the face surface of the stones shall be left exposed.
Grout shall be placed from bottom to top of the surface swept with a stiff broom. After grouting is completed,
the surface shall be cured as specified in Item 405, Structural Concrete, for a period of at least three (3) days.
The stones shall also be laid in a manner that the vertical and horizontal alignments of the exposed face shall,
as possible be maintained in a straight line.
505.3.4 Weepholes
All walls and abutments shall be provided with weepholes. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or directed
by the Engineer, the weepholes shall be placed horizontally at the lowest points where free outlets for water
can be obtained and shall be spaced at not more than 2 m center to center in a staggered manner. The length
of weepholes shall not be less than the thickness of the walls of the abutment and shall be at least 50 mm
diameter PVC or other pipe materials acceptable by the Engineer. Weepholes must be provided with filter
bags as specified in special provision or as directed by the Engineer, and shall be incidental to Pay Item 505.
Page 85
The quantities to be measured for payment shall be the number of cubic meter of riprap or grouted riprap, as
the case may be, including stones placed in the toe trench laid in position and accepted. Filter layer of
granular material, when required, shall be inclusive in place with the item as accepted.
The accepted quantities measured prescribed in Section 505.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for
each of the pay item listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities.
Payment shall constitute full compensation for excavation and preparation of the bed, for furnishing and
placing all materials including backfill and all additional fill to bring the riprap bed to the lines, grades and
dimensions shown on the Plans, and all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
item.
505 (1) Riprap, Class A Cubic meter

505 (2) Riprap, Class B Cubic meter
505 (3) Riprap, Class C Cubic meter
505 (4) Riprap Class D Cubic meter
505 (5) Grouted Riprap, Class A Cubic meter
505 (6) Grouted Riprap, Class B Cubic meter
505 (7) Grouted Riprap, Class C Cubic meter
505 (8) Grouted Riprap Class D Cubic meter
505 (9) Filter Layer of Granular material Cubic meter
Page 86
ITEM 506 STONE MASONRY
506.1 Description
This item shall consist of stone masonry in minor structures, in canals, headwalls for culverts, in retaining
walls at the toes of slopes, and at other places called for on the Plans, constructed on the prepared
foundation bed, in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades, sections and
dimensions shown on the Plans or as ordered in writing by the Engineer.
506.2.1 Stone
The stone shall be clean, hard and durable and shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval. Adobe stone shall
not be used unless otherwise specified.
Sizes and Shapes – Unless other sizes are shown on the Plans, stones shall have a thickness of not less
than 150mm, and widths of not less than one and one half times their respective thickness, and lengths of not
less than one and one half times their respective widths. Each stone shall be of good shape and be free of
depressions and projections that might weaken or prevent it from being properly bedded.
Dressing – The stone shall be dressed to remove any thin or weak portions. Face stones shall be dressed to
provide bed and joint lines that do not vary more than 20 mm from the true lines and to ensure the meeting of
bed and joint lines without the rounding of corners of the stones in excess of 30 mm in radius. Bed surfaces of
the face stones shall be approximately normal to the face of the stones for about 80mm and from this point
may depart from a normal plane not to exceed 50mm in 300 mm. Finish for Exposed Faces – Face stones
shall be pitched to line along the beds and joints. The maximum projection of rock faces beyond the pitch
lines shall not be more than 50mm.
Finish for Exposed Faces - Face stones shall be pitched to the line along the beds and joints. The maximum
projection of rock faces beyond the pitch lines shall not be more than 50 mm.
506.2.2 Mortar
Cement, fine aggregate and water shall conform to respective requirements for those materials as specified
under Item 405, Structural Concrete, except as to the grading of fine aggregate which shall all pass the
2.36mm (No. 8) sieve, not less than 15 nor more than 40 percent shall pass the 0.3 mm (No. 50) sieve, and
not more than 10 percent shall pass the 0.15 mm (No. 100) sieve.
The mortar for the masonry shall be composed of one part of Portland cement and two parts of fine aggregate
by volume and sufficient water to make the mortar of such consistency that it can be handled easily and
spread with a trowel. Mortar shall be mixed of such consistency that it can be handled easily and spread with
a trowel. Mortar shall be mixed only in those quantities required for immediate use. Unless an approved
mortar mixing machine is used, the fine aggregate and cement shall be mixed dry in a tight box until the
mixture assumes a uniform color, after which, water shall be added as the mixing continues until the mortar
attains the proper consistency. Mortar that is not used within 90 minutes after water has been added shall be
discarded. Retempering of mortar will not be permitted.
506.3 Construction Requirement
506.3.1 Selection and Placing
Page 87
When the masonry is to be placed on a prepared foundation bed, the bed shall be firmed and normal to, or in
steps normal to, the face of the wall, and shall have been approved by the Engineer before any stone or
stones of the same size. Large stones shall be used in the corners.
All stones shall be cleaned thoroughly and wetted immediately before being set, and the bed, which is to
receive them, shall be cleaned and moistened before the mortar is spread. They shall be laid with their
longest faces horizontal in full beds of mortar, and the joints shall be flushed with mortar.
The exposed faces of individual stones shall be parallel to the faces of the walls in which the stones are set.
The stones shall be so handled as not to jar or displace the stones already set. Suitable equipment shall be
provided for setting stones larger than those that can be handled by two men. The rolling or turning of stones
on the walls will not be permitted. If a stone is loosened after the mortar has taken initial set, it shall be
removed, the mortar cleaned off, and the stone re-laid with fresh mortar.
506.3.2 Beds and Joints
Beds for face stones may vary from 20 mm to 50 mm in thickness. They shall not extend in an unbroken line
through more than 5 stones. Joints may vary from 20 mm to 50 mm in thickness. They shall not extend in an
unbroken line through more than two stones. They may be at angles with the vertical from 0∅ to 45∅. Face
stone shall bond at least 150 mm longitudinally and 50 mm vertically. At no place shall corners of four stones
be adjacent to each other. Cross beds for vertical faced walls shall be level, and for battered walls may vary
from level to normal to the batter line of the face of the wall.
506.3.3 Headers
Headers shall be distributed uniformly throughout the walls of structures so as to form at least one-fifth of the
exposed faces. They shall be of such lengths as to extend from the front face of the wall into the backing of at
least 300mm. When a wall is 450 mm or less in thickness, the headers shall extend entirely from front to back
face.
506.3.4 Backing
Backing shall be build chiefly of large stones and in a workmanlike manner. The individual stones composing
the backing and hearting shall be well bonded with the stones in the face and with each other. All openings
and interstices in the backing shall be filled completely with mortar or with spalls surrounded completely by
mortar.
506.3.5 Pointing
Both bed and vertical joints shall be finished as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. The
mortar in joints on top of surface of masonry shall be crowned slightly at the center of the masonry to provide
drainage.
506.3.6 Coping
Copings, if called for, shall be as shown on the Plans. Where copings are not called for, the top of the wall
shall be finished with stones wide enough to cover the top of the wall from 450 mm to 1000 mm, in length, and
of random heights, with a minimum height of 150 mm. Stone shall be laid in such a manner that the top
course is an integral part of the wall. The tops of top course of stone shall be pitched to line, in both vertical
and horizontal planes.
Page 88
506.3.7 Weep Holes
It shall conform to all the requirements of Item 504, Riprap and Grouted Riprap under Subsection 504.3.4
Weepholes.
506.3.8 Cleaning Exposed Faces
Immediately after being laid, and while the mortar is fresh, all face ones shall be thoroughly cleaned of mortar
stains and shall be kept clean until the work is completed.
506.3.9 Curing
In hot or dry weather, the masonry shall be satisfactorily protected from the sun and shall be kept wet for a
period of at leas three days after completion.
The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meters of stone masonry complete in place and
accepted. Projections extending beyond the faces of the walls shall not be included. In computing the quantity
for payment, the dimensions used shall be those shown on the Plans or ordered in writing by the Engineer.
No deductions shall be made for weepholes, drain pipes or other openings of less than one square meter
area.
The quantity of masonry, determined as provided in Section 506.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for
at the contract unit price per cubic meter for Stone Masonry, which price and payment shall be full
compensation furnishing and placing all materials, including mortar for all necessary excavations, and for all
labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the item.
Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement
506 Stone Masonry Cubic Meter
Page 89
MISC.
STRUCTURES
Part G
PART G MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES
ITEM 604 - FENCE
604.1 General
This Item shall consist of furnishing and constructing posts and barbed wire or chain link fences in accordance
with the details, and at the locations, shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.
604.2.1 Barbed Wire
Barbed wire shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 121, Class I. The barbed wire shall consist of 2
strands of 12.5 gauge wire, twisted with 2 points, 14 gauge barbs spaced 100 mm. apart.
604.2.2 Chain Link Fence Fabric
Chain link fence fabric shall be fabricated from 10 gauge galvanized wire conforming to AASHTO M 181 and
shall be of the type shown on the Plans. Before ordering the chain link fence fabric, the Contractor shall
submit a sample of the material to the Engineer for testing and for approval
604.2.3 Concrete Post
Concrete posts shall be made of Class A concrete in accordance with Item 405, Structural Concrete. The
posts shall be cast to a tapered section 3 meter long, or to the length shown on the detailed Plans, and shall
have a smooth surface finish.
604.2.4 Steel Post
Steel post shall be of the sections and length as specified or as shown on the Plans. The posts shall be
copper bearing steel and shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 183 for the grade specified.
604.2.5 Steel Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement for concrete posts shall be deformed steel bars conforming to the provisions of Item 404 –
Reinforcing Steel.
604.2.6 Hardwares
Page 90
Nuts, bolts, washers and other associated hardware shall be galvanized after fabrication as specified as
ASTM 153.
The Contractor shall perform such clearing and grubbing as may be necessary to construct the fence to the
required grade and alignment. Fence shall generally follow the contour of the ground. Grading shall be
performed where necessary to provide a neat appearance.
Gate shall be constructed as shown on the Plans.
604.3.1 Erection Post
The post shall be erected vertically in position inside the formwork of the foundation block prior to the placing
of concrete and shall be during the placing and setting of the concrete. The posts shall be erected to the
height and location shown on the Plans, or as ordered by the Engineer..
604.3.2 Installation of Chain Link Fence Fabric
The chain link fence fabric shall be set to the line and elevation and pulled taut between each post before spot
welding, or other method of fixing, is carried out. Where splicing of the fence fabric is necessary, or at joints,
the lapping of the chain link fence shall be for a minimum of 100 mm. and shall occur only at the post. No
horizontal splicing will be permitted. The fence fabric shall be fixed to the posts as shown on the Plans. Any
surface protective layer damaged during welding and/ or construction shall be restored properly.
The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of linear meter measured center of posts, of fencing erected in
place and accepted.
604.5 Basis for Payment
The quantity, as determined in Sub-section 604.4 – Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract
price per unit of measurement respectively for each of the particular items listed below and as shown in the
Bid schedule, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials and
for all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
604 (1) Fencing (barbed wire) Linear meter

604 (2) Fencing (Chain Link
Fence fabric) Linear meter
604 (3) Fence posts Each
604 (4) Fence Gate Each
Page 91
ITEM 605 – ROAD SIGN
605.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and installing road signs in accordance with this specification and to
details shown on the plans, or as required by the Engineer.
This road signs shall comply in all respect with the “Philippine International Road Signs Manual” published by
the Department of Public Works and Highways, Manila. The categories of road signs are designated in the
manual, namely danger signs, regulatory signs and informative signs, or guide signs. These are referred to in
the Contract as warning signs and informatory signs, respectively.
Road signs shall be classified as standard or non-standard. Standard signs consist of all warning signs,
regulatory signs and informatory signs with the exception of direction signs, place identification signs and the
line. Non-standard signs consist of all informatory signs which are not classified as standard signs.
The size of warning and regulatory signs is the length of the side of triangular signs (measured from the points
of intersection of the extension of the edges), the horizontal width of octagonal signs and the diameter of
circular signs.
605.2.1 Sign Panels
Sign panels for warning, regulatory and informatory signs shall be manufactured from aluminum sheeting at
least 3 mm. thick.
605.2.2 Reflective Sheeting
The reflective sheeting used on the road sings shall consist of spherical lens embedded within a transparent
plastic having a smooth, flat surface with a protected precoat adhesive which shall be pressure sensitive for
manual application, or tack free heat activated for mechanical vacuum-heat application.
The minimum reflective brightness values of the reflective sheeting as compared to magnesium oxide { MgO }
shall be as given in Table 605.1. The brightness of the reflective sheeting totally wet by rain, shall be not less
than 90 % of the given values.
Table 605.1 – Reflective Brightness of Traffic Signs Surfaces
Color Angle of Incidence Angle of Divergence Minimum Reflective
Brightness Value
Compared with MgO
Red -4º 0.5º 15
20º 0.5º 10
50º 0.5º 3
White -4º 0.5º 75
20º 0.5º 70
50º 0.5º 70
Yellow -4º 0.5º 35
20º 0.5º 35
50º 0.5º 10
Blue -4º 0.5º 6.0
20º 0.5º 4.5
Page 92
50º 0.5º 0.5

The reflective sheeting shall be sufficiently flexible to permit application and adhesion to a moderately
embossed surface. It shall show no damage when bent 90º over a 50 mm diameter mandrel.
The sheeting shall be solvent-resistant so as to be capable of withstanding cleaning with petrol, diesel fuel,
mineral spirit, turpentine methanol.
The sheeting shall show no cracking or reduction in reflectively after being subjected to the dropping of a 25
mm diameter steel ball from height of 2 m into its surface.
The adhesive shall permit the application of temperatures of up to 90º.
The reflective material shall be weather-resistant and, following cleaning in accordance with manufacturer ‘s
recommendations, shall show no discoloration, cracking, blistering, peeling or any dimensional change.
Samples of reflective sheeting shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
605.2.3 Posts and frames
Wide flange posts and frames shall be fabricated from structural steel conforming to ASTM A 283 Grade D. In
lieu of wide flange steel posts, the Contractor may use tubular steel posts conforming to ASTM A 501. All
post shall be thoroughly, cleaned, free from grease, scale and rust and shall be given one coat of rust-
inhibiting priming paint and two coats of gray paint in accordance with Item 411, Paint.
605.2.4 Nuts and Bolts
Nuts, bolts, washers and other metal parts shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with the
requirements of AASHTO M 111.
605.2.5 Concrete Foundation Blocks
The concrete for the foundation blocks shall be Class A in accordance with Item 405, Structural Concrete and
shall be of the size shown on the Plans.
605.3.1 Excavation and Backfilling
Holes shall be excavated to the required depth to the bottom of the concrete foundation as shown on the
Plans.
Backfilling shall be carried out by using suitable material approved by the Engineer and shall be compacted in
layers not exceeding 150 mm in depth. Surplus excavated material shall be disposed of by the contractor as
directed by the Engineer.
605.3.2 Erection Posts
The post shall be erected vertically in position inside the formwork of the foundation block prior to the placing
of the concrete and shall be adequately supported by bracing to prevent movement of the post during the
placing and setting of concrete. The posts shall be located at the positions shown on the Plans.
605.3.3 Sign Panel Installation
Page 93
Sign panels shall be installed in accordance with the details shown on the Plans. Any chipping or bending of
the signs panels shall be considered as sufficient cause to require replacement of the panels at the
Contractor’s expense.
The exposed portion of the fastening hardware on the face of the signs shall be painted with enamels
matching the background color.
All newly erected traffic road signs shall be covered until ordered removed by the Engineer.
The quantities of standard reflective warning and regulatory road signs shall be the number of such signs of
the size specified, including the necessary posts and supports erected and accepted.
The quantities for standard reflective informatory signs and non-standard reflective informatory signs shall be
the number of such, including the necessary posts and supports, erected and accepted.
The quantity, as determined in Sub-section 605.4 – Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract
price for Pay Items shown in the Bid Schedule, which price and payment shall be full compensation for
furnishing and installing road signs, for excavation, backfilling and construction of foundation blocks, and all
labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
605 (1) Warning Signs Each

605 (2) Regulatory Signs Each
605 (3) Informatory Signs Each
ITEM 611 – TREE PLANTING
611.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and planting deciduous shade, flowering trees and evergreen trees less
than 150 mm in diameter on the areas and in the arrangement indicated on the Plans, or as indicated by the
Engineer and placing the necessary topsoil, mulch, water, fertilizer and other incidentals necessary to
complete the item.
611.2.1 Topsoil
Topsoil shall be stockpiled in an area approved by the Engineer.
611.2.2 Mulching
Mulching materials shall consist of approved wood chips, ground or crushed corncobs, wood shavings,
sawdust or peat moss. Wood chips shall be combination of wood silvers with ground wood or sawdust.
Page 94
Bracing stakes for plants shall be 50 mm x 50 mm of rough wood free from unsound loose knots, rot, cross
grain and sapwood or other defects that may impair its strength.
Anchor stakes shall be of the same quality as bracing stakes and of the size specified under operations
calling for their use.
Wrapping stakes shall be of the same quality as bracing stakes and of the size specified under operations
calling for their use.
The tying material to be used in wrapping trees shall be jute twine or similar material not less than 2-ply for
trees 7.5 mm. or less in diameter and 3-ply for trees over 7.5 mm in diameter.
611.2.3 Trees
All trees furnished under this item shall be 150 mm or less in diameter and shall be true to name and type and
shall follow standard names of trees in accordance with the Forest Management Bureau Standards as
adopted by the LLDA.
When specified in the Provisions, certain varieties of plants will be furnished by the government.
All existing laws and regulations requiring inspection for plant diseases and infections shall be complied with
and each delivery shall be accompanied by necessary certificates of clearance to be presented to the
Engineer.
Plants furnished by the Contractor shall be healthy, shapely and well rooted and roots shall show no evidence
of having been restricted or deformed at any time. Plants shall be well grown and free from insect pest and
disease.
Root condition of plats furnished by the Contractor in containers will be determined by the removal of earth
from the roots of not less than 2 plants nor more than two percent of the total number of plants of each
species or variety except when container-grown plants are from several sources, the roots of not less than 2
plants of each species or the sample plants inspected are found to be defective, the Government reserves the
right to reject the entire lot or lots of plants represented by the defective samples.
611.3 Construction Method
611.3.1 Balling of Plants and Trees
Balling is employed in plants and trees to be transplanted or transferred. To ball out the tree, the depth to
which the root system reaches is first determined. Digging around the tree is then done, being careful not to
cut many roots. Watering the soil before balling is prohibited. The surface of the earth is kept as smooth as
possible.
611.3.2 Roots and Top Pruning
The ends of all broken and damaged roots, 6mm diameter or larger, shall be pruned with a clean cut
removing no more than the injured portions. All plants shall be pruned to balance the top with the root system
keeping the natural shape of the species. All dead woods shall be removed all cuts and wounds, 12 mm or
over in diameter, shall be painted with tree wound dressing immediately after the pruning.
611.3.3 Planning
Page 95
The plants to be planted shall be the species, variety and size specified. The operation of the actual planting
shall not be performed at any time when the soil is not in friable or workable condition. The Engineer shall
also approve the location of each individual plant taking into consideration its size and shape, in order that the
best possible arrangement will result.
The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of trees of each specie or variety called for in the Plans
furnished, planted and accepted with the necessary mulch, topsoil, water, fertilizer and other incidentals to
complete the Item.
The quantities as determined in Sub-section 611.4 – Method of Measurement shall be paid for at the contract
unit price each of the trees of each specie or variety furnished, planted and accepted which price and
payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all labor, tools, and incidentals necessary to
complete the Item..
Item No. Description Unit of Measurement
611 (a) Tree (furnishing & transplanting) Each

611 (b) Tree (transplanting) Each
Page 96
MATERIALS
DETAILS
Part H
PART H MATERIALS DETAILS
ITEM 700 - HYDRAULIC CEMENT
700 HYDRAULIC CEMENT
700.1 Portland Cement and Masonry Cement
Cement shall conform to the requirements of the following cited Specifications for the specified or permitted.
Type Specifications
Portland Cement AASHTO M 85 (ASTM C 150)

Blended Hydraulic Cements AASHTO M 240 (ASTM C 595)
Masonry Cement AASHTO M 150-74 (ASTM C 91)
When Types IV and V (AASHTO M 85), P and PA (AASHTO M 150) cements are used, proper recognition
shall be given to the effects of slower strength gain on concrete proportioning and construction practices.
Types S and SA cements will be permitted only when blended with Portland Cement in proportions approved
by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the product of only one mill of any one brand and type of
Portland Cement shall be used on the project.
The Contractor shall provide suitable means of storing and protecting the cement against dampness. Cement
which, for any reason, has become partially set or which contains lumps of caked cement will be rejected.
Cement salvaged from discarded or used bags shall not be used.
ITEM 703 - AGGREGATES
703 AGGREGATES
703.1 Concrete
703.1.1 Fine Aggregates for concrete shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 6, with no deleterious
substances in excess of the following percentages:
Clay Lumps 3.0
Page 97
Coal and lignite 1.0

Material passing 0.075 mm. sieve 4.0
Other substances – as shown in the Special Provisions
Lightweight aggregate, if required or permitted by the Special Provisions, shall meet the pertinent
requirements of AASHTO M 195.
703.1.2 Granular backfill filter material for under drains and filler for paved waterways shall be permeable
and shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 6, except that soundness tests will not be required
and minor variations in grading and content of deleterious substances may be approved by the
Engineer.
703.1.3 Aggregate for minor concrete structures shall be clean, durable, uniformly graded sand and gravel,
crushed slag or crushed stone, 100 percent of which will pass a 37.5 mm (1 ½ inches) sieve and
containing not more than 5 percent passing the 0.075 mm. (no. 200) sieve.
703.2 Coarse Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete
Coarse aggregate for concrete shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 80.
Lightweight aggregate, if required or permitted by the Special Provisions, shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 195, for the grading specified.
ITEM 704 - MASONRY UNITS
704 MASONRY UNITS
704.1 Clay or Shale Brick
Brick shall conform to the requirements of one of the following specifications:
Sewer Brick - AASHTO M 91, Grade SM

Sewer Brick - ASTM C 32, Grade SM
Building Brick - AASHTO M 114, Grade SW or ASTM C 62, Grade SW
The grade will be shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
704.2 Concrete Brick
Concrete brick shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 55, Grade A.
704.3 Concrete Masonry Blocks
Concrete masonry blocks may be rectangular or segmented and, when specified, shall have ends shaped to
provide interlock at vertical joints.
Solid blocks shall conform with the requirements of ASTM C 139 or ASTM C 145, grade as specified. Hollow
blocks shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 90, grade as specified. Dimensions and tolerances shall
be as individually specified on the Plans.
Page 98
ITEM 709 - PAINTS
709 PAINTS
709.1 Description
This Item covers all paint materials including vehicles, Pigment, Pastes, Driers, Thinners and Mixed Paints for
steel and wooden structures.
709.2.1 General
Paint, except aluminum paint, shall consist of pigments of the required fineness and composition ground to
the desired consistency in linseed oil in a suitable grinding machine, to which shall be added additional oil,
thinner and drier as required.
Aluminum paint shall consist of aluminum bronze powder or paste of the required fineness and composition to
which shall be added the specified amount of vehicle.
The paint shall be furnished for use in ready mixed, paste or powder form. All paint shall meet the following
general requirements:
a. The paint shall show no excessive settling and shall easily be redispersed with a paddle to a smooth,
homogenous state.
The paint shall show no curdling, livering, caking or color separation and shall be free from lumps
and skins.
b. The paint as received shall brush easily, possess good leveling properties and shall show no running
or sagging when applied to a smooth vertical surfaces.
c. The paint shall dry to a smooth uniform finish free from roughness grit, unevenness and other
imperfections.
d. The paint shall not skin within 48 hours in three quarters filled closed container.
e. The paint shall show no thickening, curdling, gelling or hard caking after six (6) months storage in
full, tightly covered container at a temperature of 21ºC (70ºF).
709.2.2 The paint shall conform to the requirements of the indicated specifications as follows:
Red Lead Ready-Mixed Paint AASHTO M 72

Type I, II, III and IV
Aluminum paint AASHTO M 69
Type I and II
White & Tinted Ready-Mixed Paint AASHTO M 70
Foliage Green bridge Paint AASHTO M 67
Black Paint for Bridges & Timber
Structures AASHTO M 68
Basic Lead Silicon Chromate,
Ready-Mixed primer AASHTO M 229
Page 99
709.2.3 The constituents parts of the paint shall meet the following specifications:
Red Lead (97% Pb3 O4 ) ASTM D 83

Iron Oxide (85% Fe2O3) ASTM D 84
Aluminum Powder & Paste ASTM D 962
Magnesium Silicate ASTM D 605
Mica Pigment ASTM D 607
Titanium Dioxide ASTM D 476
Chrome Yellow ASTM D 211
Calcium Carbonate ASTM D 1199
Basic Lead-Silicon Chromate ASTM D 1638
Basic Carbonate White Lead ASTM D 81
Zinc Oxide ASTM D 79
Chrome Oxide Green ASTM D 263
Carbon Black ASTM D 561
Lampblack ASTM D 209
Prussian Blue ASTM D 261
Boiled Linseed Oil ASTM D 260
Raw Linseed Oil ASTM D 234
Pale Heat Bodied Linseed Oil Fed Spec. TT-0-367
Alkyd Resin Fed Spec. TT-R-266
Mineral Spirit ASTM D 235
Driers ASTM D 600
Turpentine ASTM D 13
709.2.4 Drier
These specifications cover both straight oil drier (material free from resins and “gums”), and Japan drier
(material containing varnish “gums”). The drier shall be composed of lead manganese, or cobalt, or a mixture
of any of these elements, combined with a suitable fatty oil, with or without resins of gums and mineral spirits
of turpentine, or a mixture of these solvents. The drier shall conform to the following requirements:
a) Appearance – Free from sediment and suspended matter.

b) Flash Point – (Tag close cup) not less than 30ºC (86ºF).
c) Elasticity – The drier when flowed on metal and baked for 2 hours at 100ºC (212ºF) shall have an
elastic film.
d) Drying – It shall mix with pure raw linseed oil in the proportion of one (1) volume of drier to 19
volumes of oil without curdling, and the resulting mixture when flowed on glass shall dry in not more
than 18 hours.
e) Color – When mix with pure, raw linseed oil in the proportion of one (1) volume of drier to 8 volumes
of oil, the resulting mixture shall be darker than a solution of 6 g. of potassium dichromate in 13 cc.
of pure sulfuric acid (specific gr. 1.84).
709.3 Proportion for Mixing
It is the intent of these Specifications to provide a paint of proper brushing consistency, which will not run,
streak or sag and which will have satisfactory drying qualities.
709.3.1 Aluminum Paint, Field Coats on Structural Steel
The paint shall be mixed in the proportion of 0.242 kg. of aluminum powder of paste per liter of vehicle of long
oil spar varnish (2 lb./gal) producing a paint containing 21 mass percent pigment and 79 percent vehicle. The
Page 100
weighted amount of powder or paste shall be placed in a suitable mixing container and the measured volume
of vehicle then poured over it. The paste or powder shall be incorporated in the paint by vigorous stirring with
a paddle. The powder or paste will readily disperse in the vehicle. Before removing any paint from the
container, the paint shall be thoroughly stirred to ensure a uniform mixture and the paint shall be suitably
stirred during the use. The amount of paint enough for one (1) day’s use only shall be mixed at one time.
When two (2) field coats of aluminum paint are specified, the first coat shall be tinted with lampblack paste or
Prussian blue paste in the quantity of 0.024 kg./L or more (1/5 lb/gal) of paints. The exact quantity used shall
be sufficient to give a contrast in color which can be readily distinguished. When three field coats of aluminum
paint are specified the second coat shall be tinted.
709.3.2 Aluminum Paint, Field Coats on Creosoted Timber
This paint shall be mixed as specified for Aluminum paint for structural Steel except that the proportions shall
be 0.272 kg. of aluminum powder or paste per liter of vehicle (2-1/2 lb/gal).
Other paint composition may be used when and as stipulated in the Special Provisions.
709.4 Containers and markings
All paints shall be shipped in strong, substantial containers plainly marked with mass, color and volume in
liters of the paint content, the proportions of the pigment to vehicle, the name and address of the
manufacturers and the stencil of the authorized inspecting agency. Any package or container not so marked
will not be accepted for use under this specification.
ITEM 710 – REINFORCING STEEL AND WIRE ROPE
710 REINFORCING STEEL AND WIRE ROPE
710.1 Reinforcing Steel
Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of the following Specifications:
Deformed Billet-Steel bars AASHTO M 31 (ASTM A 615)

For Concrete reinforcement
Deformed Steel Wire AASHTO M 225 (ASTM A 496)

For Concrete reinforcement
Plastic Coated Dowel bars AASHTO M 254 Type A
Low Alloy steel deformed bars ASTM A 206

For concrete reinforcement
Bar reinforcement for concrete structures, except No. 2 shall be deformed in accordance with AASHTO M 42,
M 31 and M 53 for Nos. 3 through 11.
Dowel and tie bars shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 31 or AASHTO M 42 except that rail
steel shall not be used for tie bars that are to be bent and restraightened during the construction. Tie bars
shall be deformed bars. Dowel bars shall be plain round bars. They shall be free from burring or other
deformation restricting slippage in the concrete. Before delivery to the site of work, a minimum of one half
(1/2) the length of each dowel bar shall be painted with one coat of approved lead or tar paint.
Page 101
ITEM 711 – FENCE AND GUARDRAIL
711 FENCE AND GUARDRAIL
711.1 Barbed Wire
Galvanized barbed wire of the coating class specified shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 121.
Aluminum coated barbed wire shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 585, with Type I (Aluminum Alloy)
barbs at the option of the manufacturer.
711.2 Woven Wire
Galvanized woven wire fence of the coating class specified shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 116.
Aluminum coated woven wire fence shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 584.
711.3 Chain Link Fence
Chain link fabric and the required fittings and hardware shall conform to AASHTO M 181, for the kind of metal,
coating, size of the wire and mesh specified.
Galvanized coiled spring steel tension wire shall be 7 (0.177 inch) gauge, conforming to ASTM A 641 hard
temper, with Class 3 coating unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings.
Aluminum coiled spring steel tension wire shall also be (0.177 inch) gauge, hard temper, having a minimum
coating mass of 0.12 kg/m2 (0.40 oz/ft2 ) of aluminum.
711.4 Metal Beam Rail
Steel rail elements shall be corrugated sheet steel conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 180 of the
designated class and type.
711.5 Fence Posts
Wood posts shall conform to the details and dimensions indicated on the Plans. All wood posts shall be
sound, seasoned wood. Peeled and with ends cut square or as indicated. The posts shall be straight and all
knots trimmed flush with surface. Where treated posts are called for, the kind and type of treatment shall
conform to that indicated on the Plans. When red cedar posts or bracing is furnished, the requirements for
peeling may be omitted.
All dimensions timber and lumber required for fences or gates shall be sound, straight and reasonably free
from knots, spits and shakes. It shall be of the species and grades indicated on the Plans and shall be
dressed and finished on four sides.
Concrete posts shall be made concrete conforming to the specified requirements of concrete, for class
specified, and shall contain steel reinforcement as shown on the Plans, conforming to the requirements of
Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope.
Steel posts for line-type fencing shall conform to ASTM A 702. Steel posts shall be galvanized in accordance
with AASHTO M 111 except that tubular posts shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 120. Fitting,
hardware and other appurtenances nor specifically covered by the Plans and Specifications, shall be
Page 102
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 120 and shall be standard commercial grade, and in accordance with
current standard practice.
Weathering steel posts conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 558, shall be furnished when specified.
Aluminum alloy posts shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 181.
711.6 Guardrail Post and Hardware
Guardrail post and hard hardware shall conform to the applicable standards contained in AASHTO-AGC-
ARTBA “A Guide to Standardized Highway barrier Rail Hardware”.
ITEM 712 – STRUCTURAL METAL
712 STRUCTURAL METAL
712.1 Structural Steels
712.1.1 General
Steel shall be furnished according to the following Specifications. Unless otherwise specified, structural
carbon rivet steel shall be furnished.
712.1.2 Structural Steel
a) Carbon steel. Unless otherwise specified, structural carbon steel for riveted, bolted or welded
construction shall conform to Structural Steel, AASHTO M 183.
b) Eyebars. Steel for eyebars shall be of a weldable grade. This grade includes structural steel conforming
to : Structural Steel AASHTO M 183; Highway Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 344.5 Mpa
(50,000 psi) Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm. (4 inches) thick, AASHTO M 222 (ASTM A 588 with
Supplementary Requirement SI of AASHTO M 222 mandatory).
712.1.3 High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel
It shall conform to: High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality, AASHTO M
223, High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 344.5 Mpa (50,000 psi) Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm. (4
inches) thick, AASHTO M 222.
712.1.4 High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel for Welding
It shall conform to:
a) High-Strength Low Columbium-Vanadium Steel of Structural Quality, Grade 50, AASHTO M 223 (ASTM
A 572 with Supplementary Requirements S2 of AASHTO M 223 mandatory).
b) High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 344.5 Mpa (50,000 psi) Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm. (4
inches) thick, AASHTO M 222 (ASTM A 588 in Supplementary Requirements S1 of AASHTO M 222
mandatory)..
712.1.5 High-Strength Structural Steel for Riveted or Bolted Construction
It shall conform to:
Page 103
a) High-Strength Low Columbium-Vanadium Steel of Structural Quality, Grade 50, and AASHTO M 223.
b) High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 344.5 Mpa (50,000 psi) Minimum Yield Point to 100
mm. (4 inches) thick, AASHTO M 222.
ITEM 714 – WATER
714 WATER
714.1 Description
This Item covers criteria for acceptance of Questionable Water either natural or wash water for use in
concrete.
714.2 Requirements
The mixing water shall be clear and apparently clean. If it contains quantities or substance that discolor it or
make it smell or taste unusual or objectionable, or cause suspicion, it shall not be used unless service records
of concrete made with it (or other information) indicated that it is not injurious to the quality, shall be subject to
the acceptance criteria as shown in Table 714.1 and table 714.2 or as designated by the Engineer.
When wash water is permitted, the producer will provide satisfactory proof or data of non-detrimental effects if
potentially reactive aggregates are to be used. Use of wash water will be discontinued if undesirable reactions
with admixtures or aggregates occur.
Table 714.1 Acceptance Criteria for Questionable Water Supplies
Properties Limits
Compressive Strength, minimum, % 90
Control at 7 days
Time of Setting deviation from control, hr. From 1:00 earlier to 1:30 later
Time of Setting (Gilmore Test)
Initial No marked change
Final set No marked Change
Appearance Clear
Color Colorless
Odor Odorless
Total Solids 500 parts/ million (max.)
pH value 4.5 to 8.5
Chemical Requirements, Minimum Concentration;
Chloride as C1(-1) expressed as a mass percent
of cement when added to the C1(-1) in the other
components of the concrete mixtures shall not
exceed the following levels:
1. Prestressed Concrete 0.06 percent
2. Conventionally reinforced concrete in a moist 0.10 percent
environment and exposed to chloride
3. Conventionally reinforced concrete in a moist 0.15 percent
Page 104
environment but not exposed to chloride

4. Above ground building construction where the No limit for corrosion
concrete will stay dry
Sulfate as SO4 , ppm A 3000
Alkalies as (Na2O + 0.658 K2O), ppm 600
Total Solids, ppm 50,000
Legend:
A Wash water reused as mixing water in concrete may exceed the listed concentrations of sulfate if it can be
shown that the concentration calculated in the total mixing water, including mixing water on the aggregate and
other sources, does not exceed that stated limits.
Water will be tested in accordance with, and shall meet the suggested requirements of AASHTO T 26. Water
known to be potable quality may be used without test.
Page 105
VOLUME II TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION for BUILDINGS, FLOOD CONTROL, LANDFILL and

Miscellaneous Structures
VOLUME II
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
for
BUILDINGS, FLOOD CONTROL, LANDFILLS and

MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES
Page 106
Page 107
GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS/
EARTHWORK
Part A-B
PART A - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Refer to ITEM A1.1 to A.1.7 Part A, General Requirements of Volume I.
PART B - EARTHWORK
800 Clearing and Grubbing
Refer to ITEM 100 Part B of Volume I.
801 Removal of Structures and Obstruction
802 Excavation
803 Structural Excavation
804 Embankment
Page 108
PLAINand
REINFORCED
CONCRETE WORK
Part C
PART C - PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE WORKS
ITEM 900 - REINFORCED CONCRETE
900.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing, placing and finishing concrete in buildings and related structures, flood
control and ports, and water supply structures in accordance with this specification and conforming to the
lines, grades and dimension shown in the plans.
This item shall conform to the requirement of ITEM 700, Hydraulic Cement, Volume I.
Concrete Aggregates
The concrete aggregates shall conform to the requirement of Subsection 311.2.2 and 311.2.3 under ITEM
311 of Volume I and ASTM C 33 for lightweight aggregates, except that aggregates failing to meet these
specifications but which have been shown by special that or actual service to produce concrete of adequate
strength and durability maybe used under method (2) of determining the proportion of concrete, where
authorized by the Engineer.
Except as permitted elsewhere in this section, the maximum size of the aggregate shall be not larger than
one-fifth (1/5) of the narrowest dimensions between size of forms of the member for which the concrete is to
be used nor later than three-fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or
bundles of bars or pretensioning strands.
Aggregate Test
Samples of the fine and coarse aggregates to be used shall be selected by the Engineer for tests at least 30
days before the actual concreting operations are to begin. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to
designate the source or sources of aggregate to give the Engineer sufficient time to obtain the necessary
samples and submit them for testing.
No aggregates shall be used until official advice has been received that it has satisfactory passed all test, at
which time written authority shall be given for its use.
900.2.3 Water
Page 109
Water used in mixing concrete shall conform to the requirement of Subsection 311.2.4 under ITEM 311, Part
D of Volume 1.
900.2.4 Metal Reinforcement
Reinforcing Steel bars shall conform to the requirements of the following Specifications;
Deformed & Plain Billet Steel ASTM A 6151

Bars for concrete reinforcement AASHTO M 31
Deformed Rail – Steel and Plain

Bars for concrete reinforcement ASTM A 616
Deformed A x b – Steel and Plain

Bars for concrete reinforcement ASTM A 617
If reinforcing bars are to be welded, these ASTM specifications shall be supplemented by

requirements assuring satisfactory weldability.
Bars and rod for concrete

Reinforcement ASTM A 187
Cold-Drawn Stee Wire for ASTM A 187

Concrete reinforcement AASHTO M 32
Welded Steel wire fabric ASTM A 185

For concrete reinforcementAASHTO M 55
Except that the welded shear strength requirement of those specification shall be extended to
Include a wire size differential up to and including six gages.
Wire and Strands for prestressed ASTM A 416

Concrete ASTM A 421
Used in making strands for post-tensioning shall be cold-drawn and either stress-relieved in the
Case of uncoated strands or hot-dip galvarized in the case of galvanized strands.
High strength alloy steel bar for post-tensioning shall be proofstressed to 90% of the granted tensile
strength. After proofstressing, the bars shall conform to the following minimum properties:
Tensile strength fs’ 1000 Mpa

Yield strength (0.2 offset) 0.90 fs’
Elongation at rupture in
20 diameter 4 percent
Reduction of area at rupture 25 percent
Structural steel ASTM A 36
Steel Pipe for concrete-filled ASTM A 53

Pipe columns
Cast-iron Pipe for concrete ASTM A 377
Columns
900.2.5 Admixtures
Page 110
Air-entraining admixtures, if used shall conform to ASTM C 260. Water-reducing admixtures, retarding
admixtures, water-reducing and retarding admixtures and water reducing and accelerating admixtures, if
used, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 494.
900.2.6 Storage of Materials
Cement and aggregates shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent their deterioration or intrusion of
foreign matter. Cement shall be stored immediately upon arrival on the site of the work, in substantial
waterproof bodegas, with a floor raised from the ground sufficiently high to be free from dampness.
Aggregates shall be stored in such a manner as to avoid the inclusion of foreign materials.
Notations: The notations used in these regulations are defined as follows:
f’c = compressive strength of concrete
Fsp = ratio of splitting tensile strength to square root compressive strength
900.3.1 Concrete Quality
All plans submitted for approval or used for any project shall clearly show the specified strength, f’c’, of
concrete of the specified age for which each part of the structure was designed.
Concrete that will be exposed to sulfate containing or other chemically aggressive solutions shall be
proportioned in accordance with “Recommended Practice for Selecting proportions for Concrete (ACI 613)”
and with “Recommended Practice for Selecting proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete (ACI 613A).”
900.3.2 Methods of Determining the Proportions of Concrete
The determination of the proportions of cement, aggregate, and water to attain the required strengths shall be
made by one of the following methods, but lower water-cement ratios may be required for conformance with
the quality of concrete.
Method 1. Without preliminary test
Where preliminary test data on the materials to be used in the concrete have not been obtained the water-
cement ratio for a given strength of concrete shall not exceed the values shown in Table 900.1. When
strengths in excess of 281 kilograms per square centimeter (4000 pounds per squire inch) are require or
when light weight aggregates or admixtures (other than those exclusively for the purpose of entraining air) are
used, the require water-cement ratio shall be determined in accordance with Method 2.
Method 2. For combination of materials previous evaluated or to be established by trial mixtures.
Water-cement ratios for strengths greater than that shown in Table 900.1 may be used provided that the
relationship between strength and water-cement ratio for the materials to be used has been previously
established by reliable test data and the resulting concrete satisfies the requirements of concrete quality.
Where previous data are not available, concrete trial mixtures having proportions and consistency suitable for
the work shall be made using at least three different water-cement ratios (or cement content in the case of
lightweight aggregates) which will produce a range of strength s encompassing those required for the work.
For each water-cement ratio (or cement content) at least three specimens for each age to be tested shall be
made, cured and tested for strength in accordance wit ASTM C 39 and C 192.
Page 111
The strength test shall be made at 7, 14 and 28 days at which the concrete is to receive load, as indicated on
the plans. A curve shall be established showing the relationship between water-cement ratio (or cement
content) and compressive strength. The maximum permissible water-cement ratio for the concrete to be used
in the structure shall be that shown by the curve to produce an average strength to satisfy the requirements of
the strength test of concrete provided that the water-cement ratio shall be no greater than that required by
concrete quality when concrete that is to be subjected to the freezing temperature which weight shall have a
water-cement ratio not exceeding 6 gallon per bag (50 kgs.) and it shall contain entrained air.
Where different materials are to be used for different portions of the work, each combination shall be
evaluated separately.
Table 900.1 Maximum Permissible Water-Cement Ratios for Concrete (Method 1)
Specific Maximum permissible Water-Cement Ratio

compressive Non Air-entrained Concrete Air-entrained Concrete
strength at 28
days, psi U.S. gal. per U.S. gal. per
Absolute ratio by Absolute ratio by
fc’ 42.5 kg. bag of 42.5 kg. bag of
Weight Weight
cement cement
2500 7 1/4 0.642 6 1/4 0.554

3000 6 1/2 0.576 5 1/4 0.465
3500 5 3/4 0.510 4 1/2 0.399
4000 5 0.443 4 0.354
900.3.3 Concrete Proportions and Consistency
The proportion of aggregate to cement for any concrete shall be such as to produce a mixture which will work
readily into the corners and angles on the form and around reinforcement with the method of placing
employed on the work, but without permitting the materials to segregate or excess free water to collect on the
surface. The methods of measuring concrete materials shall be such that the proportions can be accurately
controlled and easily checked at any time during the work.
900.3.4 Sampling and Testing of Structural Concrete
As work progress, at least one (1) set of sample consisting of three (3) concrete cylinder test specimens, 150
x 300 mm. shall be taken from each class of concrete placed each day, and each set to represent not more
than 75 cu.m. of concrete.
900.3.5 Consistency
Concrete shall have a consistency such that it will be workable in the required position. It shall be such a
consistency that it will flow around reinforcing steel but individual particles of the coarse aggregate when
isolated shall show a coating or mortar containing its proportionate amount of sand. The consistency of
concrete shall be gauged by the ability of the equipment to properly placed it and not by the difficulty of mixing
water shall be determined by the Engineer and shall not be varied without his consent. Concrete as dry as it is
practical to place with the equipment specified shall be used.
900.3.6 Strength Test of Concrete
When strength is the basis of acceptance, each class of concrete shall be represented by at least five test (10
specimens). Two specimens shall be made for each test at a given age, and not less than one test shall be
made for each 150 cu. m. of structural concrete, but there shall be at least one test for each days concreting.
Page 112
The Engineer may require a reasonable number of additional tests during the progress of the work. Samples
from which compression test specimens are molded shall be secured in accordance with ASTM C 172.
Specimens made to check the adequacy of the proportions for strength of concrete or as basis for acceptance
of concrete shall be made and laboratory-cured in accordance with ASTM C 31. Additional test specimens
cured entirely under field conditions may be required by the Engineer to check the adequacy of curing and
protection of the concrete. Strength tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C 39.
The age for strength tests shall be 28 days or, where specified, the earlier age at which the concrete is to
receive its full load or maximum stress. Additional test may be made at earlier ages to obtain advance
information on the adequacy of strength development where age-strength relationships have been
established for the materials and proportions used.
To conform to the requirements of this Item:
1. For structures designed in accordance with the Working Stress Design (WSD) method of this
chapter, the average of any five consecutive strength tests of the laboratory-cured specimens
representing each class of concrete shall be equal on or greater than the specified strength, fc’,
and not more than 20 percent of the strength test shall have values less than that specified.
2. For structures designed in accordance with the Ultimate Strength Design (USD) method of this
chapter, and for prestressed structures the average of any three consecutive strength test of the
laboratory cured specimens representing each class of concrete shall be equal to or greater
than the specified strength, fc’ and not more than 10 percent of the strength tests shall have
values less than the specified strength.
When it appears that the laboratory-cured specimens will fail to conform to the requirements for
strength, the Engineer shall have the right to order changes in the concrete sufficient to increase
the strength to meet these requirements. The strengths of the specimens cured on the job are
intended to indicate the adequacy of protection and curing of the concrete and may be used to
determine when the forms may be stripped, shoring removed, or the structure placed in service.
When, in the opinion of the Engineer, the strengths of the job-cured specimens, the Contractor
may be required to improve the procedures for protecting and curing the concrete, or when test
of field-cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in protection and curing, the Engineer may require
test in accordance with ASTM Specification C 42 or order load test as outlined in the load tests
of structures for that portion of the structure where the questionable concrete has been placed.
900.3.7 Splitting Tensile Test of Concrete
To determine the splitting ration, Fsp, for a particular aggregate, test of concrete shall be made as follows:
1. Twenty four (24) 15 cm. diameter by 30 cm. long (6 in. dia. by 12 in. long) cylinders shall be
made in accordance with ASTM C 192, twelve at compressive strength level of approximately
210 kilograms per square centimeter (3000 psi) and twelve at approximately 280 kilograms per
square centimeter (4000 psi) or 350 kilograms per square centimeter (5000 psi). After 7 days
moist curing followed by 21 days at 23 ºC (73 ºF) and 50% relative humidity, eight of the test
cylinders at each of the two strength levels shall be tested for splitting strength and four for
compressive strength.
2. The splitting tensile strength shall be determine in accordance with ASTM C 496, and
compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 39.
The ration, Fsp, of splitting tensile strength to the square root of compressive strength shall be
obtained by using the average of all 16 splitting tensile test and all 8 compressive tests.
Page 113
Minimum Strength, Concrete other than than fill, shall have a minimum compressive strength at
28 days of 140 kilograms per square centimeter (2000 psi).
900.3.8 Batching
Batching shall conform to the requirements of ITEM 405, Structural Concrete.
900.3.9 Mixing and Delivery
Mixing and delivery shall conform to the requirements of ITEM 405, Structural Concrete.
900.3.9.1 Concrete Surface Finishing : General
This shall be in accordance with ITEM 407, Concrete Structures.
900.3.9.2 Curing Concrete
This shall be in accordance with ITEM 407, Concrete Structures
900.3.9.3 Acceptance of Concrete
The strength of concrete shall be deemed acceptable if the average of three (3) consecutive strength test
results is equal to or exceed the specified strength and no individual test result falls below the specified
strength by more than 15%.
Concrete deemed to be not acceptable using the above criteria may be rejected unless Contractor can
provide evidence, by means of core tests, that the quality of concrete represented by the failed test result is
acceptable in place. Three (3) cores shall be obtained from the affected area, cured and tested in accordance
with AASHTO T24. Concrete in the area represented by the cores will be deemed acceptable if the average of
cores is equal to or at least 85% and no sample core is less than 75% of the specified strength otherwise it
shall be rejected.
The quantity of concrete to be paid shall be the quantity shown in the Bill of Quantities schedule, unless
changes in design are made in which case the quantity shown in the Bill of Quantities will be adjusted by the
amount of the change for the purpose of payment. No deduction will be made for the volume occupied by the
pipe less than 101 mm. (4”) in diameter nor for reinforcing steel, anchors, weepholes or expansion materials.
The accepted quantities measured as prescribed in Sub-Section 900.7 shall be paid for at the appropriate
contract unit price for the pay item listed below as shown in the Bill of Quantities, which price and payment
shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, including metal water stops, joints, joint fillers,
weepholes, and rock backing and timber bumpers; for all form and false work; for mixing, placing, furnishing,
and curing the concrete; and for all labor, materials, equipment, tools and incidentals to complete the item,
except that reinforcing steel shall be paid for at the contract unit price per kilogram for reinforcing steel metal
pipes and drains, metal conduits and ducts, and metal expansion angles shall be paid for as structural steel
that when the proposal does not include an item for Structural Steel these miscellaneous metal parts shall be
paid for as reinforcing steel.

900 (1) Reinforced Concrete cubic meter (cu.m.)
Page 114
ITEM 901 MASONRY WORKS
901.1 Description
The work includes all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary to install concrete masonry and all
appurtenant work in connection with the work as shown on the Drawings and Specifications.
Concrete masonry unit work of the type indicated shall be provided and shall be properly coordinated with the
work of their trades. The source of supply of materials, which will affect the appearance of the finished work,
shall be changed after the work has started.
901.2.1 Concrete Hollow Blocks
Concrete hollow blocks shall be standard machine fabricated and shall have fine and even texture and well-
defined edges. CHB shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Specifications C 90, grade with minimum
compressive strength of 2.45 MPa (350 psi) (average of 5 specimens). Samples shall be tested and submitted
to the Engineer. Dimensions and tolerances shall be as individually specified on the Plans.
901.2.2 Mortar and Grout
Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, masonry mortar shall be composed of one (1) part Portland cement,
and two (2) parts fine aggregate by volume to which hydrated lime has been added in an amount equal to ten
(10) mass percent of the cement. For masonry walls not exceeding 1,8 m (1.6) in height, a mortar composed
of one (1) part masonry cement and two (2) parts fine aggregate by volume maybe substituted for the above
mixture of Portland cement, lime and fine aggregate. Grout shall be of the same materials and proportion as
mortar to which additional water shall be added to produce a consistency for pouring without segregation.
Masonry cement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 150 – 74 (ASTM C 91). Fine aggregate
shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 45 (ASTM C 144). Water shall conform to the requirements
of Item 714, Water.
901.2.3 CHB Wall Reinforcement
1. Vertical and Horizontal Reinforcement
Unless otherwise specified, the vertical and horizontal reinforcements for CHB shall be 10mm diameter at
400 for all wall thick nesses. Lap splices shall be 300 mm long (minimum).
2. Lintel Beams
• Unless noted otherwise, lintel beams to be used shall have a depth of 0.20 m and the thickness of
CHB wall, reinforced by 4 – 10 mm diameter with 10 mm diameter at 200 ties.
• Lintel beams shall be provided on top of CHB wall openings. It shall extend at least 0.30 m beyond
each opening.
• Stiffener beams (detail similar to lintel beam) shall be provided on top CHB partition walls not
anchored to regular reinforced concrete beams/girders. Stiffener beams shall be provided for walls
exceeding 3 meters in height.
3. Dowels
Page 115
Where CHB walls adjoin R.C. columns and beams provide dowels on R.C. column and beams prior to
pouring to match CHB wall reinforcement size and spacing. Dowels shall be 600 mm long unless noted
otherwise.
4. Movement Gaps
• Where the top of CHB wall adjoins a beam provide 50 mm gap to be filled with a soft material like
styrophor.
• Where the sides of a CHB wall adjoin a column provide 50 mm gap to be filled with soft material like
styropor. Rebars shall be retained for stability.
5. Anchors
Where columns and beams poured without the CHB wall dowels, provide 16 mm diameter expansion bolts to
match CHB reinforcement spacing. These anchors shall be drilled and hammered in placed. No chipping off
of concrete columns and beams is allowed unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
901.3.1 Laying Concrete Masonry Units
901.3.1.1 Workmanship
Units shall be set plumb and true to line with level horizontal joints. Hollow units shall be laid with full mortar
coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells, and at least 50 percent of the cells shall be filled with grout,
the cells containing vertical reinforcements to be among those to be filled up. All cells of CHB walls from
footing up to at least the ground floor level shall be filled up. Solid units shall be laid with full head and bed joints.
Joints shall be uniform and approximately 10 mm wide unless otherwise indicated.
Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, joints of exterior concrete masonry units that will be exposed and
painted shall be cut flush and tooled finished with a 6.5 mm dept “V” joint for horizontal joints. Vertical joints
between the horizontal joints shall be tooled flush. Joints of interior concrete masonry units shall be cut flush, and
the blocks shall be given a cement plaster finish except as otherwise shown on the Drawings. The minimum of
cement plaster shall be 10 mm.
901.3.1.2 Setting Embedded Items
All anchor bolts and miscellaneous metalwork embedded in masonry shall be set in accordance with setting
plans or instructions furnished by trades supplying the metalwork. Care shall be exercised to insure that all
anchors are completely surrounded by grout.
901.3.1.3 Masonry Lintels
The Contractor shall provide properly shored supports for construction of masonry lintels for opening in walls.
Shoring shall not be removed for at least seven days after lintels are placed.
901.3.1.4 Placing Reinforcing Bars and Grouting
All reinforcing steel, except dowels in concrete, shall be accurately set in strict accordance with the Drawings and
the notes thereon. Vertical steel shall be secured firmly in place by means of frames or other suitable devices.
Horizontal steel may be placed as the work progresses. In any core containing reinforcement, the distance
Page 116
between any masonry and the reinforcement shall be at least 12.7 mm (1/2 in) at all points. The masonry
contractor shall furnish all tiles, spacers and supports required to hold steel in position during grouting. Cores
shall be grouted in lifts not exceeding 1.22 m (4 ft) in height. Grout shall be thoroughly rodded. Splices in
reinforcing bars shall be lapped at a distance sufficient to develop the stress in the bar, but not less that 40 bar
diameters.
Concrete hollow blocks shall be laid with all cells completely grouted from the wall footing up to the ground level.
The rest of the concrete hollow blocks above ground shall have at least 50 percent of the cells grouted, including
those containing the vertical reinforcements.
901.3.1.5 Protection and Cleaning
Corners shall be protected from damage, with substantial board covers. Mortar or grout stains on masonry
work shall be removed immediately. Any masonry work showing stains from mortar or concrete, or grout at
completion of work, shall be replaced or the entire masonry surface sandblasted to provide uniform approved
appearance. In cleaning the block, only stiff fiber brushes and wooden scrapers shall be used. Metal
implements or acids shall not be used for cleaning blocks. All imperfect joining, nail holes, chipped edges of
corners, and similar defects shall be corrected or replaced as directed.
All masonry works shall be measured in square meters installed complete with plastering, mortar and grout
and installing reinforcing bars as shown on the drawing and prescribed in the specification.
901.5 Basis for Payments
shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, including all form and false work; for mixing, placing,
furnishing, and curing the concrete; and for all labor, materials, equipment, tools and incidentals to complete
the item.
Payment shall be made under:
414 (1) 150 mm thick CHB Walls square meter (m2)

With Cement plaster finish
414 (2) 100 mm thick CHB Walls square meter (m2)

With Cement plaster finish
Page 117
BULDINGS
FINISHES
Part D
PART D - BUILDINGS FINISHES
ITEM 1000 TERMITE CONTROL WORK
1000.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and applying termite control chemicals, including the use of equipment
and tools in performing such operations in accordance with this specifications.
Termite control chemicals or toxicants shall be able to immediately exterminate termites or create barriers to
discourage entry of subterranean termites into the building areas. The toxicants may be classified into the
following types and according to use:
Type I. Liquid Termicide Concentrate
This type of toxicant shall be specified for drenching soil beneath foundations of proposed buildings. The
concentrate shall be diluted with water in the proportion of 1 liter of concentrate material to 65 liters of water or
as specified by the manufacturer.
Type II. Liquid Termicide Ready Mixed Solution
This type of toxicant which comes in ready mixed solution shall be used as wood preservative by drenching
wood surfaces to the point of run-off.
Type III. Powder Termicide
This type of toxicant shall be applied to visible or suspected subterranean termite mounds and tunnels where
termites are exterminated through trophallaxes method (exchange or nourishment between termites while
greeting each other upon meeting).
Before any termite control work is started, thorough examination of the site shall be undertaken so that the
appropriate method of soil poisoning can be applied.
The Contractor shall coordinate with other related trades through the Engineer to avoid delay that may arise
during the different phases of application of the termite control chemicals.
Page 118
1000.3.1 Soil Poisoning
There are two methods usually adopted in soil poisoning which are as follows:
1. Cordoning. This method is usually adopted when there is no visible evidence of termite
infestation. Trenches in concentric circles, squares or rectangles are dug 150 mm. to 220 mm.
wide and at least one meter apart and applied with Type I working solution at the rate of 8 liters
per linear meter.
2. Drenching. When soil show termite infestation, this method shall be applied. The building
area shall be thoroughly drenched with Type I working solution at the rate of 24 liters per square
meter. When Powder Termicide is to be applied to eradicate subterranean termites, careful
application and precaution shall be given considering that this toxicant is fatal to animal and
human lives.
1000.3.2 Application
At the time soil poisoning is to be applied, the soil to be treated shall be in friable condition with low moisture
content so as to allow uniform distribution of the toxicant agents. Toxicant shall be applied at least twelve (12)
hours prior to placement of concrete which shall be in contact with treated materials.
Treatment of the soil on the exterior sides of the foundation walls, grade beams and similar structures shall be
done prior to final grading and planting or landscaping work to avoid disturbance of the toxicant barriers by
such operations.
Areas to be covered by concrete slab shall be treated before placement of granular fill used as capillary water
barrier at a rate of 12 liters per square meter with Type I working solution after it has been compacted and set
to required elevation. Additional treatment shall be applied as follows:
1. In critical areas such as utility openings for pipes, conduits and ducts, apply additional treatment
at the rate of 6 liters per linear meter in a strip 150 mm. to 200 mm. wide.
2. Along the exterior perimeter of the slab and under expansion joint, at the rate of 2.5 liters per
linear meter in a strip of 150 mm. to 200 mm. wide in a shallow trench.
1000.3.3 Wood Protection
Where the application of wood preservative is necessary, the Contractor shall use Type II working solution as
recommended by the manufacturer.
All wood materials not pressure treated as specified in Item 1003 – Carpentry and Joinery shall be treated
with Type II ready mixed solution as herein called for as directed by the Engineer.
1000.3.4 Guarantee
The Contractor shall guarantee the work for one (1) year after the issuance of the Certificate of Completion.
Liquid termite control chemicals or toxicants shall be measured by actual number of liters used in the
cordoning and drenching of lot areas and soil poisoning of granular fill or actual number of liters used in
drenching wood surfaces, while powder chemical/toxicant shall be measured by kilograms applied to
suspected subterranean termite mounds and tunnels. The quantity to be paid for shall be determined and
accepted by the Engineer.
Page 119
ITEM 1001 STORM DRAINAGE AND SEWERAGE SYSTEM
1001.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, equipments and labor for the complete installation of the
storm drainage system to include all pipings, gutters, canals, catch basins, junction boxes, handholes,
manholes and other appurtenant structures, and sewerage system to include all sanitary sewer piping and
septic vault where no public sewer exist, from the building to the point of discharge.
1001.2.1 Materials for storm drainage system shall meet the requirements specified in the following
standard specifications:
Portland Cement ASTM C-150

Fine and Coarse Aggregate ASTM C-33
Reinforcing Steel ASTM A-615
Non-reinforced Concrete Pipes ASTM C-14
Reinforce Concrete Pipes ASTM C-76
(AASHTO M-86)
Cast Iron Pipes
(for conductors and Downspout) ASTM A-74
Galvanized Iron Pipes Schedule 40
((for conductors and Downspout) ASTM A-120
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
(for conductors and Downspout) ASTM 2729
Where the covers for catch basins, junction boxes, manholes and canals for grating are required
same shall be made of wrought iron and of the dimensions as shown on the Plans.
1001.2.2 Material for sewerage system shall meet the requirements specified in the following standard
specifications:
Cast Iron Pipes and Fittings ASTM A-74

Pig Lead (for securing
And sealing joints) ASTM B 29-77
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes (PVC)
And Fitting (where called in Plans) ASTM D 1784
Solvent Cement (for securing
PVC joints) ASTM D 2564
Where PVC pipes and fittings are used, joints shall be secured with rubber “O” ring or solvent
cement, as the case maybe.
Oakum for joints in bell and spigot pipes shall be made from hemp fiber, braided or twisted and
oil impregnated free from lumps, dirt and extraneous matter.
Page 120
1001.3.1 Installation of Pipes
Under no circumstances shall pipes shall be laid under water and when the trench condition or the weather is
unsuitable for such work.
a. Bedding. Materials such as sand, sandy soil or any approved material shall be to provide a firm
foundation of uniform density. The bedding shall have the minimum thickness equivalent to one-fourth (1/4) of
the pipe diameter.
b. Laying of Pipes. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering and placing pipes into trenches in
order to prelude damage. Laying of pipes shall start upgrade with the spigot end of bell-and-spigot pipe, or the
tongue end of tongue-and groove pipe, positioned towards the direction alignments shown in the Plans.
The spigots or tongues shall be adjusted in bells or grooves to provide uniform space around joints to receive
mortar. Blocking or wedging between spigot and bell or between tongue and groove to attain proper spacing
shall be allowed provided such blocking/wedging shall not interfere with the caulking; and shall not affect the
water tightness of the joint.
c. Bell and Spigot Joint for Drain Pipe. The first pipe shall be properly bedded at the required grade.
Just below the spigot of the first unit, a sufficient space shall be provided for engaging the bell end of the
second pipe.
The spigot shall be carefully cleaned with a wet brush and the upper exterior portion applied with mortar to
such a thickness as to bring the inner surfaces of the abutting pipes flush and even. The bell end of the
second pipe shall be cleaned with a wet brush and uniformly matched with the spigot of the first pipe so that
the sections are closely fitted. After the second pipe is laid, the remainder of the joint shall be fitted with
mortar, and a bead shall be formed around the outside of the joints with sufficient amount of mortar. The
inside of the joints shall be wiped and finished smooth. The mortar head of the outside shall immediately
protected with a cover of wet burlap of wet earth for at least three (3) days for curing.
d. Tongue and Groove Joint for Concrete Pipe. The first pipe shall be properly bedded. A shallow
excavation shall be made underneath the joint and filled with mortar to provide a bed second pipe. The tongue
end of the first pipe shall be carefully cleaned with wet brush and soft mortar applied around the upper half of
the tongue. After cleaning and positioning the second pipe close to the first, mortar shall be applied around
the lower half of the groove. With just sufficient thrust, the second pipe shall be brought in close contact with
the first until mortar is squeezed out of the joint. Sufficient mortar shall be used to fill the joint and to form a
bead on the outside.
e. Mortar for Joint. Mortar shall be a mixture of Portland cement, sand and water mixed in the
proportion by volume of one part cement to two parts of clean sand with just sufficient amount of water for
plasticity.
f. Leaded Joints of cast-Iron Pipes. Joints of cast-iron pipes shall be packed with braided or twisted
oil impregnated hemp or oakum, properly caulked around the joint. The packing shall be at least 200 mm.
below the rim of the hub or bell and this space shall be filled with molten pig lead in one continuous pouring.
The “ring” of the pig lead formed around the joint shall be properly caulked by appropriate caulking tools to
render the joint watertight.
1001.3.2 Concrete Structures
Page 121
Concrete structures such as catch basins, canal gutters, junction boxes and manholes for the drainage
system, and septic vault for sewerage system, shall be constructed in accordance with the Plans and
Specifications on Concrete Work.
1001.3.3 Sewer Connections and Clean-outs
a. The outlet of the septic vault shall be connected to the street drain or to other discharge point where
no sanitary sewer exists. Connection with the sanitary sewer shall not be made without the permission of the
proper authorities, but shall be made in such a manner that any and all the service water, as well as house
and other liquid wastes, will flow to the sanitary sewer. Provided, that the isolated faucets used exclusively for
garden purposes may, in the discretion of the proper authorities, be allowed not to flow into the sanitary
sewer.
b. Clean-outs or rodding holes consisting of cast iron extensions with long sweep elbow fittings shall be
provided at the ends of runs and at every change of directions. Clean-outs shall be capped with cast brass
ferrules with threads and screwed-on removable brass plugs. Clean-outs extended outside the building and
raised to the level of finished grade shall be terminated with the same cast brass ferrule with brass plug set
into a concrete slab shall be 150 mm. thick and 300 mm. square, finish flush with grade.
1001.3.4 Incidental Earthwork
Incidental earthwork for the storm drainage and sewerage systems, such as excavation and backfilling shall
be undertaken in accordance with applicable part of Excavation Filling and Grading.
1001.3.5 Inspection and Quality Control
Materials shall be inspected and accepted as to quality before same are installed. Pipings installed in
trenches shall first be inspected, tested and approved by the Engineer before these are covered or backfilled.
All defects/ leaks disclosed by the water test shall be remedied to the satisfaction of the Engineer and any
extra cost shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
Pipes, culverts, gutters, canals and gratings installed in place and accepted by the Engineer, shall be
measured by the meter along their axes. Catch basins, junction boxes, manholes and septic vault shall be
measured by the number of units constructed and accepted.
The quantities as determined in sub-section 1001.4 shall be paid at the contract unit price for each of the
Items which shall constitute full compensation for all materials, labor, tools and equipment and all other
incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
1001.2 (a) Pipe and fittings (kind and size) Linear Meter (Lm)
1001.2 (b) Concrete Gutter Linear Meter (Lm)
Page 122
1001.2 (c) Concrete canal Linear Meter (Lm)
1001.2 (d) W.I. Grating and Accessories Linear Meter

1001.2 (e) Catch basin Each
1001.2 (f) Junction Box Each
ITEM 1002 PLUMBING
1002.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, tools, equipments and fixtures required as shown on the
Plans for the satisfactory performance of the entire plumbing system including installation in accordance with
the latest edition of the National Plumbing Code, and this Specification.
All piping materials, fixtures and appliances fitting accessories whether specifically mentioned or not but
necessary to complete this Item shall be furnished and installed.
1002.2.1 Water Supply Pipes and Fittings
a. Pipes and fitting materials shall be galvanized iron pipe schedule 40 conforming to specification
requirements defined in ASTM A – 120 with threaded connection. Under roads where necessary shall be
suitably protected as shown on the Plans.
Fittings shall be malleable iron Type II, galvanized iron conforming to specification requirements defined in
ASTM A 338
b. Valves for water supply shall be bronze body with threaded ends rated 21.0 kgf/cm square. All
valves shall be gate valves unless otherwise specified. Gate valves shall have solid wedge body and discs
conforming to specification requirements defined in ASTM B – 62. Globe valves shall have plug type discs
with ferule threaded ends and bronze body.
c. Unions on ferrous pipe 50 mm in diameter and smaller shall be malleable iron.
d. Water Meter where required to be furnished by the Contractor shall be of the type tested and
approved by MWSS or local water service provider.
1002.2.3 Approved Alternate Pipes and Fittings
Pipes and fitting for sanitary and potable water lines as approved alternate shall be Unplasticized Polyvinyl
Chloride Pipes and Fittings (UPVC).
Pipes and fittings shall be made of virgin materials conforming to specification requirements defined in ASTM
D – 2241 and PNS 65 : 1986. Fittings shall be molded type and designed for solvent cement joint connection
for water lines and rubber O-ring seal joint for sanitary lines.
Page 123
1002.2.4 Septic Tank
The septic tank shall be provided as shown on the Plans including all pipe vents and fittings. The various
construction materials such as concrete masonry work shall conform to the corresponding Items of this
Specifications. Inlet and outlet pipes shall conform to the latest edition of the National Plumbing Code.
1002.2.5 Plumbing Fixtures and Fittings
All fittings and trimmings for fixtures shall be chromium-plated and polished brass unless otherwise approved.
Exposed traps and supply pipes for fixtures shall be connected to the roughing-in, piping system at the wall
unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. Built –in fixtures shall be watertight with provision of water supply
and drainage outlet, fittings and trap seal. Unless otherwise specified, all plumbing fixtures shall be made of
vitreous china complete with fittings.
a. Water closet shall be vitreous china, free standing toilet combination, round front outlet siphonic
washdown bowl with fitting extended rear self and closed coupled tank with cover complete with fittings and
mounting accessories. Model make and color shall be submitted for approval prior to the delivery at jobsite by
the Engineer.
b. Lavatory shall be vitreous china, wall - hung with rear over flow and cast-in soap dishes, pocket
hanger with integral china brackets, complete with twin faucets, supply pipes, P-trap and mounting
accessories. Where indicated on the plans to be counter top model make and color shall be approved by the
Engineer.
c. Urinal shall be china vitreous, wall-hung wash out urinal with extended shields and integral flush
spreader, concealed wall hanger pockets 19 mm. top spud complete with fitting and mounting accessories
model make and color shall be approved by the Engineer.
1002.2.6 Bathroom and Toilet Accessories
a. Shower head and fitting shall be movable cone type with excutcheon arm complete with stainless
steel shower valve and control lever, all exposed surface to be chromium finish.
b. Grab bars shall be made of tubular stainless steel pipe provided with safety grip and mounting
flange.
c. Floor drain shall be made of stainless steel beehive type measuring 100 mm. x 100 mm., and
provided with detachable stainless strainer expanded metal lath type.
d. Toilet paper holder shall be vitreous china wall mounted. Color shall reconcile with the adjacent
fixture and facing tile works.
f. Faucet(s) shall be made of stainless steel for internal used.

g. Hose-bib(s) shall be made of bronze cast finish.
1002.2.7 Special Plumbing Fixtures
a. Kitchen sink shall be made of stainless steel self rimming, single compartment complete with supply
fittings, strainer traps, dual control lever and other accessories.
b. laboratory sink shall be made of cast iron metal with white porcelain finish with single compartment,
flat rim ledge, 762 mm. x 533 mm. complete with supply fittings, strainer, trap and other accessories.
Page 124
c. Scrub-up sink shall be made of cast iron metal with white porcelain finish measuring 610 mm. x 610
mm. complete with supply fittings, strainer, trap and wall mounting accessories.
d. X-ray developing tank shall be made of cast iron white porcelain finish with three (3) compartment x-
ray processing tank, drain plug, open standing drain, 19 mm. IPS inlet spud complete with stand and
mounting accessories.
e. Squat bowl(s) shall be vitreous china, wash down squat bowl with integral foot treads, pail flush type.
Color, make and type to be approved by the Engineer.
f. Grease traps shall be made of cast bronze with detachable cover and mounting accessories.
1002.2.8 Roof Drains, Downspout, Overflow Pipes and Steel Gratings
The Contractor shall provide, fit and/or install necessary drains with strainers, where shown on the Plans.
Each drain with strainer shall fit the size of the corresponding downspout (or roof leader) over which it is to be
installed and in conformity with the following schedule:
a. Scrupper drains (for balconies, parapet) shall be made of bronze base with flashing. Flange threaded
outlet and convex with integral flashing clamp bolted to flange.
b. “Josam” type drains shall be made of bronze base semi-dome with large free area, flashing clamp
and integral gravel stopper. To be used at roof decks, canopies, gutters, and elsewhere indicated on
the Plans.
c. Downspouts when encased with concrete, unless otherwise shown on the Plans shall be polyvinyl
chloride (PVC). Whether indicated or specified to be cast iron or galvanized iron the same shall meet
the specification requirement as herein described.
d. Overflow pipes shall be made of galvanized iron pipe measuring at least 13 mm. diameter and
spaced 200 mm. on center.
e. Steel grating shall be made of wrought iron metals of design on shop drawings approved and
surfaces to be coated with shop finish.
1002.2.9 Fire Protection System
a. Fire hose cabinets shall be locally available consisting of 38 mm. diameter valve hose rack with
nipple 30 mm. rubber lined hose cable with standing 4268 kg/cm square, nozzle 38 mm. diameter
brass, chromium plated.
b. Fire stand pipe system shall consist of risers and hose valves. Pipe shall be extra strong black iron.
Valves to be high grade cast bronze mounted with standing 79.40 kg. working pressure as indicated
on the Plans.
c. Fire extinguisher shall be portable, suitable for Class A, B, C fires mounted inside cabinet. Cabinet
shall be full flush mounting door with aluminum trim for glass plate, frame and box shall be made of
gauge 14 galvanized iron sheet with white interior and red exterior baked enamel finish over primer
paint. Cabinet to be wall mounted and size to be able to accommodate the defined components.
d. Yard Hydrant where shown on the Plans shall match the integrated Fire Department requirements.
Outlet shall be single 63 mm. diameter gate valves with chain connected caps.
1002.2.10 Built-in Appliances
Built-in appliances such as urinal trough, lavatory and slope sink shall be made as indicated on the Plans,
exposed surfaces to be tile wainscoating complete with fitting accessories required as practiced in this
specialty trade.
Page 125
The Contractor before any installation work is started shall carefully examine the Plans and shall investigate
actual structural and finishing work condition affecting all his work. Where actual condition necessitates a
rearrangement of the approved pipe lay-out, the Contractor shall prepare Plan(s) of the proposed pipe lay-out
for approval by the Engineer.
1002.3.1 Installation of Soil, Waste, Drain and Vent Pipes
a. All cast iron soil and drainage pipes shall be pitch 6 mm. per 300 mm. but in no case flatter than 3
mm per 300 mm.
b. Horizontal lines shall be supported by well secured length heavy strap hangers. Vertical lines shall
be secured strongly by hooks to the building frame and a suitable brackets or chairs shall be
provided at the floor from which they start.
c. All main vertical soil and waste stacks shall be extended full size to and above the roof line to act as
vents, except otherwise indicated on the Plans.
d. Vent pipes in roof spaces shall be run as possible to under side of roof with horizontal piping pitched
down to stacks without forming traps. Vertical vent pipes may be connected into one main vent riser
above the highest vented fixtures.
e. Where an end or circuit vent pipe from any fixtures is connected to an vent line serving other fixtures,
the connection shall be at least 1.20 meter above the floor on which the fixtures are located.
f. Horizontal waste line receiving the discharge from two (2) of more fixtures shall be provided with end
vents unless separate venting of fixtures is noted on the Plans.
g. All changes in pipe sizes on soil and waste lines shall be made with reducing fittings or recessed
reducers. All changes in directions shall be made by appropriate use of 45 degrees wyes, half wyes,
long sweep quarter bends or elbows may be used in soil and waste lines where the change in
direction of flow is from the horizontal to the vertical and on the discharge from waste closets. Where
it becomes necessary to use short radius fittings in other locations the approval of the Engineer shall
be obtained prior to installation of the same.
h. Cleanouts at the bottom of each soilstack, interior downspout and where else indicated shall be the
same size as the pipe up to and including 102 mm., 152 mm., for larger pipes.
i. Vent pipe shall be flashed and made watertight at the roof with roof cement or approved equivalent.
Flashing shall be turned down into pipes.
j. Each fixtures and place of equipment requiring connection to the drainage system except fixtures
with continuous waste shall be equipped with a trap. Each trap shall be placed as near to the fixture
as possible. Traps installed on threaded pipe shall be recessed drainage pattern.
k. Overhead horizontal runs of pipes shall be hung with adjustable wrought iron pipe hanger spaced not
over 3.0 meters apart.
1002.3.2 Water Pipes, Fittings and Connections
All water pipings inside the building and underground, 100 mm. diameter and smaller shall be galvanized iron
threaded pipe with malleable iron fittings.
a. The water piping shall be extended to all fixtures, outlets, and equipment from the gate valves
installed in the branch near the riser.
b. The cold water system shall be installed with a fall towards a main shutoff valve and drain. Ends of
pipes and outlets shall be capped or plugged and left ready for future connections.
c. Mains and Branches
1. All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements and shall be worked into place without springing or
forcing. Care shall be taken so as not to weaken the structural portions of the building.
Page 126
2. All piping above the ground shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise
3. All service pipes, valves and fittings shall be kept at sufficient distance from other work to permit
finished covering not less than 12.5 mm. from such work or from finished covering on the different
service.
4. No water piping shall be buried in floors, unless specifically indicated on the Plans and approved by
the Engineer.
5. Changes in pipes shall be made with reducing fittings.
d. Drain Cocks
1. Pipe drain indicated on the drawings shall consist of 12 mm. globe valve with renewable disc and
installed at low points on the cold water piping so that all piping shall slope 100 mm. in 30.5 meters.
e. Threaded Pipe Joints
1. All pipes shall be reamed before threading. All screw joints shall be made with graphite and oil or
with an approved graphite compound applied to make threads only. Threads shall be full cut and not
more than three threads on the pipe shall remain exposed.
f. Expansion and Contraction of Pipes
Accessible contraction-expansion joints shall be made whenever necessary. Horizontal run of pipe over 15 m.
length shall be anchored to the wall to the supporting structure about midway on the run to force expansion
and contraction equally toward the ends or as shown on the Plans.
g. Fire Standpipe System
Fire standpipe system shall consist of risers and hose valve. Pipe shall be extra strong black iron. Valves to
be underwriter’s approval high grade cast bronze mounted.
h. Valves and hose Bibs
1. Valves shall be provided on all supplied fixtures as herein specified.

2. The cold water connections to the domestic hot water heater shall be provided with gate valves and
the return circulation connection shall have gate and a check valve.
3. All connection to domestic hot water heaters shall be equipped with unions between valve and tanks.
4. Valve shall not be installed with its stem below the horizontal. All valves shall be gate valves unless
otherwise indicated on the Plans.
5. Valves up to and including 50 mm. diameter shall be threaded ends, rough bodies and finished
trimmings, except those on chromium plated brass pipe.
6. Valves 63 mm. in diameter and larger shall have iron bodies, brass mounted and shall have either
screws or flange ends.
7. Hose bibs shall be made of brass with 12.5 mm inlet threads, hexagon shoulders and 19 mm. male.
1002.3.3 Fixtures, Equipment and fastenings
a. All fixtures and equipment shall be supported and fastened in a safe and satisfactory
workmanship as practiced.
b. All fixtures, where required to be wall mounted on concrete or concrete hollow block wall, fasten
with brass expansion bolts. Expansion bolts shall be 6 mm. diameter with 20 mm. threads to 25
mm. into solid concrete, fitted with loose tubing or sleeves of proper length to acquire extreme
rigidity.
Page 127
c. Insert shall be securely anchored and properly flushed into the walls. Insert shall be concealed
and rigid.
d. Bolts and nuts shall be horizontal and exposed. It shall be provided with washers and chromium
plate finish.
1002.3.4 Pipe hangers, Inserts and Supports
a. Pipe shall be wrought iron or malleable iron pipe spaced not more than 3 m. apart for horizontal
runs or pipe, except hub and spigot soil pipe which shall have hanger spaced not more than 1.5
m. apart located near the hub.
b. Chains, straps perforated turn-buckles or other approved means of adjustment except the turn-
buckles may be omitted for hangers on soil or waste lines or individual toilet rooms to maintain
stacks when spaced does not permit.
c. Trapeze hangers may be used in lieu of separate hangers on pipe running parallel to and close
to its other.
d. Insert shall be cast steel and shall be of type to receive a machine bolt or nut after installation.
Insert may be permitted adjustment of the bolts in one horizontal direction and shall be installed
before pouring of concrete.
e. Wrought iron clamps or collars to support vertical runs of pipe shall be spaced not more than 6
m. apart for as indicated on the Plans.
1002.3.5 Plates and Flashing
a. Plates to cover exposed pipes passing through floor finished walls or ceiling shall be filled with
chromium plate cast iron or steel plates on ferrous pipes.
b. Plates shall be large enough to cover and close the hole around the area where pipe pass. It shall be
properly installed to insure permanence.
c. Roof area penetrated by vent pipe shall be rendered watertight by lead sheet flashing and counter
flashing. It shall extend at least 150 mm. above the pipe and 300 mm. along the roof.
1002.3.6 Protection and Cleaning
a. During installation of fixtures and accessories and until final inspection and turn over, protect items
with strippable plastic or other approved means to maintain fixtures in perfect conditions.
b. All exposed metal surfaces shall be polished clean and rigid of grease, dirt or other foreign materials
upon completion.
c. Upon completion, thoroughly clean all fixtures and accessories to leave the work in polished
condition.
1002.3.7 Inspection, Warranty Test and Disinfection
All pipes, fittings, traps, fixtures, appurtenances and equipment of the plumbing and drainage system shall be
inspected and approved by the Engineer to insure compliance with all requirements of all Codes and
Regulations referred to in this Specification.
1002.3.7.1 Drainage System Test
a. The entire drainage and venting system shall have all necessary openings which can be plugged to
permit entire system to be filled with water to the level of the highest stack vent above the roof.
b. The system shall hold this water for a full 30 minutes during which time there shall be no drop
greater than 102 mm.
c. Where only the portion of the system is to be tested, the test shall be conducted in the same manner
as described for the entire system except that a vertical stack 3.0 meter highest horizontal line to be
tested may be installed and filled with water to maintain sufficient pressure or water pump may be
used to supply the required pressure.
Page 128
d. If and when the Engineer decides that an additional test is needed, such as air to smoke test on the
drainage system, the Contractor shall perform such test without any additional cost.
1002.3.7.2 Water Test on System
a. Upon completion of the roughing-in and before connecting fixtures the entire cold water piping
system shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure 1 ½ times the expected working pressure in the
system during operation and remained tight and leak-proofed.
b. Where piping system is to be concealed the piping system shall be separately in manner similar to
that described for the entire system and in the presence of the Engineer or his duly designated
representative.
1002.3.7.3 Defective Work
a. All defective materials replaced and tested will be repeated until satisfactory performance is attained.
b. Any material replaced for the satisfactory performance of the system made shall be at the expense
of the Contractor.
c. Caulking of screwed joints or holes will be permitted.
1002.3.7.4 Disinfection
a. The entire water distribution system shall be thoroughly flushed and treated with chlorine before it is
operated for public use.
b. Disinfection materials shall be liquid chlorine or hypochlorite and shall be introduced in a manner
approved as practiced or approved by the Engineer into the water distribution system.
c. After a contact period of not less than sixteen (16) hours, heavily chlorinated water shall be flushed
from the system with potable water.
d. Valves for the water distribution system shall be opened and closed several times during the sixteen
(16) hours chlorination treatment is done.
1002.3.8 As-built Drawings
Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall submit two (2) sets of prints with all as-built changes shown
on the drawings in a neat workmanship manner. Such prints shall show changes or actual installation and
conditions of the plumbing system in comparison with the original drawings.
The work done under this Item shall be quantified per length and/ or number of units as provided in the Bill of
Quantities, tested and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The quantified Items, installed in place shall be the basis for payment, based from the unit bid price for which
prices and payments shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials and incidentals necessary to
complete this Item.
Payment shall be made:
1002 (a) Galvanized Iron Pipes lengths

and Fittings (size and sch)
Page 129
1002 (b) PVC Pipes lengths

and Fittings (size and sch)
1002 (c) Plumbing Fixtures set
1002 (d) Roof Drain with Strainer set
1002 (e) Fire Hose cabinet set
1002 (f) Fire Extinguisher Class A, B,C

(kgs.) with Cabinet set
ITEM 1003 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY WORKS
1003.1 Description
The work under this Item shall consist of furnishing all required materials, fabricated wood work, tools
equipment and labor and performing all operations necessary for the satisfactory completion of all carpentry
and joinery works in strict accord with applicable drawings, details and this Specifications.
1003.2.1 Lumber
Lumber of the different species herein specified for the various parts of the structure shall be well seasoned,
sawn straight, sun dried or kiln dried and free from defects such as loose unsound knots, pitch pockets,
sapwood, cracks and other imperfections impairing its strength, durability and appearance.
1003.2.1.1 Grade of Lumber and Usage
a. Stress grade is seasoned, closed-grained and high quality lumber of the specified specie free from
defects and suitable for sustaining heavy loads.
Stress grade lumber shall be used for wooden structural members subject to heavy loads, and sub-
floor framing embedded or in contact with concrete or masonry.
b. Stress grade lumber of the specified specie is generally of high quality, of good appearance, without
imperfections, and suitable for use without waste due to defects and suitable also for natural finish.
Select grade lumber shall be used for flooring, sidings, facia and base boards, trims, mouldings,
millwork, railings, stairs, cabinet work, shelvings, doors, windows and frames of openings.
c. Common grade lumber has minimum tight medium knot not larger than 25 mm. in diameter, with
minimal imperfections, without sapwood, without decay, insect holes, and suitable for use with some
waste due to minor defects and suitable also for paint finish. Common grade lumber shall be used for
light framework for wall partitions, ceiling joist and nailers.
1003.2.1.2 Lumber Species and Usage
Unless otherwise specified on the Plans, the following lumber species shall be used as indicated:
a. Yacal (stress grade) for structural member such as post, girders, girts, sleepers door and window
frames set or in contact with concrete or masonry.
Page 130
b. Guijo (select grade) for door and window frames set in wooden framework, for stairs, for roof
framing supporting ceramic or cement tiles, floor joist and other wooden structural parts.
c. Apitong (common grade) for roof framing supporting light roofing materials such as galvanized iron,
aluminum or PVC sheets, for wall framing, ceiling joist, hangers and nailers.
d. Tanguile (select grade) for doors and windows, facia and base boards, trims, mouldings, millwork,
railings, stairs, cabinet work, shelvings, flooring and siding.
e. Narra (select grade) for stair railings, flooring boards, wall panels, base boards, trims, mouldings,
cabinet work, mill work, doors and windows when indicated as such in the Plans.
f. Dao (select grade) for parts of the structure as enumerated under Section 1003.2.1.2 (e), when
indicated as such on the Plans.
1003.2.1.3 Moisture Content
Rough lumber for framing and siding boards shall be air-dried or sun-dried such that its moisture content shall
not exceed 22 percent. Dressed lumber for exterior and interior finishing, for doors and windows, mill work,
cabinet work and flooring boards shall be kiln-dried and shall not have a moisture content in excess of 14
percent at the time of installation in the structure.
1003.2.1.4 Substitution in Lumber Specie
Any lumber equally good for the purpose intended may be substituted for the specific kind subject to the prior
approval of the Engineer, provided the substitution shall be of equal or better specie acceptable to the
Engineer. In case of substitution with better specie, no additional cost therefore shall be allowed to the
Contractor.
1003.2.2 Plyboard
Plyboard shall be good grade and made of laminated wood strips of uniform width and thickness bounded
together with water resistant resin glue. The laminated core shall be finished both faces with select grade
tanguile or red lauan veneers not less than 2 mm. thick similarly bonded to the core. The plyboard of not less
than 19 mm. thick shall be free from defects such as split in veneer, buckling or warping.
1003.2.3 Plywood
Plywood shall conform to the requirements of the Philippine Trade Standards 631 – 02. Thickness of a single
layer laminae shall not be less than 2 mm. The laminae shall be superimposed in layers with grains crossing
at right angles in successive layers to produce stiffness. The face veneers shall be rotary cut from select
grade timber. The laminae and face veneers shall be bonded with water resistant resin glue, hot pressed and
pressure treated. Ordinary tanguile or red lauan plywood with good quality face veneers, 6 mm. thick shall be
used for double walling and ceiling not exposed to moisture; waterproof or marine plywood shall be used for
ceiling exposed to moisture such as at toilets and eaves, ceiling to be finished with acrytex.
1003.2.4 Lawanit
Lawanit, when required per plans, shall be 6 mm. thick, tempered or oil impregnated for moisture/ water
resistance. Texture of lawanit shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
1003.2.5 Materials other than Lumber
1003.2.5.1 Plastic Sheet
When required for counter top, plastic sheet such as Formica shall not be less than 1.50 mm. thick and shall
have hard, durable and glossy surface resistant to stain, abrasion and heat. Color and design shall be as
selected from the manufacturer’s standard and approved by the Engineer.
Page 131
1003.2.5.2 Glue
Glue shall be from water resistant resins which, upon hardening, shall not dissolve nor lose its bond or holding
power even when soaked with water for extended period.
Glue in powder form be in sealed container and shall be without evidence of lumping or deterioration in
quality.
1003.2.5.3 Fasteners
Nails, screw, bolts and straps shall be provided and used where suitable for fixing carpentry and joinery
works. All fasteners shall be brand new and of adequate size to ensure rigidity of connections.
a. Nails of adequate size shall be steel wire, diamond-pointed, ribbed shank and bright finish.
b. Screws of adequate size shall be cadmium or brass plated steel with slotted head.
c. lag screws of adequate size, for anchoring heavy timber framing in concrete or masonry, shall be
galvanized steel.
d. Bolts and nuts shall be of steel having a yield point of not less than 245 Mpa. Bolts shall have a
square heads and provided with standard flat steel washers and hexagonal nuts. Threads shall
conform to American coarse thread series. The threaded portion shall be long enough such that the
nut can be tightened against the bolted members without any need for blocking. The bolt’s threaded
end shall be finished smooth for ease of engaging and turning of the nut.
e. Wrought iron straps or angles, when require in conjunction with bolts and lag screws to provide
proper anchorage, shall be of the shape and size shown on the Plans.
1003.3.1 Quality of Materials
All materials to be incorporated in the carpentry and joinery works shall be of the quality specified under
Section 2. Before incorporation in work, all materials shall have been inspected/ accepted by the Engineer or
his authorized representative.
1003.3.2 Storage and Protection of Materials
Lumber and other materials shall be protected from dampness during and after delivery at the site. Materials
shall be delivered well in advance of actual need and in adequate quantity to prelude delay in the work.
Lumber shall be piled in orderly stack at least 150 mm. above ground and at sheltered place where it will be of
least obstruction to the work.
1003.3.3 Shop Drawings
Shop drawings complete with essential dimensions and details of construction, as may be required by the
Engineer in connection with carpentry and joinery work, shall be submitted for approval before proceeding
with the work.
1003.3.4 Rough Carpentry
Rough carpentry covers timber structural framing for roof, flooring, siding, partition and ceiling.
a. Framing shall be stress grade or common grade lumber of the specie specified under Section.
Page 132
b. Rough carpentry shall be done true to lines, levels and dimensions. It shall be squared, aligned,
plumbed and well fitted at joints.
c. Trusses and other roof framing shall be assembled, fitted and set to exact location and slope
d. Fasteners, connectors and anchors of appropriate type and number shall be provided and fitted
where necessary.
e. Structural members shall not be cut, bored or notched for the passage of conduits or pipes without
prior approval of the Engineer. Members damaged by such cutting or boring shall be reinforced by
means of specifically formed and approved steel plates or shapes, otherwise, damaged structural
members shall be removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
f. Timber framing in contact with concrete or masonry shall be treated with termite-proofing solution
and after drying coated with bituminous paint.
1003.3.5 Finished Carpentry
Finished carpentry covers works on flooring, siding and ceiling board, stairs, cabinets, fabricated woodwork,
millwork and trims
a. Framing lumber shall be select grade, free from defects and where exposed in finished work, shall
be selected for color and grain.
b. Joints of framing shall be tenoned, mortised or doweled where suitable, closely fitted and secured
with water resistant resins glue. Exterior joints shall be mitered and interior angles coped.
c. Panels shall be fitted, allow for contraction or expansion and insure that the panels remain in place
without warping, splitting and opening of joints.
d. Plyboard shall be as specified under Section 1003.3.2.3 unless otherwise indicated on the Plans.
e. Plywood shall be specified under Section 1003.2.4.
f. Exposed edges of plywood or plywood for cabinets shall be provided with select garde hardwood
strips, rabbetted as necessary, glued in place and secured with finishing nails. To prevent splitting,
hardwood for trims shall be drilled before fastening with nails or screws.
g. Fabricated woodwork shall be done preferably at the shop. It shall be done true to details and
profiles indicated on the Plans. Where set against concrete or masonry, woodwork shall be installed
when curing is completed
h. Exposed wood surfaces shall be free from disfiguring defects such as raised grains, stains, uneven
planning, sanding, tool marks and scratches. Exposed surfaces shall be machine or hand sanded to
an even smooth surface, ready for finish.
All carpentry actually installed shall be measured and determined by Subsections 1003.3.3 and 1003.3.5 as
provided in the Bill of Quantities accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
1003.5 Basis of Payments
The Items measured and determines as provided in subsection 1003.4 shall be paid for at the unit bid price
which payment constitute full compensation of material, labor and incidentals necessary to complete this item.
1003 (a) Rough carpentry (framing, square meter

Roof, flooring, partition, ceiling)
Page 133
1003 (b) Finished carpentry (cabinets, square meter

cabinets, railings, etc.)
ITEM 1004 HARDWARE
1004.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installing all building hardware required to: (1) ensure rigidity of joints/
connections of the different parts of the structure; and (2) equip in a satisfactory operating condition parts of
the structure such as doors, windows, cabinets, lockers, drawers and other similar operating parts as
indicated on the Plans and in accordance with this specifications.
1004.2.1.1 Rough Hardware
All rough hardware such as nails, screws, lag screws, bolts and other related fasteners required for carpentry
work shall be first class quality and locally available.
1004.2.2 Finishing Hardware
All finishing hardware consisting of locksets, latches, bolts and other devices, door closers, knobs, handles,
hinges, and other similar hardware shall be first class quality available locally and conforming with the
following specification.
1004.2.2.1 Door Locksets
Door locks appropriate for particular functions shall be of durable construction, preferably the product of single
reputable manufacturer for consistent quality and master keying.
1004.2.2.1.1
Cylindrical lockset for swing wood door shall of sturdy construction and knob design. The cylindrical case shall
be made of steel, zinc coated & dichromate dip. The knobs, latch, strike & pin tumbler assembly shall be cast
brass or bronze. The spring and spindle shall be steel, zinc coated. The pins and the key, shall be retracted
by knob from either side except when the outside knob is locked by key in the outside knob or by the turn /
push button on the inside knob.
1004.2.2.1.2
Mortise lock for swing door shall have cast bronze latch bolt with steel compression spring, cast bronze dead
bolt with hardened steel inserts, wrought bronze or brass knobs heavy gauge and cold formed steel operation
levers. The pin tumbler cylindrical assembly shall be cast bronze or brass and fitted with 5 spring pressed
nickel silver pins. Mortise lock used in conjunction with fire exit bolts shall have armored fronts.
1004.2.2.1.3
Unit of monolock for swing door shall be factory assembled in one piece, with knobs and escutcheons
attached, ready for installation. All parts of unit lock shall be non-ferrous metal. Frame shall be one piece cast
bronze of extruded brass, front shall be flat for door 35 mm thick and believed for door 45 mm thick, and latch
Page 134
bolt shall be pivoted swing type with minimum 26 mm throw. Cylinder shall be extruded brass with 5 spring-
pressed pins and keys shall be nickel silver.
1004.2.2.1.4
Dead lock for sliding door shall be mortise of surface mounted type to suit particular application.
1004.2.2.1.4.1
Mortise type dead lock shall have cast bronze case, front, latch bolts, strike and cylinder. Operation of dead
bolt shall be by drop handles from either side. When locked by key from outside, or by thumb knob from
inside, drop handle will not operate the dead bolt.
1004.2.2.1.4.2
Surface type deadlock shall have cast bronze case, strike and cylinder. Interlocking vertical bolt shall be
hardened steel operated by key from outside and thumb turn from inside. Strike shall be angle type.
1004.2.2.1.5
Deadlock for swinging door shall be tubular design with mechanism made of heavy gauge cold-rolled steel,
zinc coated and dischromated. Dead bolt strike and pin tumbler cylinder shall be bronze. Dead bolt, with at
least 25 mm throw, shall be operated by key from outside and thumb from inside.
1004.2.2.1.6
Lock for door of emergency / fire exit (panic hardware) shall be cast bronze or brass and heavy duty locking
device coupled with a horizontal crossbar. Latch shall be operated by key from outside and by crossbar from
inside. Locking device shall be surface or mortise type suitable for a particular application. Inactive leaf of
double doors or emergency / fire exit shall be fitted with vertical road actuated by crossbars, such vertical rod
providing two point locking, bottom and overhead.
1004.2.2.1.7
Lock for drawers and cabinets shall be bronze or brass with latch operated by key through a pin-tumbler
cylinder 22 mm in diameter. Back plate of the lock shall be provided with four screw holes for mounting.
1004.2.2.1.8
Hasplock, when required as indicated on the Plans shall be hinge hasp with integral padlock. The hinge hasp
shall be zinc coated wrought steel, 47.5 mm in width and 100 mm in length when closed. The integral padlock
shall be pin tumbler type with solid or laminated zinc-coated wrought steel case with hardened steel shackle
securely attached to the draw bolt.
1004.2.2.2 Door Closers
a. All door closer shall be cast bronze provide with a key valve or cap valve for making
necessary adjustment.
b. The following table shall serve as guide in determining door closer sixes.
Door Maximum Width Size of Closer

0.76 m Size 2
0.90 m Size 3
Page 135
1.07 m Size 4
1.20 m Size 5
1.37 m Size 6
Use large size where unusual conditions exist.
1004.2.2.3 Hinge
Hinge unless otherwise indicated on the Plans shall be brass coated wrought iron steel for interior doors and
wrought bronze for exterior doors with non-rising loose steel pins with button tips and mounting screws of the
same materials.
1004.2.2.4 Sliding Door Hardware
Sliding door hardware shall be four-wheel ball bearing trolley on overhead track. Track is of rolled steel
formed steel or extruded aluminum. Bearing is of plan steel balls or steel rollers. Wheels shall be steel, brass,
rubber or plastic as the case maybe.
1004.2.2.5 Miscellaneous Hardwares
1004.2.2.5.1 Flush Bolt
Flush / extension flush type bolt shall be made of stainless steel with proper suitable to the door specified.
1004.2.2.5.2 Barrel blots
Barrel blots shall be of wrought steel brass coated with an attachment of at least 4-screws.
1004.2.2.5.3 Door Pull and Push Silencer
Door pull and push plate shall be made of stainless steel with concealed attachments.
1004.2.2.5.4 Hook, Bumper and Silencer
Hook, bumper and silencer shall be made of extruded brass or bronze, dull chrome finish with at least 2 screw
attachments.
1004.2.2.5.5 Furnitures and Cabinets Hardware
Furniture and cabinet hardware line piano hinge, invisible hinge, floor pivot hinge, cabinet door cache, shall be
made from extruded brass or bronze with dull chrome finish, of sizes and type suited for use.
1004.2.2.5.6 Push Plate
Push plate for metal door shall be made of stainless steel with concealed attachment.
1004.3.1 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit all necessary information to the Engineer prior to placing of order.
Page 136
1004.3.1.1 Manufacturers data such as catalog for every hardware item to be furnished, showing all
finishes, sizes, catalog numbers and pictures, with all abbreviations fully explained shall be submitted as
genera; information and reference.
1004.3.1.2 Hardware templates for fabricated doors and windows shall be furnished to each fabricator
to confirm that adequate provisions will be done for proper installation of the hardware.
1004.3.1.3 Operation and maintenance data shall be provided and submitted to the Procuring Entity
showing all the hardware component part lists and maintenance instructions for each type supplied including
the necessary wrenches of tools required.
1004.3.2 Packaging and Marking
1004.3.2. Each article shall be individually package in the manufacturers commercial carton /
container properly marked or labeled so as to be readily identified and delivered to the project site in the
original manufacturers containers / package.
1004.3.2.2 All hardware shall be provided with fasteners necessary for the installation packed in the
same container with the Hardware.
1004.3.3 Storage and Protection

Hardware shall be properly stored in a dry and secured place. It shall be protected from damage at all times
prior to and after installation.
1004.3.4 Installation of Hardware
a. All hardware shall be installed in a neat workmanship manner following the manufacturers
instruction manual to fit details as indicated on the Plans.
b. Except as indicated or specified otherwise, fasteners furnished with the hardware shall be
used to fasten hardware in a place.
c. After installation works are completed the hardware shall be protected from paints, stains,
blemishes and other damage until the work are properly turned over and accepted.
d. All hardware shall be properly checked and adjusted in the presence of the engineer and all
hinges, locks, catches, bolts, pulls, closers and other miscellaneous items shall operate
properly.
e. After hardware are properly checked and adjusted keys shall be properly identified with key
tags turned over to the Engineer.
1004.3.5 Keying
Locks shall be keyed in sets and subsets. Where locks are required by the owner to be keyed alike in one
system furnish a total of 4 keys for each set.
Work prescribed in this Section shall not be measured as follows:
(1) Cost incurred in furnishing the following Items such as ITEM 1003, Carpentry and Joinery, ITEM
1004, Hardware; and shall not be measured and paid separately, same shall be deemed to be
included in the cost of Items of work, as part of the Contractor’s Bill of Quantities.
Page 137
The accomplished work item shall be paid for at the appropriate unit price of the particular pay item shown in
the Bill of Quantities which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and maintaining
such items as provided in Subsection 1004.4.
ITEM 1005 STEEL WINDOWS
1005.1 Description
This item shall consists of all fabricated steel windows fully equipped with fixing accessories and looking
devices as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
All members shall be of hot-rolled, low carbon, new billet steel, heavy section with depth of at least 33 mm
and web thickness of at least 3 mm. Frame members shall be of equal leg design section only at points where
called for or shown on detailed drawings. Continuous angle fins as indicated shall be furnished. Zee type
section of special design with offset permitting down turned leg of the ventilator member to seat flush when
ventilator is in fully closed position, shall be used for frame at sills. Ventilator members shall be special angle
shape. Frames of ventilator members shall have integral weather baffles providing double flat parallel
weathering contacts of not less than 6 mm width on all four sides of the ventilator. Mutins shall be 25 mm by
25 mm rolled-tee sections. All members to be used shall conform with the specification requirements of ASTM
A 505. The frame member shall afford not less than 16 mm continuous anchorage to surrounding masonry.
Unless otherwise specified / or indicated on Plan as residential casement, special size of section shall be
used.
1005.2.1 Residential Casement
Sections shall be hot rolled billet steel special design. Frame and ventilator members shall be specially
designed zee sections, not less than 25 mm in depth and not less than 3 mm in thickness, with weathering
baffles rolled integrally to provide continuous double contact between frame and casement ventilator
members. Mutins shall be 19 mm by 18 mm rolled tee – sections. Side hung hinges shall be of extension
friction type welded to both frame and ventilator with friction washers and steel acorn-nuts.
1005.2.2 Heavy Duty Side-hinged Ventilator
Frame and ventilator members shall be specially designed zee section not less that 33 mm in depth and not
less than 3 mm in thickness, with weathering baffles rolled integrally to provide continuous double contact
between frame and side-hinged ventilator members. Mutin shall be 25 mm by 25 mm rolled tee-sections.
Simplex-type hinges shall be of extension friction type with bronze friction washers and rust proofed steel
acorn-nuts. Hinged design shall provide ferrous to non ferrous contacts between all movable surfaces. Hinges
shall be welded to both frame and ventilator.
1005.2.3 Projected Ventilators
All members shall be hot rolled new billet steel window. Frames and ventilator sections shall be special angle
shape and not less than 33 mm deep front to back not less than 33 mm in thickness. Weathering projections,
overlapping, parallel contacts at both insides and outsides points of closure on all four sides of the ventilator
shall be 6 mm.
1005.2.4 Awning ventilators (for series of ventilators operating simultaneously)
Page 138
Frame, ventilator and mutin members shall be hot rolled new billet steel section not less than 33 mm deep,
specifically designed for steel windows.
1005.3.1 Fabrication and Welds
Corners of frame and ventilator shall be mitered and electrically butt welded with exposed welds ground
smooth. Head drips shall be provided where ventilator extend to the top of the windows. Mutins shall be
welded to frames. Mutin intersections shall be welded with flush interior surfaces.
1005.3.2 Hardware (fixing accessories and locking devices)
1005.3.2.1 Residential Casement, heavy duty side-hinged ventilator
a. Roto Type: Each ventilator shall be hung on two heavy hot rolled steel of the extension
type, welded to both frame and ventilator. Hinged design shall provide ferrous to non
ferrous to non ferrous contacts between all movable surfaces. Hardware shall control
ventilator independently of the screen and shall consists of a polished bronze locking
handle and worn drive operator. Provide however that roto hardware shall not be used on
any ventilator, the size of which exceed 1 square meter area. Ventilators over 150 mm in
height shall have three (3) hinges and double locking device.
b. Simplex-Type: Hinges shall be extension friction type with bronze friction washers and rust
proofed steel acorn-nuts. Hinged design shall provide ferrous contacts between all movable
surfaces. Hinges shall be welded to both frame and ventilator.
c. Polished bronze locking handle and strike shall be furnished for ventilator 500 mm and
under in height, two point locking devices and three (3) hinges for ventilators over 500 mm
in height. Sill adjuster shall be provided for ventilator over 1000 mm square meter in area.
1005.3.2.2 Projected Ventilators
Each ventilator shall be balanced on two heavy steel arms riveted to ventilator and frame. Rivet holes in arms
shall be bronze bushed. Uniform tension to hold ventilator in open position shall be obtained by two heavy
bronze, sliding friction shoes with adjustable compression springs enclosed in bronze housing attached to the
ventilator top rail member. The window frame member shall act as a guide for the friction shoe. Hardware
shall consist of polished bronze pole hook ring, cam handle and strike for outward projecting ventilators.
Polished bronze, pole operated spring latches, shall be substituted for locking handles on outward projecting
ventilators, out of each floor, polished bronze, cord operated, spring latches for inward projecting vents not
within reach of floor provided with double line of best quality sash cord 5 mm to 6 mm in diameter extending to
762 mm above floor. Polished bronze, underscreen push bar working through the member to be furnished for
outward projecting ventilator when so indicated on Plans or drawings.
1005.3.2.3 Awning Ventilators
Each awning window so indicated on the Plans shall be on the awning type window in which the ventilators
operate simultaneously and controlled manually. Each projecting ventilator shall be balanced on two heavy
steel supporting arms. Arms for upper ventilators shall have tops pivots enclosed in malleable iron housing
riveted to ventilator and pivoting point shall be located outside of window to provide efficient leverage.
Ventilator in each window shall be equipped with extensions arms attached to connecting steel frame and
shall be concealed within frame when ventilators are in closed position. All ventilators shall open or close
simultaneously. The bottom ventilator shall be the means of control and shall be fitted with a solid bronze,
Page 139
polished, cam locking handle and strike. Base of handle to dowel with strike to prevent side motion of
ventilator. Where windows are screened, provide a bronze under screen push bar working thru the frame
member.
1005.3.3 Installation
All steel windows shall be set plumb and true in openings. The joints between the window frame and masonry
shall be carefully caulked. Contacts between windows or doors and adjacent steel including mullions shall be
sealed with mastic furnished and applied by the Contractor. Windows shall be designed for glazing from the
outside with spring wire glazing clips and glazing putty.
Mullions and anchors shall manufacturer’s standard, vertical mullions, anchors and bolts for attaching shall be
furnished where required. Adequate anchorage shall be provided to ensure firm installation.
1005.3.4 Shop Painting
All windows shall be given a coating of gray metallic paint applied to all surfaces as paint base for prevention
of corrosion. Prior to application of paint primer the steel sections shall be cleaned of rust, oil, grease and
other foreign matter.
Steel windows shall be measured by actual in place installed with respective design/style and type of
operation in square meters.
The actual area in square meters of steel windows satisfactorily installed and ready for services shall be the
basis for payment based on the unit bid or contract unit price.
1005 (a) Residential Casement sets

1005 (b) Heavy Duty Side-hinged
Ventilator sets
1005 (c) Projected Ventilators sets
1005 (d) Awning ventilator sets
ITEM 1006 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
1006.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installing all fabricated steel doors and frames equipped with fixing
accessories and locking devices in accordance with the Plans and /or shop drawings and as herein specified.
Page 140
All door cladding plates or panels shall be formed from gauge 20 cold-rolled, prime quality steel. Frames shall
be formed from gauge 16 cold-rolled steel. The materials used shall conform with the specification
requirement of ASTM A 505.
1006.2.1 Tubular Door (Casement/ Sliding)
a. Hollow steel doors shall be custom-built of size and details as indicated on the Plans and /or shop
drawings. Cladding of doors shall be flush or louver type. Doors shall be 44 mm. thick, side hinged or
overhead hung, as called for on the Plans.
b. Flush doors shall be constructed from two outer steel sheet not lighter than gauge 20, with edges
welded and finished flush. The outer face sheets shall be reinforced with gauge 24 vertical channels or
interlocking zee members. Sound insulation fillers of cork fiberboard, or mineral woolboard shall be placed full
length in spaces between reinforcing channels. Doors shall have smooth, flush surfaces without any visible
joints or seams on exposed faces or stile edges except around glazed or louvered pane inserts. Top and
bottom frame of doors shall have continuous reinforcing channels welded to face sheets. The channel for
exterior doors shall be inverted type, not lighter than gauge 16, constructed to form a weather seal. Glazed
opening shall be provided where indicated and moulding around glazed openings shall not be lighter than
gauge 20 metal.
1006.2.2 Grille Doors
Grille doors shall be of flat, square or round bars (wrought iron) as indicated on the Plans framed on
galvanized black iron pipe or flat wrought iron bars, of the design shown on the Plans.
1006.2.3 Tubular Steel Frames shall be machined pressed true to details, to size and shape as shown
on the Plans and shall have full welded unit or knockdown field assembled type construction at
corners and other joints.
1006.2.4 Steel Louvers
Louvers shall be machine pressed conforming to the size and design indicated on the Plans with removable
louver pane formed to fit the metal subframe of openings. The steel sheets shall meet the requirement of
ASTM 505, rivets of ASTM B 316, screws, bolts, nuts and washers of ASTM B 211.
1006.2.5 Anchors and Fasteners
Anchor shall be steel, zinc coated or painted with rust inhibitive paint, of sizes, shapes and design per
manufacturer’s standard. Floor anchors shall not be lighter than gauge 18, with exception of jamb anchors for
installing door frames in metal latch and plaster assemblies which shall be minimum of gauge 16 and shall not
extend no more than 20 mm. out of the back of the jamb.
1006.3.1 Fabrication
Corner joints of frames shall be mitered and welded conforming to manufacturer’s standard manual for metal
doors. All contact edges be closed tight. Welds on exposed surface shall be ground smooth and shall be neat
in appearance.
Page 141
Joints for knock-down type frame corners shall be designed for simple field assembly of header jamb
members by concealed tenon, splice plates, or other type concealed in interlocking joint that will produce
square and rigid corners. Joints shall be securely locked in place during erection and the alignment of
adjoining members shall be maintained. All bolted connections shall be provided with lock units.
1006.3.2 Shop Finish
a. Hot or Cold Phosphate Surface Treatment

All steel doors, frames and louvers shall be cleaned thoroughly phosphate-treated to assure maximum paint
adherence and prime finish, in accordance with the following operations:
1. After fabrication, grease and dirt shall be removed by a hot alkali solution and rinsed with hot
water.
2. After cleaning, all parts shall be immersed in hot or cold phosphate solution and rinsed with
diluted solution or chronic acid.
3. After drying under controlled temperature, one coat of shop primer shall be applied by dipping
type especially developed for materials treated with phosphates.
The cleaning, phosphating, dipping or spraying of shop primer and even drying shall be done on
a continuous operation in the factory.
Steel doors, frames and louvers shall be set plumb and true in openings. The joint between frame and
masonry shall be carefully caulked. Contacts between door/ frame and adjacent steel shall be sealed with
mastic.
1006.3.4 Wall Anchors
A minimum of three anchors shall be provided for each jamb. Anchors shall be located opposite the top and
bottom hinges and midway between top and bottom anchors.
Anchors for fastening frames to masonry shall be adjustable, corrugated and perforated and shall extend not
less than 200 mm. into masonry.
Anchors for fastening frames to metal or wood stud partitions shall be welded to metal or nailed to wood studs
respectively.
Anchors for fastening frames to previously placed concrete or masonry shall be secured to existing
construction with expansion bolts. Frames shall be fastened securely with anchors.
Anchors for fastening frames to partitions of plaster on metal lathe shall be secured firmly to back of frames
that shall receive the latch. Adjustable strut anchors shall be provided on each side of the frame for fastening
to the structural members of the partition and of the ceiling framing above. The size and type of strut anchors
shall be as recommended by the metal door manufacturer.
1006.3.5 Floor Anchors
Floor anchors shall be provided at the bottom of each jamb member, anchors shall be fixed/ adjustable and
drilled for 10 mm. diameter anchor bolts.
Where floor fill occurs, the bottom of frames shall terminate at the indicated finished floor levels and shall be
supported by adjustable extension clips resting on and anchored to the structural slab.
1006.3.6 Hardware
Page 142
Side bronze butts for side hung doors, overhead pocket hardware for track and roller types and locksets shall
be suitable for the service required and subject to the approval of the Engineer and as provided in Item 1004,
Hardware.
Steel doors, frames, louvers accessories and hardwares shall be measured in square meters/ per set as
shown on the Plans. A set shall consist of metal door, jambs, anchors and hardware except locksets.
The area in square meters/ or per set for every hollow steel door, flush door, grille door and steel louver
installed ready for service shall be the basis of payment based on the unit bid or contract unit price.
1006 (a) Hollow Steel Door sets

1006 (b) Flush Door sets
1006 (c) Grille Door sets
1006 (d) Steel Louver Door sets
ITEM 1007 ALUMINUM GLASS DOORS
1007.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all aluminum glass doors materials, labor, tools and equipment required in
undertaking the proper installation as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
1007.2.1 Frame and panel members shall be fabricated from extruded aluminum sections true to details
with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles and free defects impairing strength or durability.
Extruded aluminum sections shall conform to the specification requirements as defined in ASTM
B 211.
1007.2.2 Screws, nuts, washers, bolts, rivets and other miscellaneous fastening devices shall be made of
non-corrosive materials such as aluminum, stainless steel, etc.
Page 143
1007.2.3 Hardware for fixing and locking devices shall be closely matched to the extruded aluminum
section and adaptable to the type and method of opening.
1007.2.4 Vinyl weather strip shall be first class quality flexible vinyl forming an effective seal and without
adverse deformation when installed.
1007.2.5 Pile weather strip shall be silicon treated and free from residual wetting agents and made of soft
fine as wool, fur, etc.
1007.2.6 Glazing shall conform to the requirement specified in Item 1012, Glass and Glazing.
For all assembly and fabrication works the cut ends shall be true and accurately jointed, free of burrs and
rough edges. Cut-out recesses, mortising, grinding operation for hardwares shall be accurately made and
properly reinforced when necessary.
1007.3.1 Installation Procedure
1007.3.1.1 Main frame shall consist of head sill and jamb stiles specifically designed and machined to
interfit and to be joined at corners with self-threading screws.
1007.3.1.2 Frame sill shall be stepped and slope with offset weep holes foe efficient drainage to the
exterior.
1007.3.1.3 Door shall be accurately joined at corners assembled and fixed rigidly to ensure weather
tightness.
1007.3.1.4 Aluminum glass door and main frame shall be installed in a prepared opening to be set plumb,
square, level and true to details.
1007.3.1.5 All joints between metal surface and masonry shall be fully caulked to ensure weather tightness.
1007.3.1.6 Sliding type door panel shall be equipped with concealed roller overhead tracks with bottom
guide.
1007.3.1.7 Double action type door panel shall be equipped with heavy duty hinges that will control the door
leaf in a close or open position.
1007.3.1.8 Weather strip shall be furnished on edges at the meeting stiles of doors.
1007.3.1.9 Where aluminum is to be in contact with steel concrete cinder, block, tile, plaster or other similar
masonry construction the aluminum surface shall be back painted before erection with a
bituminous paint.
Exposed aluminum surfaces shall be electro type hard coats.
1007.3.3 Protection
Page 144
a. All aluminum parts shall be protected adequately to ensure against damaged during transit
and construction operations.
b. Aluminum parts in contact with steel members shall be properly insulated by a coat or zinc
chromate primer applied to the steel or by application of bituminous paint.
1007.3.4 Cleaning
a. The Contractor does not only protect all entrance units during construction but also
responsible for removal of protective materials and cleaning aluminum surfaces.
b. Aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned with plain water with kerosene or gasoline and then
wipe surfaces using clean cotton fabric. No abrasive cleaning agents shall be permitted.
Aluminum glass door, fully equipped with fixing accessories and locking devices shall be measured in square
meters base on actual in place installed as shown on the Plans accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The area in square meters of aluminum glass doors installed including main frame and ready for service as
provided in Item 1007.4 shall be the basis of payment based on the unit bid or contact unit price.
1007 Aluminum Glass door square meter (sq.m.)

Sliding type, designated as
D – on the schedule
ITEM 1008 ALUMINUM GLASS WINDOWS
1008.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all aluminum glass window materials, labor, tools and equipment required
in undertaking the proper installation as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
1008.2.1 Frame and panel members shall be fabricated from extruded aluminum section true to details
with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles and free from defects impairing strength or
durability. Extruded aluminum section shall conform to the specification requirements defined in
ASTM B 211.
1008.2.2 Screws, nuts, washers, bolts, rivets and other miscellaneous fastening devices shall be made of
non-corrosive materials such as aluminum, stainless steel, etc.
1008.2.3 Hardware for fixing and locking devices shall be closely matched to the extruded aluminum
section and adaptable to the type and method of opening.
Page 145
1008.2.4 Weather strip shall be first class quality flexible vinyl forming an effective seal and without
adverse deformation when installed.
1008.2.5 Glazing shall conform to the requirements specified in Item 1012.
1008.2.6 Pile weather strip shall be silicon treated and free from residual wetting agents made of soft fine
hair as on wool, fur, etc.
For all assembly and fabrication works the cut end shall be true and accurate, free of burrs and rough edges.
Cut-outs recesses, mortising and grinding operation for hardwares shall be accurately made and properly
reinforced.
1008.3.1 Installation Procedure
1008.3.1.1 Main frame shall consist of head, sill and jamb.
1008.3.1.2 Window sash
1008.3.1.3 Window panel shall be jointed at corners with miter and fixed rigidity to ensure weather
tightness.
1008.3.1.4 Sliding windows shall be provided with nylon sheave. Sliding panels shall be suspended with
concealed roller overhead tracks with bottom guide pitch outward and slotted for complete
drainage. The sliding panels shall be provided with interior handles. The locking device shall be
spring loaded extruded latch that automatically engages special frame hips.
1008.3.1.5 Casement window type shall be provided with two hinges fabricated from extruded aluminum
alloy. They shall open on stay arms having adjustable sliding friction shoes to control window
panel operations. Locking device shall be one arm action handle for manual operations
complete with strike plate.
1008.3.1.6 All joints between metal surface and masonry shall be fully caulked.
1008.3.1.7 Aluminum parts in contact with steel members shall be properly insulated by a coat of zinc
chromate, primer/ bituminous paint applied to the steel surface.
1008.3.1.8 Weather strip shall be furnished on edges at the meeting stiles.

Exposed aluminum surfaces shall be electrotype hard coats such as anodize, satin, etc.
1008.3.3 Protection
All aluminum parts shall be protected adequately to ensure against damage during transit and
construction phase.
1008.3.4 Cleaning
1008.3.4.1 The Contractor does not only protect all entrance units during the construction phase but shall
also be responsible for removal of protective materials and cleaning the aluminum surface
including glazing before work is accepted by the Engineer.
1008.3.4.2 Aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned with kerosene or gasoline, diluted with water and then
wipe surface using clean cloth rugs.
1008.3.4.3 No abrasive cleaning materials shall be permitted in cleaning surface.
Page 146
Aluminum glass window fully equipped with fixing accessories and locking devices shall be measured in
square meters base on actually in place installed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The area of aluminum glass doors in square meters ready for service as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall
be the basis of payment based on the unit bid or contact unit price which price and payment constitute all
materials, labor including incidentals.
1008 (1) Aluminum Sliding Windows square meter (m2)

1008 (2) Aluminum Casement Windows square meter (m2)
ITEM 1009 JALOUSIE WINDOWS
1009.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all jalousie window materials, labor, tools and equipment required as
shown on the Plans and undertaking the proper installation in accordance with this Specification.
1009.2.1 Jalousie metal frame shall be made of extruded aluminum section true to details conforming to
the Specifications requirements defined in ASTM B 211.
1009.2.2 Glass slats shall be 5.6 mm. thick clear view of 100 mm. wide smooth edge glass.
1009.2.3 Wood slats shall be fabricated from kiln-dried tanguile with provision of interlocking grooves to
prevent penetration of rain water.
1009.2.4 Insert screens shall be aluminum cloth and installed as insert overlap.
1009.2.5 Wrought iron grilles shall be manufactured from 12 mm. square bars or round bars conforming
to the shop drawing submitted and approved by the Engineer.
1009.2.6 Wood jalousie window assembly shall be fabricated of kiln-dried wood boards consisting of the
following members:
Page 147
a. Vertical operating mechanism shall be of paired zigzag cut member one fixed to the wood
jambs.
b. Slats/ blades are made of interlocking grooves. It shall be of kiln-dried tanguile 15.8 mm.
thick by 100 mm. wide.
c. Lever handles are made of wrought iron flat bars that should lock the unit in closed position.
1009.2.7 Wood jambs shall be fabricated from well seasoned wood specie conforming to Item 1003,
Carpentry and Joinery requirements.
1009.3.1 All window frames shall be in place and rigidly anchored in a prepared opening before any
installation work is commenced.
1009.3.2 Window openings shall fit commercial height of the vertical operating mechanism/ jalousie metal
frames to avoid cutting of members.
1009.3.3 Installation Procedures
1009.3.3.1 Glass Jalousie Windows
a. Jalousie metal frames shall be temporarily fixed at the bottom and top ends using wood
screw.
b. Place glass slats into the slat clips starting below until the whole units are entirely glazed.
c. Operate units and make adjustment where required taking into consideration that all units
are properly aligned and satisfactory operational.
d. Close the slats clips in a manner that the glass slats are securely fixed them permanently
fix all units with wood screws.
1009.3.3.2 Wood Jalousie Windows
a. Fit each unit into the prepared window opening and temporarily fix with nails at bottom and
top ends of vertical operating mechanism.
b. Operate units and make adjustments where required.
c. Fix all units permanently and properly align each unit.
All works performed under this Item shall be measured in square meters or number of units installed complete
with glass, wood slats and ready for service.
The completed work, measured in accordance with Sub-section 1009.4 and accepted by the Engineer, shall
be the basis for payments which price and payment constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials
fabricated wood products, tools, equipment, labor and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
Payment shall be made under;
Page 148
1009 (1) Glass Jalousie Window square mater
1009 (2) Wood Jalousie Window square mater
ITEM 1010 WOODEN DOORS AND WINDOW
1010.1 Description
This Item shall consist of Furnishing all materials, hardware, plant, tools, labor and services necessary for
complete fabrication and installation of wooden doors and window of the type and size as shown on the Plans
and in accordance with the following specifications and applicable specifications under Item 1003 on
Carpentry and Joinery Works.
1010.2.1 Lumber
Lumber of doors, window and jambs, and panels when required, shall be kiln-dried with moisture content of
not more than 14% and shall be of the specie indicated on the Plans and/ or specified under Item 1003 on
Carpentry and Joinery Works.
1010.2.2 Plywood
Plywood for veneer of solid core and hollow core flush doors shall be 3-ply, rotary cut, 6 mm. thick ordinary
plywood, Class B grade. Marine or waterproof plywood, rotary cut, 3-ply, 6 mm. thick shall be used for flush
doors at toilets and bathrooms or at places where these are exposed to moisture.
1010.2.3 Adhesive
Adhesive shall be water resistant resins and shall be non-staining.
Page 149
1010.2.4 Glass
Glass for window panes shall be 3 mm. thick, smoked or industry type unless otherwise shown on the Plans
or indicated in the Schedule of Doors and Windows.
1010.2.5 Capiz Shells
Capiz shells, when required for window sashes, shall be of selected quality, free from dirt or blemishes and
shall be large enough to obtain flat square piece.
1010.2.6 Hardware
Hardware shall be as specified under Item 1004 on Building Hardware.
1010.3.1 Fabrication
Wooden doors and windows, including frames, shall be fabricated in accordance with the designs and size
shown on the Plans. The fabricated products shall be finished square, smooth sanded and free from damage
or warping.
a. Flush Type Hollow Core Doors
Flush type hollow core doors shall be adequately framed with stiles and top and bottom rails
having a minimum thickness of 44 mm. and width of 75 mm. Two intermediate rails at least
44 mm. wide shall be provided for stiffness.
The stiles and the top and bottom rails shall be rabbeted at least 10 mm. wide to receive
the 6 mm. thick plywood veneer. A lock block shall be provided at each stile, long enough to
connect to the two intermediate rails and at least 75 mm. wide for mounting the lockset.
The plywood veneer shall be glued and nailed to the framing with 25 mm. long finishing
nails space at not more than 150 mm. on centers.
b. Flush Type Solid Core Doors
Flush type solid core doors shall be fabricated in the same manner as the hollow core type
except that spaces between stiles and rails shall be filled and fitted with wood blocks of the
same specie and of uniform thickness thinner by about the thickness of the plywood
veneers. The filler blocks shall be secured to either stiles or rails by nails. Stiles and rails of
flush type doors shall be joined by means of blind mortise and tenon joint, tightly fitted,
glued and locked with bamboo pin 5 mm. round.
c. Panel Doors
Stiles and rails of panel doors shall have a minimum thickness of 44 mm. and width of 140
mm.
Rails minimum thickness of 44 mm and width of 140 mm. Rails shall be framed to stiles by
mortise and tenon joints. Rabbets or grooves of stiles and rails to receive panels shall be
Page 150
6.5 mm. wide and 20 mm. deep. Integral mouldings formed on both faces of stiles and rails
framing the panels shall be true to shape and well defined. Intersections of mouldings shall
be mitered and closely fitted.
Panels of the same specie and having a minimum thickness of 20 mm. shall be beveled
around its edges up to a minimum width of 50 mm. both faces. The beveled edges shall
closely fit into the groove of stiles and rails, but free to move to prevent splitting when
shrinkage occurs.
d. Window Sashes with Glass Panes or Wood Panels
Window sashes shall be fabricated in conformity with the design, size and type of
installation shown on the Plans. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, stiles and rails shall
be tanguile with minimum thickness of 30 mm. and width of 70 mm. Jointing of stiles and
rails shall be mortise and tenon secured with glue and bamboo pin. Stiles and rails shall
rabbeted at the exterior face for mounting glass panes or wood panels. Integral mouldings
formed as frames for panes or panels shall be true to shape, sharply defined and mitered at
joints. Separate mouldings of the same design shall be provided for fixing glass panes and
wood panel from the outside.
e. Window Sashes with Capiz Shells
Stiles and rails shall be of the same sizes specified under Item 1010.3.1 (d) and assembled
with mortise and tenon joint. Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, lattices for framing
capiz shall be tanguile, 8 mm. thick and 15 mm. wide, spaced at not more than 60 mm. on
centers bothways. Grooves 2 mm. wide and 5 mm. shall be made at sides of lattices to
receive the preformed capiz shells.
The lattices shall be assembled with half lap joints at their intersections and the assembled
lattices containing the capiz shells shall be framed into the stiles and rails.
Selected capiz shells shall be washed to remove dirt and blemishes and drier under the sun
for bleaching effect. Capiz shells shall be cut square to required sizes with sharp bench
cutter to produce non-serrated and non-peeling edges.
f. Sliding Type Window Sashes
Stiles of sliding type window sashes shall be framed to the top and bottom rails with mortise
and tenon joints. Tenon shall be formed on the stiles. Joints shall be fitted, glued and locked
with bamboo pins. Top and bottom rails shall be 10 mm. wider than the stiles. Top rails shall
be rabbeted to form tongue flush with the outer face, with width of 8 mm. and height of 10
mm. The stiles and rails shall be rabbeted as specified under Item 1010.3.1 (d) to receive
glass panes or wood panels.
g. Awning Type Window Sashes
Tenons of rails shall be fitted into the mortises formed on the stiles and joints glued and
locked. The stile and rails shall be rabbeted as specified under Item 1010.3.1 (d) for
mounting of glass panes. Series of sashes to be installed vertically shall have their meeting
rails rabbeted for half lapping when in closed position.
h. Casement Type Window Sashes
Page 151
rails of casement type window sashes shall be fitted to stiles with mortise and tenon joint.
Tenons shall be formed in the rails. Meeting rails shall be rabbeted to provide for half
lapping when in closed position. The stiles and rails shall be rabbeted as specified under
Item 1010.3.1 (d) for mounting of glass panes or wood panels.
i. Door and Window Frames
Framing of the specie(s) specified under Item 1003 shall be fabricated in conformity with the
profile and sizes shown on the Plans. Frames shall be assembled with tightly fitted tongue
and groove joint mitered at both sides and nailed. The assembled frames shall be finished
square and flat on the same plane. Assembled frames shall be braced temporarily to
prevent their distortion during delivery to the site and installation.
a. Frames shall be set plumb and square in concrete/ masonry work or framework of walls or
partitions. Frames set in concrete or masonry shall be painted with hot asphalt at its contact
surface and provided with two rows of common wire nails 100 mm. long for anchorage. The
nails shall be staggered and spaced at 300 mm. on center along each row. Frame set in
concrete shall be installed in place prior to concrete work.
Frames set in masonry work may be installed after laying of hollow concrete blocks, bricks or
adobe. Space between frames and masonry shall be fully filled with cement mortar proportioned
1:3.
b. Hinged Doors
Hinged doors, whether panel or flush type with standard height of 2100 mm. and width of not
more than 900 mm. shall be hung with four loose-pin butt hinges, 100 mm. x 100 mm. Swing out
exterior doors shall be hung with four fast-pin butt hinges. Two hinges shall be fitted 150 mm.
from top and bottom edge of door. The other two hinges shall be fitted at third points between
top and bottom hinges. Care should be taken to ensure that the hinges are fitted such that their
pins are aligned for ease of pin insertion and smoothness of operation. For added smoothness
pins should be lightly greased. Hammering of hinges to attain proper alignment shall not be
allowed.
For wider and heavier doors such as narra panel doors, an additional hinge shall be fitted 100
mm. below the top hinge to counteract the door tilting action.
Mounting screws shall be screwed in place in their entire length, not forced into place by
hammering. Hammering of screw into place shall not be permitted.
c. Sliding doors
Overhead tracks, standard, locally manufactured as per Plans shall be installed level and
mounting bracket secured in place with lag screws supplied with the set. Bracket shall be
spaced 1000 mm. on centers. Hangers, two each per door leaf, shall be perfitted and bolted to
the door rail. Foe panel doors the hangers shall be centered on the door stiles. For flush doors,
the hangers shall be centered 100 mm. from the edges of the door. If there is no adequate
space for installing the door with its attached rollers, through either end of the track the perfitted
hangers shall be disassembled for connection to the rollers.
Page 152
After installation of the track, set the door plumb and in alignment by means of the adjustment
mechanism integrated with the roller assembly.
d. Lock Installation
Locks of doors shall be fitted at the same height, centered 1000 mm. above the finished floor
level. Locks shall be installed in conformity with the templates and instructions supplied with
locksets. Holes for mounting locks shall be properly formed to provide snug fit and rigid
attachment of the locks to the doors. Strike plates shall be fitted on the door frame in true
alignment with the lock latch.
e. Sliding Type Window Sashes
Sashes shall be trimmed to fit height of opening. A clearance of 2 mm. shall be provided
between the tongue’s base at the top rail and the bottom of the window head. The same
clearance shall be provided between the sash tongue and the groove at the window head.
Paraffin wax shall be applied to contacts of sliding surfaces. The bottom rails shall be fitted with
standard brass guided spaced 75 mm. from both ends of the rail, mounted flush with the inner
face and secured with three brass screws each guide.
f. Casement Type Window Sashes
Sashes shall be trimmed to fit size of opening, with provision for half lapping of meeting stiles.
Right side sash shall lap into the left side sash. Sashes shall be fitted with two brass-plated
narrow hinges, 50 mm. x 75 mm. spaced 150 mm. from top and bottom of stiles. In lieu of
hinges, sashes may be hung with cadmium-plated steel casement adjusters 200 mm. long,
subject to prior approval of the Engineer. The top and bottom rails of casement type window
sashes shall be milled to provide for the installation of adjusters.
g. Awning Type Window Sashes
Installation of awning type sashes shall be by means of casement adjusters specified under Item
1010.3.2 (f).
Frames of doors and windows shall be measured and paid for on the basis of number of sets completely
installed and accepted by the Engineer.
Doors and windows shall be measured and for based on the number of square meters or set involved in the
completed and accepted installation. Payment per square meter shall include cost of required hardware and
all incidental expenses, but exclusive of locks for doors. Locks shall be paid for per set completely installed.
The different pay items under Wooden Doors and Windows shall be designated the following number,
description and unit of measure.
Payment shall be made under;
Page 153
1010 (a) Frames (Jambs, sills, head set

Transoms & mullions)
1010 (b) Doors (Flush or Panel) set
1010 (c) Window Sashes set
1010 (d) Door Locks set
ITEM 1011 ROLLING UP DOORS
1011.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing all plant, labor, tools, equipment and rolling up door required as shown on
the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
Rolling up doors shall be surfaced mounted type designed for exterior service opening as indicated on the
Plans. Component parts shall conform with the following material specifications:
1. Curtain – shall be manufactured of interlocking curved or flat slats, rolled from galvanized and
bonderized steel, aluminum or stainless steel as the case maybe. Slats shall be of size and thickness
to withstand 0.957 KPa windload.
Curtain is composed of:
a. Interlocking slats shall roll up on a drum supported at head of opening on brackets and shall
be balanced by helical springs.
b. Endlocks – shall be malleable iron riveted to each ends of slats. These are called
continuous when they reinforce both ends of all slats, alternate when every other slat.
c. Bottom bars – shall be manufactured from two equal sized angles, minimum 3 mm. thick
bolted back to back with appropriate half slat at lowest edge of curtain. In addition, exterior
door shall have compressible and replaceable rubber or vinyl weather seal attached to
bottom rail.
2 Counter balance barrel assembly – shall include spring barrel which serves as load carrying beam
encases counter balance mechanism and provide axis around curtain coils. A set arises barrel rings
are involute shapes of malleable iron to assure proper counter balance for all points of travel. Oil
tempered torsion type counter balance spring are wound from heat treated steel, to provide accuracy in
balancing door.
3. Hood – shall be manufactured from 0.60 mm. thick (minimum) galvanized sheet metal, flanged at top
for attachment to header and flanged at bottom to provide longitudinal stiffness. Hood shall enclose
curtain coil and counter balance mechanism.
4. Brackets – shall be made of precisely formed plate with permanently sealed ball bearings, designed to
enclose end of the curtain coil and provide support for counter balance pipe at each end.
5. Guides – shall be fabricated from structural steel angles or precision roll formed channels and angles.
Especially adaptable for doors exposed to heavy wind pressures. Designed with groove depths varying
Page 154
from 50 mm. to 150 mm., depending upon the width of the door, and set cut from the face of the wall to
facilitate the travel of the curtain.
Doors shall be mechanically operated and with provision for manual operation by means of hand chain.
Accessories needed for the satisfactory performance of the door shall be built-in with the unit.
1011.3.1 Erection/ Installation
a. Set and install structural steel angles properly aligned, plumb, level, square true to profile
section and rigidly anchored with adjacent concrete surface walls.
b. Allow all adjacent items of work to be completed before any installation work is started
except the installation of structural steel angles.
c. Assemble rolling up doors in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction manual or as
indicated in the shop drawing approved.
d. All anchors and insets for guides, brackets and other accessories shall be located
accurately.
1011.3.2 Locking Devices
Curtain shall be located at each end of bottom bar by concealed slide bolts which shall engage a lock wedge
in each guide. A plunger type cylinder lock is provided as standard equipment.
1011.3.3 Warranty
Upon completion and before final acceptance of the equipment, the Contractor shall furnish the Procuring
Entity written guaranty stating that the rolling up door equipment and accessories are free from defects. The
guaranty shall be for the period of one (1) year from the date of Certificate of Completion of the work. Any part
of the equipment that becomes defective during the term of the guaranty shall be replaced and made good by
the Contractor at his own expense a manner satisfactory of the Engineer.
The work executed under this item shall be measured by actual units of rolling up door installed at jobsite
complete and ready for service. The computed unit shall bear type of materials and area of opening covered
and shall be accepted by the Engineer.
The accepted work quantified and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the unit Bid Price which
constitutes full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment and other incidentals
necessary to complete this item.
1011 (a) Rolling Up Door (indicate metal unit/set

Door size & type of curtain)
Page 155
ITEM 1012 GLASS AND GLAZING
1012.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all glass and glazing materials, labor, tools, plant and equipment required
in undertaking the proper installation as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
All glass and glazing materials shall be delivered at jobsite with labels affixed indicating quality, make type
and thickness. Each glass in glazed position shall resist a design pressure of 244 kilograms per square meter.
1012.2.1 Plate Glass
Plate glass shall be manufactured from float glass that is mechanically rounded and polished and sealed with
a coating of silver and a uniform film of electrolytic copper plating, then applied with protective coating of paint
to seal out moisture from the silver. Use where good vision is required.
1012.2.2. Float Glass
This basic type of glass shall be manufactured by “floating” continuous ribbon of molten glass into a bath of
molten tin where it is reheated to obtain a flat fire-polished finish and annealed slowly to produce a
transparent float glass thus eliminating grinding and polishing. Used commonly in windows, sliding doors and
window walls. Variation of this basic types are as follows:
Grade AA – Intended for use where superior quality is required.

Grade A - Intended for selected glazing.
Grade B - Intended for general glazing.
Greenhouse quality – Intended for greenhouse glazing where quality is not important.
1012.2.3 Glazing materials for glass installation maybe:
a. Bulk compound such as:
a-1) Mastics that are elastic compounds and non-skinning compound.

a-2) Putties – shall be wood sash putty, or metal sash quality.
a-3) Sealant shall be chemically compatible with setting blocks, edge blocks and sealing tapes.
b. Performed sealants such as:
b-1) Synthetic polymer shall be base sealants that is resilient or non-resilient type.
b-2) Performed gaskets shall be compression or structural type.
c. Setting and Edge Blocks shall be made of lead or neoprene, chemically compatible with
sealants.
d. Accessories like glazing clips, shims spacer strips, etc. shall be made from non-corroding metal
accessories.
1012.2.4 Schedule of glass and Mirrors
Page 156
1012.2.4.1 Use 5.6 mm. (7/32”) thick sheet glass of locally manufactured clear quality (unless
otherwise indicated on the Plans as frosted) for the following:
a. Aluminum windows and doors, notwithstanding plate glass indicated elsewhere.

b. Jalousie window glass slats.
c. Fixed glass louvers.
d. Glass panels for partitions and counter door panels, if any.
e. Sliding glass doors for cabinets.
1012.2.4.2 All glass panels for cabinets, except sliding doors shall be clear glass of locally
manufactured float glass quality, 4.7 mm. (3/16”) thick.
They shall be clear, except where indicated on the Plans as frosted, diffused or opaque. Same shall be used
for wooden sashes.
1012.2.4.3 Unless otherwise noted, clear glass that is locally manufactured shall be used for steel windows.
a. Use 3.1 mm. (1/8”) thick for areas exceeding 0.609 square meter.
b. Use 4.7 mm. (3/16”) thick for areas exceeding 0.609 square meter.
1012.2.4.4 All comfort rooms whether shown or not, the Contractor shall provide and fit securely in
place at the most convenient height above each lavatory 1 mirror, made from local glazing quality polished
plate glass 6 mm. thick with beveled edges and brass chromium plated frame 12 mm. thick waterproof
tanguile marine plywood backing, all in accordance with full size details. Sizes are as follows:
a. Over single lavatories, 600 mm. x 750 mm. (24”x30”)

b. For two lavatories, 1200 mm. x 750 mm. (48”x30”)
c. For three lavatories, 1800 mm. x 750 mm. (72”x30”)
Safety precaution and procedure shall be taken in determining the sizes and in providing the required
clearances by measuring the actual opening to receive the glass. Movable items shall be kept in closed and
locked position until glazing compound has thoroughly set.
1012.3.1.1 All glass sheets shall be bedded, back puttied, secured in place and face puttied. Secure
glass in aluminum frame with non-corrosive clips except where glazing beads are required. Apply putty in
uniformly straight lines, with accurately formed bevels and clean-cut corners; remove excess putty from glass.
1012.3.1.2 Set glass in hollow metal doors and in metal frames of interior partitions in felt channel
insets or bedded in putty to prevent any rattle: secure glass in wood doors and wooden frames with glazing
stops: secure stops on doors with screws.
1012.3.1.3 Glass breakage caused in executing the work or by faulty installation shall be replaced by
the Contractor without extra cost.
1012.3.1.4 Improperly set glass which does not fully meet requirements of its grade shall not be
accepted and shall be replaced without extra cost.
Page 157
1012.3.1.5 The Contractor shall provide and install complete set ready for use, mirrors in all comfort
rooms and elsewhere shown on the Plans. Size and location for each mirror shall be as indicated on the
Plans.
1012.3.2 Workmanship
1012.3.2.1 All glass shall be accurately cut to fit opening and set with equal bearing on the entire width
of pane.
1012.3.2.2 Putty shall be neatly run in straight lines as parallel with inside of glazing rebate; corners
shall be carefully made; all excess putty shall be removed and surfaces left clean.
1012.3.2.3 Apply a thin layer of putty to rebate and set glass or putty, pressing until an even bed is
secured; place spring wire or angle glazing clips and run face putty; remove excess putty from other side flush
with edge of rebate.
1012.3.3 Cleaning
Clean all glass on both sides after putty has been applied completely. Do not disturb edge of putty with
scraper. At completion of work leave glass and glazing works free from cracks and rattles and clean on both
sides.
1012.3.4 Samples
The Contractor shall submit for approval duplicate sample (150 mm. x 250 mm.) of each type of glass bearing
manufacturer’s label and a can of each type of putty.
This Item shall be measured by actual area of glass sheets installed respective of the quality type and
thickness in square meters. The quantified unit of measurement shall be those accepted to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
The quantities item prescribed in Sub-section 1012.4 shall be paid for the unit bid price which payment
constitute full compensation for all glass and glazing materials and other facilities, labor and incidentals
1012 (a) Float Glass square meter
1012 (b) Ordinary Window

Sheet glass square meter
1012 (c) Plate Glass (mirror) set
Page 158
ITEM 1013 CORRUGATED METAL ROOFING
1013.1 Description
This Item shall consist furnishing all plant, equipment, tools, materials and labor required to properly perform
and complete the corrugated metal roofing, together with related accessories such as ridge/ hip rolls, valley,
gutters and flashing, when called for on Plans all in conformity with this Specifications.
1013.2.1 Corrugated and Plain Galvanized Iron Sheets
Corrugated galvanized iron (G.I.) sheets, including plain G.I. sheets for roofing accessories shall be cols-
rolled meeting ASTM A 153 and with spelter coating of zinc of not less than 0.381 kg/sq. m. (1.25 ounces/
sq.ft.), conforming to ASTM A 525 or PNS 67:1985. Unless otherwise specified or shown on Plans roofing
sheets shall be gauge 26 (0.48 mm. thick) and provided in long span sizes to minimize end laps.
Sheets shall weigh not less than 3.74 kg/sq.m. and shall be marked or stamped showing gauge, size, amount
of zinc coating, brand and name of manufacturer. Test specimens shall stand being bent through 180 degree
flat on itself without fracture of the base metal and without flaking of zinc coating.
1013.2.2 Strap Fasteners
Strap fasteners shall be gauge 26 G.I. 25 mm. wide and sufficiently long to bend around up to the opposite
face of purlin, with corners chipped off at the riveting ends
1013.2.3 Rivets, Washers and Burrs
Rivets and washers shall be galvanized mild iron. Rivets shall not be less than 5 mm. in diameter and 10 mm.
in length. Washers shall not be less than 1.5 mm. thick and 20 mm. in outside diameter. Washer’s inside
diameter shall provide snug fit to the rivet.
1013.2.3 Soldering Lead
Soldering lead shall have a composition of 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead, conforming to ASTM B 32.
Rivets and burrs for lap joints of gutters, downspout and flashing shall be copper not less than 3.175 mm. in
diameter (No.8).
1013.2.4 Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessories
Ridge/hip rolls, valleys, flashing and counter flashings, gutters and downspouts, whenever required, shall be
fabricated from plain G.I. sheets. Ridge/hip rolls, flashings and counter flashings shall be gauge 26. Valleys,
gutters and downspout shall be gauge 24 unless otherwise specified on Plans. Wire basket strainers shall be
galvanized, gauge 24.
Roof ventilators, whenever required shall be fabricated from gauge 26 plain G.I. sheets and constructed to the
dimensions and details shown on Plans.
1013.3.1 Preparatory Work
Page 159
Preparatory to the installation of the corrugated G.I. roofing, purlins should have been placed and spaced
properly to fit the length of roofing sheets to be used such that the centerline of the purlins at end lap are 150
mm. fro the bottom line of end laps and intermediate purlins are placed equidistantly. Top of purlins should be
at the same plane.
1013.3.2 Installation of Corrugated G.I. Sheets
Installation of corrugated G.I. sheets with end laps shall start at the lower part of the roof and proceed towards
the direction of monsoon wind with side laps of two-and-a-half (2 ½) corrugations. End laps shall be 250 mm.
minimum. Each sheet shall be fastened temporarily by 1.83 mm. diameter by 25 mm. long galvanized flat
head nails at valleys of corrugations covered by side or end laps.
Succeeding upper rows of corrugated G.I. sheets shall be installed in the same manner until the entire roof
area is covered.
Valleys, ridge/hip rolls and flashing when require, shall be installed before fastening the roofing sheets with
galvanized straps and rivets. One strap shall be riveted at each alternate corrugation at the gutter line, the
ridge line and at the end laps and the straps bent around and nailed to the purlins. Riveting at intermediate
purlins between end laps shall be done at every fourth corrugation. Rivet shall be provided with a galvanized
mild iron washer below and one lead and one galvanized iron washer above the sheet. Rivet shall be
sufficiently long to permit forming a hemispherical head. Riveting shall be done such that the lead washer
shall be compressed to provide a watertight fit around the rivet.
1013.3.3 Installation of Roofing Accessories
a. Ridge and Hip Rolls

Ridge and hip rolls shall lap at least 250 mm. over roofing sheets and, together, shall be
riveted at every second corrugation.
b. Valleys
Valleys shall lap at least 450 mm. each way under the roofing sheets and shall be secured to
the framework with galvanized nails, such nails placed below the roofing sheets. Rivets along
side of the valley shall be at every second corrugation.
c. Flashing
Flashing, of gauge 26 plain G.I. sheets, unless otherwise specified, shall be installed along
intersections of roof, with concrete or masonry walls in accordance with details shown on
Plans. Flashing running parallel to sheet corrugation shall lap at least two corrugations with
edge turned down. Flashing across sheet corrugation or at an angle thereto, shall lap at least
250 mm. and the edge of flashing adjoining wall shall be at least 200 mm. wide and provided
with counter flashing.
d. Counter Flashing
Counter flashing sheets of gauge 24 plain G.I. shall be built into preformed wedge-shape
groove of concrete or masonry wall. The edge to be built into wall groove shall have a 25 mm.
strip bent 45 degrees and shall be sealed in the groove with cement mortar or caulking
compound.
e. Reglets
Reglets, when required per plans in connection with counter flashing, shall be fabricated
products approved by the Engineer, complete with fittings. Reglets shall be located not less
than 200 mm. or more than 40 mm above roofing. Reglets plugs shall be spaced not more
than 300 mm. on centers. Open-type reglets shall be filled with fiber board or other suitable
Page 160
separator to prevent crushing of the slot during installation. The counter flashing shall be
inserted into the full depth of reglet and the reglet lightly punched every 300 mm. to crimp the
reglet and the counter flashing together.
f. Gutters
Gutters, from gauge 24 plain G.I. sheets shall be fabricated to the shape and dimensions
indicated on the Plans. The rear side of the gutter shall have a 12.5 mm strip bent 30 degrees
and shall be not less than 12.5 mm. higher than the opposite side. Gutter joints shall be flat
seam folded in direction of flow and soldered evenly. Otherwise gutter joints shall be lapped at
least 25 mm. fastened together with 3.175 mm. diameter (No.8) copper rivets and burrs, and
sealed by soldering along both exposed edges of lap.
Gutter shall be attached to facia board or roof nailer with galvanized nails or screws spaced at
not more than 900 mm on centers and at a point slightly higher than leading edge of gutter. As
additional support, gutter shall have plain G.I. strap hangers 25 mm. wide fastened to roof
nailers by screw shank-type nails and riveted to the gutter’s leading edge. Strap hangers shall
be spaced at not more than 900 mm. on centers. When shown on plans that gutter is not fixed
to facia board or purlin, gutter shall be supported by wrought iron (W.I.) hangers not less than
4.75 mm. thick and 19 mm. wide spaced at not more than 900 mm. on centers. W.I. hanger
shall be fabricated to fit configuration of the gutter and attached to fascia or purlin with two (2)
No. 8 flat head wood screws.
Gutter shall be installed with a pitch of 1 in 100 slope to downspout.
g. Downspouts
1. Downspouts
Unless specified otherwise, downspouts shall be plain G.I., thickness fabricated to the
dimensions shown on the Plans and installed at indicated locations. Downspout shall be
secured to the wall with G.I. straps 25 mm. wide, spaced at more than 1000 mm. and
anchored with concrete nails. Inlets of downspouts shall be fitted with gauge 14 wire basket
strainers.
2. Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Downspouts
When shown on Plans that downspouts are other than G.I. sheets, downspouts shall be
unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipes and fittings with dimensions indicated and
conforming with ASTM D3033 and D 3034. Joints shall be made with either solvent cement
or rubber “O-rings” depending on the design of fitting for the joints. Rubber “O-rings” shall
be neoprene type, heat and oil resistant, complying with ASTM F-477. Downspout shall be
secured to adjoining wall with plain G.I. straps 25 mm. wide and spaced at not more than
1000 mm.
h. Roof Ventillators
Roof ventilators, whenever shown on Plans shall be firmly secured to the roofing or roof
structure by means of rivets. Roof ventilators installed on the roof at places other than the
ridge shall be provided with adequate flashing around intersection with roofing to ensure
watertight joints.
1013.3.4 Joints of G.I. Roofing Accessories
a. Soldered Joints
Joints made by tapping coupled with riveting shall be rendered watertight by soldering. All
edges of uncoated sheet metal to be soldered shall be pretinned before soldering.
Soldering shall be done slowly with well heated iron in order to thoroughly heat the seam
Page 161
and sweat the solder completely through the full length of the seam. Upon completion of
soldering, acid shall be neutralized by washing thoroughly with water.
b. Non-soldered Joints
Non-soldered joints of G.I. gutters, downspouts and flashing shall be done by flat lock
seams. Two adjoining edges of lock seam shall be bent 90 degree. One bent strip shall be
at least 15 mm. wide and the connecting piece shall have a bent strip twice in width which
shall be bent down over the upturned narrower strip and pressed together. Once properly
interlocked, the joint shall be flattened such that the edge of the wider strip b concealed.
1013.3.5 Roof Installation on Metal Purlins
Installation on metal purlins shall follow the same procedure as that on wood purlins, except that fastening
shall be done with thread-cutting, zinc-coated steel screws, No.12 by 50 mm. having hexagonal heads and
provided with neoprene washers. Screw holes shall be drilled using 5 mm. (13/64”) diameter bit.
1013.3.6 Water Leak Test
The completed roofing shall be tested for water tightness at side and end laps at joints of roofing sheets with
ridge/hips rolls, valleys and flashings by means of water-spray system. The water-spray system shall have
nozzle which will deliver water pressure of 2 kg/cm² directly to the joint being tested in such manner and for a
duration directed by the Engineer. All defective works as determined by this test shall be remedied by the
Contractor at his expense and the test shall be repeated until the work is found satisfactory.
Roofing sheets shall be measured and paid for on an area basis in square meters or part thereof, such roofing
sheets including all laps, fasteners and rivets as installed complete and accepted.
Ridge/hip rolls, flashing, valleys, gutters and downspouts shall be measured in linear meter of completed and
accepted work such measurement shall include necessary straps and fixings required for complete
installation.
Roof ventilators shall be measured and paid for per unit completely installed and accepted.
The different pay items under roofing work shall be designated the following number, description and unit of
measure:
shall be full compensation for placing all materials, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals to complete the
work.
403.3 (1a) Truss & Purlins Square Meter
403.3 (1b) Water Tank Lot
Page 162
403.7.2 (2) Prepainted Long Span Roofing,

Siding and Bending Accessories Square Meter
403.5 (3) Ceiling & Siding Accessories Square Meter
403.9 (4) Membrane Waterproofing Square Meter
ITEM 1014 PREPAINTED METAL SHEETS
1014.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing all prepainted metal sheet, materials, tools and equipment, plant including
labor required in undertaking the proper installation complete as show on the Plans and in accordance with
this Specification.
All material metal sheet and roofing accessories shall be oven baked painted true to profiles indicated on the
Plans.
1014.2.1 Pre-Painted Roofing Sheets
Pre-painted roofing sheets shall be fabricated from cold rolled galvanized iron sheets specially tempered steel
for extra strength and durability. It shall conform to the material requirements defined in PNS 67:1985. Profile
section in identifying the architectural moulded rib to be used are as follows: regular corrugated, Quad-rib, Tri-
wave, Rib-wide, twin-rib, etc. Desired color shall be subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
1014.2.2
Gutters, Valleys, Flashing Hip and Ridge roll shall be fabricated from gauge 24 (.600 mm thick) cold-rolled
plain galvanized iron sheets specially tempered steel. Profile section shall be as indicated on the Plans.
1014.2.3
Fastening hardware shall be of galvanized iron straps and rivets. G.I. straps are of .55 mm thick x 16 mm
wide x 267 mm long (gauge 26 x 5/8” x 10-1/2”) and standard rivets.
1014.2.4
Base metal thickness shall correspond to the following gauge designation available locally as follows:
a) Base Metal Thickness Designated Gauge

.400 mm thick Gauge 28
b) Protective Coatings Thickness
Page 163
1. Zinc 34.4 microns

(244 gm/m2)
2. Paint coatings
Top coat 15.20 microns
Bottom coat 6.8 microns
c) Overall thickness with protective coats

.400 mm .428-451 mm
.500 mm .532-651 mm
.600 mm .638-651 mm
d) Length of roofing sheets – available in cut to length long span length up to 18.29 meters.
e) Special length and thickness are available by arrangements.
Before any installation work is commenced, the Contractor shall ascertain that the top face of the purlins are
in proper alignment. Correct the alignment as necessary in order to have the top faces of the purlins on an
even plane.
1014.3.1 Handling/Lifting/Positioning of Sheets
Sheets shall be handled carefully to prevent damage to the paint coating. Lift all sheets packs on to the roof
frame with the overlapping down-turned edge facing towards the side of the roof where installation will
commence, otherwise sheets will have to be turned end-to-end during installation.
1014.3.2 Installation Process
1. Start roofing installation by placing the first sheet in position with the downturned edge in line with other
building elements and fastened to supports as recommended.
2. Place the downturned edge of the next sheet over the edge of the first sheet, to provide side lap and hold
the side lap firmly in place. Continue the same procedure for subsequent sheets until the whole roofing
area is covered and/or (Adopt installation procedure provided in the instruction manual for each type of
Architectural molded rib profile section.)
3. For walling applications follows the procedure for roofing. Allow a minimum end of 100 mm (4”) for vertical
walling.
1014.3.2 Gutters, Valleys, Flashing ridge and Hip rolls
Gutters, valleys, flashing ridge and hip rolls be fastened where indicated on the Plans by self-tapping screws
or galvanized iron straps and rivets.
1014.3.3 End Laps
In case handling or transport consideration requires to use two or more end lapped sheets to provide full
length coverage for the roof run, install each line of sheets from bottom to top or form eave line to apex of roof
framing. Provide 150 mm minimum end lap.
1014.3.4 Anchorage/Fastening
Page 164
1. Prepainted steel roofing sheets shall be fastened to the wood purlins with standard length G.I. straps and
rivets.
2. For steel frame up to 4.5 mm thick use selfdrilling screw No. 12 by 35 mm long hexagonal head with
neoprene washer.
3. For steel support up to 5 mm thick or more use thread cutting screw No. 12 by 40 mm long hexagonal
head with neoprene washer.
4. Side lap fastener use self drilling screw No. 10 by 16 mm long hexagonal head with neoprene washer.
5. Valley fastened to lumber and for walling use self-drilling wood screw No. 12 by 25 mm long hexagonal
head with neoprene washer.
6. Valleys fastened to steel supports use selfdrilling screws, hexagonal head with neoprene washer. Drill size
is 5 mm diameter.
1014.3.5 Cutting of Sheets
In cutting prepainted steel roofing sheets and accessories to place the already installed or laid in position, the
area around holes or cuts shall be masked to shield the paint from hot fillings.
1014.3.6 Storage and Protection
Prepainted steel roofing. Walling products and accessories should be delivered to the jobsite in strapped
bundles. Sheets and/or bundles shall be neatly stacked in the ground and it left in the open it shall be
protected by covering the stack materials with loose tarpuline.
The work done under this item shall be measured by actual area covered or installed with prepainted steel
roofing and/or walling in square meters and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer/Architect.
The area of prepainted steel roofing and/or walling in square meters as provided in Section 1014 shall be paid
for at the bid or contract unit price which payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials,
tools and incidents necessary to complete this item.
1014 (a) Prepainted metal sheets m2
ITEM 1015 CLAY ROOF TILES
1015.1 Description
Page 165
This item shall consists of furnishing all plant, labor, tools, equipment and clay, roof tiles required to complete
the roofing as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
1015.2.1 Clay Roof Tiles
Tiles shall be manufactured from red clay specie, moulded to custom tile patterns. It shall be kilned after
dying to improve natural aesthetic appearance and resistance to erosion and withstand any climatic condition
in the topics. Where required and indicated to be glazed, color shall be approved by the Engineer.
1015.2.2 Sheathing
a) Corrugated G.I. subroofing

Corrugated G.I. subroofing shall be 0.50 mm thick, long span.
b) Plywood Sheathing
Plywood sheathing when used instead of G.I., shall be 12 mm thick marine plywood treated with two
piles of felt paper, asphalt impregnated.
1015.2.3 Wood Battens
Wood battens shall be 25 mm x 50 mm pressure treated lumber properly laid to fit clay roof tiles and
accessories as indicated on the Plans.
1015.2.4 Fasteners
Fasteners shall be manufactured from non-corrosive materials. Nails shall large with sufficient length to give
19 mm penetration on wood battens and #16 tie wires to be copper of brass as the case maybe.
Before any work is started the Calculator shall secure approved roof framing Plan and determine/evaluate
actual site condition. In case modification is necessary the Contractor shall submit shop drawings to the
Engineer for approval.
1015.3.1 Preparatory Work
Battens shall be installed in straight lines, level, squared and firm. It may rest on sheathing and anchored
rigidly by means of galvanized iron straps 0.60 mm thick riveted on sheathing, or nailed on top chord or jack
rafter when it rests on plywood sheathing. Top chord or jack rafter shall have at least a minimum roof pitch of
25 degrees. Plywood sheathing shall be overlaid with two piles be spaced to fit the clay roof tiles and
accessories.
1015.3.2 Tinsmithry Works (Gutters, Valleys)
Gutters and valleys shall be set in place before wood battens are installed. Use 0.60 mm thick (gauge 24)
plain galvanized iron sheet moulded true to profile section indicated on the Plans or as directed by the
Engineer.
1015.3.3 Clay Roof Tiles on Concrete Roof Slab
Page 166
1. Start laying at the lower layer from right to left. See to it that the left anchorage of tile is placed near or
close to hip truss as much as possible.
2. Continue to the next layer of clay roof tiles following the same procedure. After all clay roof tiles are laid
out, mark the clay roof tiles at hips and valleys which are to be cut using straight edge or string as guide.
3. Cut one by one tiles that the application of clay roof tile accessories and fill opening under roll of tile with
mortar. Color to match the clay roof tile installed.
4. Install hip stringer and cut hips on job.

Where tiles join hip stringer, provide waterproof elastic cement. Cement hip roll and ridge in lap and
fasten with nails/tie wires as specified. Fills voids at hip starters and ridge ends with mortar, color to
match tile.
5. Remove all debris and clean roof area for service.

This item shall be measured by actual roof area laid with clay roof tiles and accessories in square meters or
part thereof, for work completed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The accepted work quantified and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the unit Bid price which
constitutes full compensation for furnishing all materials. Labor, tools, equipment and other incidentals
Pay Item number Description Unit of Measurement
1015 (a) Clay roof tile m2
ITEM 1016 WATERPROOFING
1016.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing all waterproofing materials, labor, tools, equipment and other facilities and
undertaking the proper installation works required as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this
Specification.
1016.2.1 Cement-base Waterproofing
Cement –base waterproofing powder mix shall be cement-base, aggregate type, heavy duty, water-proof
coating for reinforced concrete surface and masonry exposed to water. The aggregates are graded and sized
so as to mesh perfectly and are selected for purity, hardness, strength and are non-metallic. When mixed with
other ingredients are free flowing, water-proof coatings that possesses strength durability and density.
1016.2.1.2 Additive Binders
Page 167
Additive binders shall be of special formulation of acrylic polymers and modifiers in liquid form used as
additive with cement-base powder mix that improves adhesion and mechanical properties.
1016.2.1.3 Water
Water shall be clean, clear and potable.
1016.2.2 Membrane Waterproofing
1016.2.2.1 Primer
Primer shall be of asphalt cold applied, free from water and other foreign matters, and shall conform to the
specifications requirement defined in ASTM D-41.
1016.2.2.2 Built-up Membrane
Built-up membrane shall be made of smoothly woven fibers that are impervious to acid, heat, dampness and
totting. It should permit complete penetration of asphalt compound or bituminous coating in the woven glass
fiber.
1016.2.2.4 Mopping Materials
a) Type A soft adhesive self-sealing asphalt for structure below ground level.
b) Type B where asphalt is not exposed on temperature exceeding 51.7 celcius for structure above ground
level
c) Type C where asphalt is exposed on vertical surface in direct sunlight or above temperature of 51.7
celcius structure above ground level.
1016.2.3 Hydrolithic Waterproofing
a) Hydrolithic waterproofing mix shall be heavy cement-based coating compatible to reinforced concrete
wall. It must prevent built-up of water vapor which causes blistering, flaking and peeling of paints films.
b) Material must thoroughly fill and seal pores and voids that it can be used against water pressure on the
interior surface of walls below grade.
Roof decks, balconies, toilet and bathrooms, gutters, parapet walls and other areas indicated on the plans to
be waterproof shall first be rendered with cement-based waterproofing before any type of waterproofing is
applied.
1016.3.1 Surface Preparation
1016.3.1.1 Concrete surface to be applied with waterproofing shall be structurally sound, clean and free of
dirt, loose mortar particles, paints films oil, protective coats, efflorescence laitance, etc.
1016.3.1.2
All defects shall be properly corrected and carefully formed to provide a smooth surface that is free of marks
and properly cured prior to application works.
1016.3.1.3
Page 168
Inside corners where vertical and horizontal structure meet shall be provided with cants measuring 50 mm by
50 mm or rounded at corners a minimum of 50 mm radius.
a) Concrete slabs shall be properly graded to drain rainwater. Provide a minimum pitch of 1 on 100 to
satisfactorily drain rainwater freely into the drainage lines, gutters and downspouts.
b) Drainage connections and weepholes shall be set to permit the free flow of water.
c) Any expansion and contraction joints shall be cleaned, primed, fitted with a backing rod and caulked with
sealant.
d) Provide reglets of about 40 mm deep by 40 mm wide and 250 mm above floor finish along walls or
parapets for the termination of the membrane.
e) Prepared surfaces shall be cured and kept wet by sprinkling with water at regular intervals for a period of
at least three days and allow surfaces to actually set within seven days.
f) Ensure that he prepared surfaces has completely set and all defects repaired.
g) When there is reasonable doubt as to the presence of moisture in the surfaces to be applied with
membrane expose that same direct to sunlight for another 2 days or heat all suspected area using blow
torch.
1016.3.2 Preformed or Built-up Membrane
1016.3.2.1 Application Procedure
a) Prior to application of membrane concrete surfaces should be sound and cured without the use of curing
compound. Apply a coat of concrete neutralizer to remove oil dirts and other contaminants.
b) Apply asphalt primer at the rate of one gallon per 100 square feet evenly by spraying or by paint brush.
c) Application shall be done one direction strip by and overlapping each other to assure uniform thickness.
d) Allow primer to dry until it is ready to receive next coat or layer as specified in the manufacturing
instructional manual.
e) As soon as primer coating is workable, lay a single layer of preformed or built-up membrane smoothly
free from irregularities and folds.
f) Lay preformed or built-up membrane conforming to size and shape of the surface area to be covered.
g) Carefully lay side and end laps in order to assure an even thickness throughout the whole surface area to
be covered.
h) When the whole surface area is completely covered apply a single coat of asphalt primer at the rate of 3
to 4 gallons per 100 square feet.
i) Meshes of treated woven glass fibers shall not be completely closed or sealed by the primer coat, but
shall sufficiently open to allow successive moppings of the ply material to seep through.
j) Cover ply not more than the minimum amount of surfacing necessary to prevent sticking on ply.
k) After application surface shall be uniformly smooth, free from irregularities folds and knots.
l) Repeat the procedure until 5 piles has been satisfactorily installed or as many layers required or specified
in the Plans.
m) Where weather disturbance interrupt the work and exposing the membrane to moisture remove the layer
exposed to moisture and repeat procedure until completion of the process.
1016.3.2.2 Protective Coating
a) Where laying of the built-up or preformed membrane conforms with the number of plies required as
shown on the plans lay a mixture or sand mastic in the proportion of one part asphalt or bituminous
material and four parts coarse screened sand by volume, with a steel trowel at an average of 3 mm. thick
over the surface of membrane.
b) Then at the rate of one gallon per 100 square feet, apply aluminum heat reflecting finish thoroughly over
the dried sand mastic coating.
1016.3.2.3 Metal Cap Flashing
Page 169
a) Provide cap flashing gauge 24 plain G.I. where shown on the Plans.
b) Where cap flashing is connected to preformed lock in through-wall form upper edge of cap flashing to
engage in preformed lock. Mallet lock down tight to provide a spring action against base flashing.
c) Then at the rate of gallon per 100 square feet, apply aluminum heat reflecting finish thoroughly over the
dried sand mastic coating.
d) Where cap flashing is terminated in raked joints or in prepared masonry or stone reglet fasten flashing
with wedge every 12 inches and fill reglet on vertical surfaces continuous with plastic cement and fill
reglet on vertical surfaces continuous with plastic cement and on horizontal surfaces, continuous with
molten lead.
1016.6.3.3 Membrane Waterproofing Cement Topping
a) Provide concrete cement topping of at least 50 mm. thick on the membrane after 5 days where protective
coatings has been applied.
b) Concrete cement topping should be class “A” with 9 mm. pea gravel and preferably provided with 2-way 6
mm. diameter temperature steel bars.
1016.3.4 Liquid Waterproofing as Membrane
Before any coat of liquid waterproofing is applied concrete cement surface shall conform with the requirement
defined in Sub-section 1017.3.1.1.
1016.3.4.1 Application Procedure
a) Prior to application of membrane concrete surfaces should be sound and cured without the use of curing
compound. Apply a coat of concrete neutralizer to removed oil, dirt and other contaminants.
b) Apply a primer coat of elastomeric coating standard of the manufacturer at the rate of 1/3 gallon per 9.28
meter square (100 square feet) over the surface area to be applied.
c) After the primer coat has dried penetrating and sealing the concrete surface areas coated apply 25 dry
mills of coating at the rate of one gallon per 100 square meters for 3 coatings on the same concrete
surface areas coated with liquid waterproofing.
d) The concrete surface areas coated shall be allowed to dry in twenty fours if relative humidity is above
4.44 Celsius.
e) Liquid waterproofing membrane may be applied by paint brush, airless spray, notched trowel, sequegee
or roller preferably 20-25 mills maximum thickness each wet coat.
1016.3.4.2 Precaution
a) Liquid waterproofing membrane should not be applied unless the ambient temperature is 4.44 Celsius or
higher and should not proceed during inclement weather condition.
b) Extra care shall be observed by persons doing the application works especially those that have skin
sensitiveness must wear gloves while applying the liquid waterproofing. The liquid water-proofing
membrane compound is highly combustible.
1016.3.5 Protection of Membrane Waterproofing Surfaces in General
a) Concrete topping in situation where it is desirable to have a bond between membrane waterproofing and
topped slab it is recommended that the concrete topping be placed as the membrane dries, usually 48
hours after final coat is applied.
b) If a bond is not required, the membrane should be protected with asphalt asbestos board or asphalt felt
paper such time as topping or concrete covering is applied. Prior to topping or placing concrete covering
the membrane shall be inspected and initiate repair work where necessary.
c) Exposed membrane surfaces at concrete gutters and areas not frequently disturbed may be allowed.
Page 170
d) Membrane waterproofing at basement shall be covered and protected by installing tightly butted asphalt
impregnated protection boards with a minimum thickness of 6 mm. and preferably 12 mm. on horizontal
areas.
All projections and pipes must be protected with asbestos cloth approximately 6 mm. thick. Install the
bituminous paving with extra care to avoid damage, lift or curl the underlying protection boards.
This Item shall be measured in square meters for areas actually rendered with membrane waterproofing and
number of packages for integrally waterproofed areas accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 1016.4 shall be paid for at the Contract unit price
for integral and membrane waterproofing work which price and payment shall be full compensation for
furnishing and applying integral and membrane waterproofing materials including the use of equipment and
tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
Pay Item number Description Unit of Measurement
1016 (a) Cement-base waterproofing m2

1016 (b) Liquid waterproofing m2
1016 (c) Built-up & Preformed membrane m2
ITEM 1018 CERAMIC TILES
1018.1 Description
1018.1. Scope of Work
This section covers all works required in connection with wall and floor finishes on concrete surfaces in accordance
with this Specification and as shown in the Plans.
1018.2 Material Requirement
1018.2.1 Tile Works
(1) Floor Tiles
Tiles shall be standard grade, unglazed vitrified tiles, and 6 mm thick. Color and pattern shall be as specified in the
drawings or as approved by the Engineer.
(2) Ceramic Tiles
It shall be of the standard good quality grade, gloss smooth finish; color, texture and size code should be strictly
adhered as shown in the Plans.
Page 171
(3) Tile Adhesive
Tile adhesive (tile bonding agent) shall be used as the dry set mortar to install tiles on walls and floors employing
the thin-set method conforming to ANSI A108.1b
1018.2.2 Storage and Delivery of Material
Cement and lime shall be stored off the ground under watertight cover, and away from damp walls and surfaces
until ready for use. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the premises immediately.
Manufactured materials shall be delivered in the original unbroken packages or containers that are labeled plainly
with the manufacturer's names and brand. Container for tiles shall be grade-sealed. Materials shall be handled in a
manner that will prevent the intrusion of deleterious materials that will affect its quality and appearance.
1018.3.1 Tileworks
(1) General
The work consist of furnishing all materials, labor and performing all operations in connection with tile finishing of
floors and walls, complete including mortar beds for the tile. Tilework shall not be started until roughing-ins for
plumbing and electrical work has been completed and tested. The work of all other trades in the area where the
work is to be done shall be protected from damage in a workmanship manner as directed by the Engineer.
(2) Mortar for Tiles
A scratch coat for wall tile shall be ABC or approved equivalent. Scratch coat shall have a minimum thickness of 9
mm. The buttering mortar for setting wall tiles and mortar setting bed for floor tiles shall have the same material as
that of scratch coat.
(3) Floor Tiling
a) Preparation of Surfaces
Before tile is applied with a dry-set mortar bed, the structural floor shall be tested for levelness or uniformity of slope
by flooding it with water. Areas with water ponds shall be filled, leveled and retested before the setting bed is
applied. The slab shall be soaked thoroughly with clean water on the day before the setting bed is applied.
Immediately preceding the application of the setting bed, the slab shall again be wetted thoroughly but no free
water shall be permitted to remain on the surface. A skim coat of ABC cement mortar shall then be applied not
more than 1.5 mm thick. The mortar shall be spread until its surface is true and even, and thoroughly compacted,
either level or sloped uniformly for drainage, where required. A setting bed, as far as can be covered with the tile
before the mortar shall have reached its initial set, must be placed in one(1) operation, but in the event that more
setting mortar has been placed than can be covered, the unfinished portion shall be removed and cut back to a
clean leveled edge.
(b) Installation of Floor Tile
All tiles shall be soaked in clean water to a minimum of one (1) hour before they are installed. Absorptive mounted
tile shall be damped by placing tile on a wetted cloth in a shallow pan before installing. Before the initial set has
taken place in the setting bed, a skim of ABC cement mortar .75 mm to 1.5 mm thick, shall be trowelled or brushed
over the setting. The tiles shall then be pressed firmly upon the setting bed, and carefully tapped into the mortar
until true and even with the place of the finished floor base. Tapping and leveling shall be completed within one (1)
hour after placing tiles. Borders and defined lines shall be laid before the field or body of the floor. Where floor drain
is provided, the floor shall be sloped properly to the drains. Cutting of tiles, where necessary, shall be done along
Page 172
the outer edges of tile against trim, base, thresholds, pipes, built-in fixtures, and similar surfaces and shall be
geared and joined carefully. Tiles shall be secured firmly in place, and loose tiles or tiles sounding hollow shall be
removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All lines shall be kept straight, parallel and true and all
finished surface brought to true and even planes.
(4) Jointing
Joints shall be parallel and uniform in width, plumb, level and in alignment. End joints in broken-joint shall be made,
as far as practicable, on the center line of the adjoining tiles. Joint widths shall be uniform and measured to
accommodate the tiles in the given spaces with a minimum cutting.
(5) Grouting
Grouting shall be done as soon as the mortar beds have sufficiently set. All cement shall be Portland cement,
colored or white, as required. Where light colored mortar is required in joints, a mixture of white cement and non-
fading mineral oxide shall be used to produce the desired colors. The quantity of mineral oxides shall not exceed
10% of the volume of cement in any case.
(6) Cleaning
Upon completion of grouting, the tile shall be thoroughly cleaned and maintained in this condition until completion
of the contract.
The finished area to be paid for under this item shall be measured by the number of square meter of unglazed floor
tile laid and accepted in accordance with the plans and specifications to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The accepted quantities measured as stipulated in Sub-Section 8.4.1, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for
at the contract unit price for each of the particular pay item listed below, which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete each work item.
1018.2 (1a) Unglazed Floor tiles Square Meter

1018.2 (1b) Wall tiles Square Meter
ITEM 1020 VINYL FLOOR TILES
1020.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing of all vinyl tiles and fitting accessories, adhesive materials, labor, tools,
equipments and the satisfactory performance in undertaking the proper installation of vinyl tile flooring as
shown on the Plans and in accordance with this specification.
Page 173
1020.2.1 Vinyl Tiles
Vinyl tiles shall be of first grade quality measuring 300 mm. x 300 mm. x 3 mm. thick, fully homogeneous,
flexible, resilient and resistant to alkali moisture, grease and oil. The color and design pattern of vinyl tile shall
be uniformly distributed through out the thickness of the tile.
1020.2.2 Adhesive
Adhesive shall be best suited for tropical application and compatible with the vinyl tile to be installed.
1020.2.3 Seal Polish
Seal polish shall be plastic emulsion suited for the particular type of floor as recommend by the vinyl tile
manufacturer.
1020.3.1.1 General
Installation of the tile shall not commence until the work other trades, including painting has been completed.
The Contractor shall carefully examine all surfaces over which the tiles are to be set. Floor surfaces that are
to received vinyl tile shall be clean thoroughly, dry, smooth, firm and sound, and free from oil, paint, wax, dirt
and any other damaging material.
1020.3.1.2 Tile Laying Design
The tile laying design shall be indicated on Plans and in the colors selected and approved by the Engineer for
each area. All joint shall be parallel to the wall line. Where line patterns of tile perpendicular to the lines of
other tiles, they shall be laid truly at right angles.
1020.3.1.3 Adhesive
Adhesive shall be applied in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer’s painted direction, unless specified
or directed otherwise. Smoking, the use of open flames and other sources of ignitions are strictly prohibited in
the area where solvent containing adhesive are being used or spread.
1020.3.1.4 Application of the Tile
Start in the center of the room or area and work from the center towards the edges. Keep tile lines and joint
square, symmetrical, tight and even; and keep each floor in a true, level plane, except where indicated as
sloped. Vary width as necessary to maintain full size tiles in the field but no edge tile shall be less than one
half the field tile size, except where irregular shaped rooms make it impossible.
1020.3.1.5 Cutting
Cut vinyl floor tile to and fit around all permanent fixtures, pipes and outlets. Cut edges, fit and scribe to walls
and partition after flooring has been applied.
Page 174
1020.3.1.6 Edge Strips
Provide edging strips where flooring terminates of points higher at door ways where thresholds are provided.
Edge strip shall be extruded aluminum butty type and beveled at exposed edges. The top surface of the metal
strips shall be finished flush with the tiles. Secure strips at the end and between at about 200 mm. apart with
screws. Submit samples of metal strips for approval before application and installation.
1020.3.1.7 Cleaning and Waxing
After the vinyl tiles and accessories are laid and set, it shall be cleaned with a cleaner as recommended by
the manufacturer and a cost of approved seal polish.
1020.3.1.8 Protection
After the floor has been waxed, they shall be carefully protected against damage, either with heavy building
paper or by keeping traffic off the floors until the area is ready for use.
All works performed under this section shall be measured in square meter/linear meter or actual number of
vinyl floor tiles installed complete with accessories and ready for service.
The actual area in square meter, linear meters or number of Quantities shall be the basis of payment based
on the Unit Bid or Contract Unit Price.
1020 Vinyl Floor Tiles Square Meter (m2)
ITEM 1021 CEMENT FLOOR FINISH
1021.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, labor, tools and equipment in undertaking cement floor
finishing where shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
Manufactured materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer’s original unbroken packages or containers
which are labeled plainly with the manufacturer’s name and trademark.
1021.2.1 Cement
Portland cement shall conform to the requirement of Item 700, Hydraulic Cement.
Page 175
Fine aggregates shall be clean, washed, sharp river sand and free from dirt, clay, organic matter or other
deleterious substances. Sand derived from crushed gravel or stone may be used with the Engineer’s approval
but in no case shall such sand be derived from stone unsuitable for use as coarse aggregate.
1021.2.3 Coloring Material
The coloring material shall be red or green oxide powder of the quality capable of achieving the best staining
powder and homogeneity.
1021.2.4 Metallic Floor Hardener (Premix)
Metallic floor hardener shall be a mixture of oil-free specially graded clean iron particles, mineral oxide
pigment and Portland cement binder, premixed according to the manufacturer’s instruction manual.
1021.2.5 Non-Metallic Floor Hardener
c) Powder type hardener shall be a silica quartz aggregates, workability admixtures, mineral oxide pigments
and Portland cement mixed according to the manufacturer’s instruction manual.
d) Epoxy type topping hardener shall be a combination of epoxy resins filled with hard and natural emery or
silica quartz aggregates, premixed according to the manufacturer’s instruction manual.
1021.3.1 Mixture
Concrete topping materials shall be measured accurately in accordance with the following:
a) Mortar topping shall be one (1) part Portland cement and three (3) parts fine aggregates by loose volume.
b) Finish topping shall be pure Portland cement properly graded conforming to the requirements of Item
700, Hydraulic Cement, mixed with water to approved consistency and plasticity. Where required to be
colored cement floor finish, red or green oxide powder shall be premixed with porlland cement complying
with finish topping requirement and the desired color intensity. Cement floor finish hardener shall be
premixed as required and applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction manual.
1021.3.2 Preparation of Concrete Surface
Surface to receive mortar concrete topping shall be cleaned of all projections, dust, loose particles and other
foreign matters.
Finish elevation shall be established over the areas on the Plans.
Before any mortar concrete topping is applied, the prepared concrete base surface shall first be wetted and
grouted with Portland cement.
a) Mortar topping of the thickness specified on the Plans, shall be spread over the prepared concrete base
and shall be float finished using wood hand trowel. Batches of mortar topping shall be emplaced within
one (1) hour of mixing thereof.
Page 176
b) As soon as the water sheen has disappeared the surface shall be lightly scratched with a stiff bristle
broom.
c) The finish topping mixture whether plain, colored or with floor hardener shall be spread over the lightly
scratched surface before final set taken place and hand troweled to produce a smooth surface.
d) The finished surface shall be free of trowel marks, have uniform texture and true to a plane within an
allowable tolerance of 3 mm. in 3.0 meters.
1021.3.4 Protection of Finished Surface
Cement floor finished surface shall be covered with burlap or appropriate covering to avoid injurious action by
sun, rain, flowing water and mechanical injury.
Cement floor shall be finished level and true to finish elevation as shown on the Plans. Finish topping shall
have no visible junction marks where one (1) day’s work adjoins the other. V-cut groove lines shall be
provided where shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
All cement floor finish shall be measured in square meters or part thereof for work actually completed and
accepted.
The work quantified and determined as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the Contract Unit
price which price constitutes full compensation including labor, materials, tools and equipment and incidentals
necessary to complete this Item.
Pay Item Number. Description Unit of Measurement
1021 (a) Plain Cement floor finish Square Meter (m2)

1021 (b) Colored cement floor finish Square Meter (m2)
1021 (c) Cement floor finish
with Floor Hardener Square Meter (m2)
Page 177
ITEM 1027 CEMENT PLASTER FINISH
1027.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all cement plaster materials, labor, tools and equipment required in
undertaking cement plaster finish as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
Manufactured materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer’s original unbroken packages or containers
which are labeled plainly with the manufacturer’s name and trademark.
1027.2.1 Cement
Portland cement shall conform with the requirements as defined in Item 700 – Hydraulic Cement.
1027.2.2 Hydrated Lime
Hydrated lime shall conform with the requirements as defined in Item 701 – Hydrated Lime.
Fine aggregates shall be clean, washed sharp river sand and free from dirt, clay, organic matter or other
deleterious substances. Sand derived from crushed gravel or stone may be used with the Engineer’s approval
but in no case shall such sand be derived from stone unsuitable for use as coarse aggregates.
1027.3.1 Mixture
a) Mortar mixture for brown coat shall be freshly prepared and uniformly mixed in the proportion by volume of
one (1) part Portland Cement, three (3) parts sand and one fourth (1/4) part hydrated lime.
b) Finish coat shall be pure Portland cement properly graded conforming to the requirements of Item 700,
Hydraulic Cement and mixed with water to approved consistency and plasticity.
Page 178
a) After removal of formworks reinforced concrete surfaces shall be roughened to improve adhesion of
cement plaster.
b) Surfaces to receive cement plaster shall be cleaned of all projections, dust, loose particles, grease and
bond breakers. Before any application of brown coat is commenced all surfaces that are to be plastered
shall be wetted thoroughly with clean water to produce a uniformly moist condition.
a) Brown coat mortar mix shall be applied with sufficient pressure starting from the lower portion of the
surface to fill the grooved and to prevent air pockets in the reinforced concrete/ masonry work and avoid
mortar mix drooping. The brown coat shall be lightly broomed/ or scratch before surface had properly set
and allowed to cure.
b) Finish coat shall not be applied until after the brown coat has seasoned for seven days and corrective
measures had been done by the Contractor on surfaces that are defective. Just before the application of
the finish coat, the brown coat surface shall be evenly moistened with potable water. Finish coat shall be
floated first to a true and even surface, then trowel in a manner that will force the mixture to penetrate into
the brown coat. Surfaces applied with finish coat shall then be smooth with paper in a circular motion to
remove trowel marks, checks and blemishes. All cement plaster finish shall be 10 mm. thick minimum, on
vertical concrete and/ or masonry walls.
Whenever indicated on the Plans to be “simulated red brick finish”, the Contractor shall render brick design on
plaster surface before brown coat had properly set and then allowed to dry. Cement plaster shall not be
applied directly to:
a) Concrete or masonry surface that had been coated with bituminous compound and,
b) Surfaces that had been painted or previously plastered.
Cement plaster finish shall be true to details and plumbed. Finish surface shall have no visible junction marks
where one (1) day’s work adjoins the other. Where directed by the Engineer or shown on the Plans vertical
and horizontal groove joints shall be 25 mm wide and 10 mm deep.
All cement plaster finish shall not be measured in square meters or part thereof for work actually completed in
the building.
The work quantified and determined as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the Contract Unit
price which price constitutes full compensation including labor, materials, tools and equipment and incidentals
necessary to complete this Item.
Page 179
1027 (a) Cement plaster finish Square Meter (m2)

1027 (b) Simulated red brick (Wall) Square Meter (m2)
ITEM 1030 ACCOUSTICAL CEILING

1030.1 Description
Page 180
ITEM 1032 PAINTING, VARNISHING AND OTHER RELATED WORKS
1032.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all paint materials, varnish and other related products, labor, tolls,
equipment and plant required in undertaking the proper application on painting, varnishing and related works
indicated on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
1032.2.1 Paint materials
All types of paint material, varnish and other related product shall be subject to random test as to material
composition by the Bureau of Research and Standard, DPWH or the National Institute of Science and
Technology. (Use the following approved and tested brand name: Boysen, Davies, Dutch Boy, Fuller O Brien,
or any approved equal).
1032.2.2 Tinting Colors
Tinting color shall be first grade quality, pigment ground in alkyd resin that disperses and mixes easily with
paint to produce the color desired. Use the same brand of paint and tinting color to effect good paint body.
1032.2.3 Concrete Neutralizer
Concrete neutralizer shall be first grade quality concentrate diluted with clean water and applied as surface
conditioner of new interior and exterior walls thus improving paint adhesion and durability.
1032.2.4 Silicon Water Repellant
Silicon water repellant shall be transparent water shield especially formulated to repel rain and moisture on
exterior masonry surfaces.
1032.2.5 Patching Compound
Patching compound shall be fine powder type material like calciumine that can be mixed into putty
consistency, with oil base primers and paints to fill minor surface dents and imperfections.
1032.2.6 Varnish
Varnish shall be homogeneous solution of resin, drying oil, drier and solvent. It shall be extremely durable
clear coating, highly resistant to wear and tear without cracking, peeling, whitening, spotting, etc. with
minimum loss of gloss for a maximum period of time.
1032.2.7 Lacquer
Lacquer shall be any type of organic coating that dries rapidly and solely by evaporation of the solvent.
Typical solvent are acetates, alcohols and ketones. Although lacquers were generally based on intrecellulose,
Page 181
manufacturers currently use, vinyl resins, plasticizers and reacted drying oils to improve adhesion and
elasticity.
1032.2.8 Shellac
Shellac shall be a solution of refined lac resin in denatured alcohol, it dries by evaporation of the alcohol. The
resin is generally furnished in orange and bleached grades.
1032.2.9 Sanding Sealer
Sanding sealer shall be quick drying lacquer, formulated to provide quick dry, good holdout of succeeding
coats, and containing sanding agents such as zinc stearate to allow dry sanding of sealer.
1032.10 Glazing Putty
Glazing putty shall be alkayd-type product for filling minor surface unevenness.
1032.2.11 Natural Wood Paste Filler
Wood paste filler shall be quality filler for filling and sealing open grain of interior wood. It shall produce a level
finish for following coats of paint varnish/lacquer and other related products.
1032.2.12 Schedule
Exterior Finishes
a) Plain cement plastered finish to be painted 3 coats Acrylic base masonry paint
b) Concrete exposed aggregate and/or tool 1 coat water repellant
finish
c) Ferrous metal 1 coat primer and 2 coats enamel paint
d) Galvanized metal 1 coat zinc chromate primer and 2 coats
Portland cement paint
e) Wood painted finish 3 coats oil based paint
f) Wood varnished finish Varnish water repellant
Interior Finishes
a) Plain cement plastered finish to be painted 3 coats Acrylic base masonry paint
b) Concrete exposed aggregate and/or tool Clean surface
finish
c) Ferrous metal 1 coat primer and 2 coats enamel paint
d) Woodwork sea-mist 3 coats of 3 parts thinner 1 part lacquer
e) Wood varnish 1st coat, of one part sanding sealer to one
part solvent 2nd coat of 2/3 sanding sealer
to 1/3 solvent.
f) Wood painted finish 3 coats of oil base paint
g) Ceiling boards textured finish 1 coat oil based paint allow to dry then
patch surfaces unevenness and apply
textured paint coat
Page 182
The Contractor prior to commencement of the painting, varnishing and related work shall examine the
surfaces to be applied in order not to jeopardize the quality and appearances of the painting varnishing and
related works.
All surfaces shall be in proper condition to receive the finish. Woodworks shall be hand-sanded smooth and
dusted clean. All knot-holes pitch pockets or sappy portions shall be sealed with natural wood filler. Nail holes,
cracks or defects shall be carefully puttied after the first coat, matching the color of paint.
Interior woodworks shall be sandpapered between coats. Cracks holes of imperfections in plaster shall be
filled with patching compound and smoothed off to match adjoining surfaces.
Concrete and masonry surfaces shall be coated with concrete neutralizer and allowed to dry before any
painting primer coat is applied. When surface is dried apply first coating. Hairline cracks and unevenness shall
be patched and sealed with approved putty or patching compound. After all defects are corrected apply the
finish coats as specified on the Plans (color scheme approved).
Metal shall be clean, dry and free from millscale and rust. Remove all grease and oils from surfaces. Wash,
unprimed galvanized metal with etching solution and allow it to dry. Where required to prime coat surface with
red lead primer same shall be approved by the Engineer.
In addition the Contractor shall undertake the following:
1. Voids, cracks, nick etc. will be repaired with proper patching material and finished flushed with
surrounding surfaces.
2. Marred or damaged shop coats on metal shall be spot primed with appropriate metal primer.
3. Painting and varnishing works shall not be commenced when it is too hot or cold.
4. Allow appropriate ventilation during application and drying period.
5. All hardware will be fitted and removed or protected prior to painting and varnishing works.
Paints when applied by brush shall become non-fluid, thick enough to lay down as adequate film of wet paint.
Brush marks shall flawed out after application of paint.
Paints made for application by roller must be similar to brushing paint. It must be non-sticky when thinned to
spraying viscosity so that it will break up easily droplets.
Paint is atomized by high pressure pumping rather than broken up by the large volume of air mixed with it.
This procedure changes the required properties of the paint.
1032.3.3 Mixing and Thinning
At the time of application paint shall show no sign of deterioration. Paint shall be thoroughly stirred, strained
and kept at a uniform consistency during application. Paints of different manufacture shall not be mixed
together. When thinning is necessary, this may be done immediately prior to application in accordance with
the manufacture’s directions, but not in excess of 1 pint of suitable thinner per gallon of the paint.
Page 183
1032.3.4 Storage
All material to be used under this item shall be stored in a single place to be designated by the Engineer and
such place shall be kept neat and clean at all time. Necessary precaution to avoid fire must be observed by
removing oily rags, waste, etc. at the end of the daily work.
1032.3.5 Cleaning
All cloths and cotton waste which constitute fire hazards shall be placed in metal containers or destroyed at
the end of daily works. Upon completion of daily work, all staging, scaffolding and paint containers shall be
removed. Paint drips, oil, or stains on adjacent surfaces shall be removed and the entire job left clean and
acceptable to the Engineer.
1032.3.6 Workmanship in General
a) All paints shall be evenly applied. Coats shall be of proper consistency and well brushed out so as to
show a minimum of brush marks.
b) All coats shall be thoroughly dry before the succeeding coat is applied.
c) Where surfaces are not fully covered or can not be satisfactorily finished in the number of coats specified
such preparatory coats and subsequent coats as may be required shall be applied to attain the desired
evenness of surface without extra cost to the owner.
d) Where surface is not in proper condition to receive the coat the Engineer shall be notified immediately.
Work on the questioned portion(s) shall not start until clearance be proceed is ordered by the Engineer.
e) Hardware, lighting fixture and other similar items shall be removed or protected during the painting
varnishing and related work operations and re-installed after completion of the work.
1032.3.7 Procedure for Sea-Mist Finish
a) Depress wood grain by steel brush and sand surface lightly.

b) Apply sanding sealer.
c) Apply two coats of industrial lacquer paint.
d) Spray last coat of industrial lacquer paint mixed with sanding sealer.
e) Apply wood paste filler thinned with turpentine or paint thinner into the wood surface.
f) Spray flat or gloss lacquer whichever is specified.
1032.3.8 Procedure for Varnish Finish
a) Sand surface thoroughly.

b) Putty all cracks and other wood imperfections with wood paste filler.
c) Apply oil stain.
d) Apply lacquer sanding.
e) Sand surface along the grain.
f) Spray three (3) coats of clear dead flat lacquer.
g) Polish surface coated using cloth pad.
h) Spray gloss lacquer or flat lacquer whichever is desired or specified.
1032.3.9 Procedure for Ducco Finish
a) Sand surface thoroughly.

b) Apply primer surface white or gray by brush or spray.
c) Apply lacquer spot putty in thin coat. Allow each coat to become thoroughly dry before applying next coat.
d) Apply primer surfaces and then allow to dry in two (2) hours before applying the next coat.
e) Apply the coat of flat tone semi-gloss enamel as per color scheme submitted and approved by the
Engineer.
Page 184
The areas of concrete, wood and metal surfaces applied with varnish, paint and other related coating
materials shall be measured in square meters as desired and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The accepted work shall be paid at the unit bid price, which price and payment constitute full compensation
for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools and other incidental necessary to complete this Item.
1032 (a) Painting works square meter (sq.m.)
1032 (b) Varnishing square meter (sq.m.)
1032 (c) Sea-mist Finish square meter (sq.m.)
1032 (d) Ducco Finish square meter (sq.m.)
1032 (e) Texture Finish square meter (sq.m.)
Page 185
ELECTRICAL
WORKS
Part E
PART E ELECTRICAL WORKS
ITEM 1100 CONDUITS, BOXES & FITTINGS
1100.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the furnishing and installation of the complete conduit work consisting of electrical
conduits; conduit boxes such as junction boxes, utility boxes, octagonal and square boxes; conduit fittings
such as couplings, locknuts and bushing and other electrical materials needed to complete the conduit
roughing-in works.
All materials shall be brand new and shall be of the approved type meeting all the requirements of the
Philippine Electrical Code and bearing the Philippine Standard Agency (PSA) mark. The electrical materials to
be used shall be of the standard products of the manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of
equipment and materials required for this project and shall be the manufacturer’s latest standard design that
complies with the specification requirements. The Contractor shall submit for approval a complete description
of all materials and equipment to be used before commencing the work. The descriptions shall include
catalogue numbers, illustrations, diagrams, dimensional data, etc., as required to describe fully the materials.
Conduits
(a) Rigid Steel Conduit shall be electrical metal tubing (EMT) conduit, hot dip galvanized, conforming
to ANSI Standard C80.1, or “American Standard Specifications for Steel Conduit, zinc coated” unless
shown otherwise in the drawings. The conduit fittings and covers shall be galvanized, threaded, or
cadmium plated, grey iron or malleable iron castings. Composite rubber gasket shall be provided in
all openings requiring covers. Outlets and pull boxes shall be of the sizes and types shown in the
Plan.
(b) Rigid PVC Conduit shall be NEMA TC2, type EPC-PVC and shall be schedule 40. Enamel
coated steel conduits and conduits with rough inner surfaces are not acceptable.
Conduit Boxes and Fittings
All conduit boxes and fittings shall be Code gauge steel and galvanized. Outlet boxes and fittings
shall be galvanized pressed steel of standard make. In general, outlet boxes shall be at least 100
mm. square or octagonal, 53 mm. deep and 16 mm. minimum gauge.
1100.3 Construction Requirement
Page 186
All works throughout shall be executed in the best practice in a workmanlike manner by qualified and
experienced electricians under the immediate supervision of a duly licensed Electrical Engineer.
Conduits
Conduits should be cut square with hacksaw and ends reamed. Running or non-tapered threads
shall not be used. Each run of conduit between boxes or equipment shall be electrically continuous.
Threads shall conform to the American Standard for tapered pipe threads. In making bends only
conduit bending apparatus will be used. The use of a pipe tee or vise for bending conduits shall not
be permitted. Conduits entering slip holes in boxes shall be secured with a locknut on each side of
the box wall and terminated with a bushing.
All joints between lengths of conduits and threaded connections to boxes, fittings and equipment
enclosures shall be made watertight. Conduits shall be sloped towards drain points. Conduits shall
be rigidly supported and braced to avoid shifting during placement of concrete. Conduits extending
out of floors, walls, or beams shall be at right angles to the surfaces.
Spacing of conduits shall be such as to permit the flow of concrete between them. A minimum
spacing of not less than 5 cm. shall be maintained, except where conduits enter boxes. Where
conduits are placed in two or more layers or rows, the conduits in the upper or inner layers shall be
placed directly over or behind the lower or outer layers, respectively.
Conduits terminating at the face of concrete for initial or future extensions as exposed runs shall be
terminated with plugged couplings set flush with the floor, ceilings or wall. Galvanized iron plugs shall
be provided for conduits, which are to be extended in the future. Where it is not practical to employ
flush couplings, the conduit ends shall be suitably boxed or otherwise protected and plugged.
Conduits running in floors and terminating at motors or other equipment mounted on concrete bases
shall be brought up to the equipment within the concrete base wherever possible. Conduit boxes
shall be flush with the finished wall with covers and openings easily accessible. The Contractor shall
remove and reset all boxes not properly installed or shifted out of line during concreting to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
Conduit Boxes & Fittings
Each outlet in the drawing or raceway system shall be provided with an outlet box to suit the
conditions encountered. Boxes for exposed work or in wet locations shall be of the cast metal type
having threaded hubs. Boxes for concealed work shall be the cadmium-plated or zinc-coated sheet
metal type. Each box shall have sufficient volume to accommodate the number of conductors
entering the box.. Boxes shall not be less than 50 mm deep unless shallower boxes are required by
structural conditions that are specifically approved by the Engineer. Ceiling and bracket outlet boxes
shall not be less than 100 mm octagonal except that smaller boxes may be used where required by
the particular fixtures to be installed. Switch and receptacle boxes shall be approximately 100 mm x
50 mm x 50 mm. Telephone outlets shall be 100 mm square except that 100 mm x 54 mm x 40 mm
boxes may be used where only one raceway enter the outlet. Boxes installed in concealed locations
shall be set flush with the finished surfaces and shall be provided with the proper extension rings or
plaster covers where required. Boxes shall be installed in a rigid and satisfactory manner and shall
be supported by bar hangers in frame construction, or shall be fastened directly with wood screws on
wood. Location of outlets shown on the drawings are approximates; the Contractor shall study the
building plans in relation to the spaces and equipment surrounding each outlet so that the lighting
fixtures are symmetrically located according to the room layout. When necessary, with the approval
of the Consultant, outlets shall be relocated to avoid interference with mechanical equipment or
structural features.
Page 187
Conduit Boxes & Fittings
Provide conduit boxes for pulling and splicing wires and outlet boxes for installation of wiring devices.
As a rule, provide junction boxes or pull boxes in all runs greater than 30 meters in length, for
horizontal runs. For other lengths, provide boxes as required for splices or pulling. Pull boxes shall
be installed in conspicuous but accessible locations.
Support boxes independently of conduits entering by means of bolts, red hangers or other suitable
means.
Conduit boxes shall be installed plumb and securely fastened. They shall be set flush with the
surface of the structure in which they are installed where conduits are run concealed.
All convenience and wall switch outlet boxes for concealed conduit work shall be deep, rectangular
flush type boxes. Four inch octagonal flush type boxes shall be used for all ceiling light outlets and
shall be of the deep type where three or more conduits connect to a single box
Floor mounted outlet boxes required shall be waterproof type with flush brass floor plate and brass
bell nozzle.
All boxes shall be painted with anti-rust red lead paint after installation. All conduits shall be fitted
with approved standard galvanized bushing and locknuts where they enter cabinets and conduit
boxes.
Junction and pull boxes of code gauge steel shall be provided as indicated or as required to facilitate
the pulling of wires and cables.
The work under this Item are inclusive in Item 1101 (Wires and Wiring Devices) and shall be measured either
by lengths, pieces, pairs, lot and actually placed and installed as shown on the Plans.
1100.6 General Specifications
The work to be done under this division of specifications consist of the fabrication, furnishing, delivery and
installation, complete in all details of the electrical work, at the subject premises and all work materials
incidental to the proper completion of the installation, except those portions of the work which are expressly
stated to be done by other fields. All works shall be done in accordance with the rules and regulations and
with the specifications.
1100.7 Specifications on:
1. Lightning Fixtures and Lamp
All lightning fixtures and lamps of type and sizes as specified and listed on the Lighting Fixture
Schedule and shall be furnished and installed complete. Incandescent lamps shall be inside frosted
lamp, 230 volts, and wattage as indicated. All Fluorescent lamps shall be 40 watt, pre-heat type,
rapid start, cool white color characteristics and shall have complete high frequency electronic ballast,
230 volt.
Fixtures are designated by letters and illustrations shall be indicative of the general type desired and
shall not restrict selection to fixtures of any particular manufacturer. Fixtures of similar design and
equivalent light distribution and brightness characteristics having equal finish and quality may be
acceptable but subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2. Material Requirements
Page 188
All materials to be used shall conform to the BPS specification
3. Construction Requirements
All grounding system installation shall be executed in accordance with the approved plans.
Grounding system shall include building perimeter ground wires, ground rods, clamps, connectors,
ground wells and ground wire taps as shown in the approved design.
1100.8 Auxiliary Systems
All auxiliary systems such as telephone and intercom system, time clock system, fire alarm system and public
address/paging system installations shall be done in accordance with the approved design.
All materials to be used shall conform to the Bureau of Product Standards (BPS) specifications.
1100.9 Important requirement regarding supervision of the work and submission of certificate of completion.
All wiring installation herein shall be done under the direct supervision of a licensed Electrical Engineer at the
expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit the request for the Clearance to Proceed duly
approved by the owner’s representative.
1100.10 Test and Guarantee
Upon completion of the electrical construction work, the Contractor shall provide all test equipment and
personnel and to submit written copies of all test results. The Contractor shall guarantee the electrical
installation are done and in accordance with the approved Plans and specification. The Contractor shall
guarantee that the electrical system are free from all grounds from all defective workmanship and materials
and will remain so for a period of one year from date and acceptance of works. Any defect shall be remedied
by the Contractor at his own expense.
ITEM 1101 WIRES AND WIRING DEVICES
1101.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the furnishing and installation of all wires and wiring devices consisting of electrical
wires and cables, wall switches, convenience receptacles, heavy duty receptacles and other devices shown
on the approved Plans but not mentioned in this Specification.
Wires and cables shall be of the approved type meeting all the requirements of the Philippine Electrical Code
and bearing the PSA mark unless specified or indicated otherwise, all power and lighting conductor shall be
insulated for 600 Volts. All wires shall be copper, soft drawn and annealed, smooth and cylindrical form and
shall be centrally located inside the insulation. All wiring devices shall be standard product of reputable
electrical manufacturers. Wall switches shall be rated at least 10A, 250 Volts and shall be spring operated,
flush, tumbler type. Duplex convenience receptacles shall be rated at least 15A, 250 Volts, flush, parallel slot
single heavy duty receptacles shall be rated at least 20 A, 250 Volts, wire, flush, polarize type.
Conductors in conduits shall be moisture and heat-resistant rubber or thermoplastic insulated. In dry
locations, wires and cables shall be type THW for sizes 8 mm. and smaller and type THW or THHN for sizes
14 sq. mm. and larger. In damp or wet locations as defined by the Philippine Electric Code, wires and cables
shall be type THW. All conductors shall have 600 volts insulation unless otherwise specified in the drawings.
Wire shall be stranded copper for 5.5 mm. diameter and larger sizes. Wires for the telephone and signaling
Page 189
systems shall be twisted telephone wires, thermoplastic insulated. The number and sizes shall be as specified
in the drawings.
Conductors of wires shall not be drawn in conduit until after the cement plaster is dry and the conduits are
thoroughly cleaned and free from dirt and moisture. In drawing wires into conduits, sufficient slack shall be
allowed to permit easy connection for fixtures, switches, receptacles and other wiring devices without the use
of additional splice:
All conductors of convenience outlets and lighting branch circuit home runs shall be wired with a minimum of
3.5 mm. in size. Circuit homeruns to panel boards shall not be smaller than 3.5 mm. but a homerun to panel
board more than 30 meters shall not be smaller than 5.5 mm. No conductor shall be less than 2 mm. in size.
All wires of 14 mm. and larger in size shall be connected to panel and apparatus by means of approved type
lugs or connectors of the solderless type, sufficiently large enough to enclose all strands of the conductors
and securely fasten. They shall not loosen under vibration of normal strain.
All joints, taps and splices on wires larger than 14 mm. shall be made of suitable solderless connectors of the
approved type and size. They shall be taped with rubber and PVC tapes providing insulation no less than that
of the conductors.
No splices or joints shall be permitted in either feeder or branch conductors except within outlet boxes or
accessible junction boxes (pull boxes). All joints in branch circuit wiring shall be made mechanically and
electrically secured by approved splicing devices taped with rubber and PVC tapes in a manner which will
make their insulation as that of the conductor.
All wall switches and receptacle shall be fitted with standard bakelite face plate covers. Device plate for flush
mounting shall be installed with all four edges in continuous contract finished wall surfaces without the use of
coiled wire or similar devices. Plaster fillings will not be permitted. Plate installed in wet locations shall be
gasketed.
When more than one switch or device is indicated in a single location gang plate shall be used.
1101.3.1 Quality Assurance Provisions
All installation shall be completed on or before final acceptance of the project including the tests and
commissioning. Equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of this
specification. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments, tools and personnel required for the tests. As an
exception to requirements that may be stated elsewhere in the contract agreement, the Engineer shall be
given five (5) working days notice prior to each test. All defects disclosed as a result of such test that are due
to the Contractor and shall be remedied to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(a) Devices subject to Manual Operation
Each device subject to manual operation shall be tested five (5) times demonstrating satisfactory
operation each time.
(b) Test on 600 Volts Wiring
Test of all 600 volts wiring to verify that no circuits or accidental grounds exist. Perform insulation resistance
test on all wiring using an instrument which apply a voltage of approximately 500 volts to provide a direct
reading of resistance; minimum resistance shall be 250,000 ohms that the resistance to ground is not
excessive. Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before making any connections to the rod, then tie
Page 190
entire grounding system together and test for resistance to ground. Make resistance measurements in
normally dry weather condition, not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Submit written results of each test to the
Engineer and indicate the locations of the rod as well as the resistance and soil conditions at the time of the
measurements were made.
The work under this Item shall be measured either by meters, rolls, pieces, set, actually placed and installed
as shown on the Plans.
All work performed and measured and as provided for in his Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the Unit Bid
or contract unit price which payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools and
incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
1101 (1) Electric wire (size), conduits with

Fittings meter
1101 (2) Single pole tumbler switch set
1101 (3) Two-gang Tumbler switch set
1101 (4) Three-gang Tumbler switch set
1101 (5) Three-way tumbler switch set
1101 (6) Duplex convenience outlet set
1101 (7) Heavy duty convenience receptacle set
1101 (8) Standard Telephone outlet
Bakelite cover set
1101 (9) Window type air conditioning
Outlet 3-prong polarized type set
1101 (10) Bare copper wire meters
1101 (11) Grounding clamp for electric wire pieces
1101 (12) Messenger wire meters
1101 (13) Guy wire meters
1101 (14) Vibrating bell set
1101 (15) Traffic Light Control Panel set
1101 (16) Traffic Light metal enclosures
Complete with red & green light
Provided with reflectors &
152 mm diameter vibrating bell set
1101 (17) Service entrance assembly with
Reinforced concrete Pedestal pole
With anchor bolt set
1101 (18) Meter base assembly exposed rigid
RCP with weather cap
& grounding rod copperweld
20 mm. diameter x 3 m. set
1101 (19) Apitong or approved equal Creosoted
wood pole of std. length
with anchor rod & log set
Page 191
ITEM 1102 POWER LOAD CENTER, SWITCHGEAR AND PANELBOARDS
1102.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the furnishing and installation of the power load center unit substation or low voltage
switchgear and distribution panelboards at the location shown or the approved Plans complete with
transformer, circuit breakers, cabinets and all accessories, completely wired and ready for service.
All materials shall be brand new and shall be of the approved type. It shall conform with the requirements of
the Philippine Electrical Code and shall bear the Philippine Standard Agency (PSA) mark.
Power Load Center Unit Substation
The Contractor shall furnish and install as indoor-type Power Load center Unit Substation at the
location shown on the approved Plans if required. It shall be totally metal-enclosed, dead front and
shall consist of the following coordinated component parts:
High Voltage primary Section
High voltage primary incoming line section consisting of the following parts and related accessories:
e) One (1) Air-filled interrupter Switch, 2-position (open-close) installed in a suitable air filled metal
enclosure and shall have sufficient interrupting capacity to carry the electrical load. It shall be
provided with key interlock with the cubicle for the power fuses to prevent access to the fuses
unless the switch is open.
f) Three (3) power fuses mounted in separate compartments within the switch housing and
accessible by a hinged door.
g) One (1) set of high voltage potheads or 3-conductor cables or three single conductor cables.
h) Lighting arresters shall be installed at the high voltage cubicle if required.
Items (a) and (b) above could be substituted with a power circuit breaker with the correct rating and
capacity.
Transformer Section
The transformer section shall consist of a power transformer with ratings and capacities as shown on
the Plans. It shall be oil liquid-filled non-flammable type and designed in accordance with the latest
applicable standards.
The transformers shall be provided with four (4 approximately 2 ½ % rated KVA taps on the primary
windings in most cases one (1) above and three (3) below rated primary voltage and shall be
changed by means of externally gang-operated manual tap changer only when the transformer is de-
energized. Tap changing under load is acceptable if transformer has been so designed.
The following accessories shall be provided with the transformer, namely: drain pad, top filter press
connection, lifting lugs, diagrammatic nameplate, relief valve, thermometer and other necessary
related accessories.
The high voltage and low voltage bushings and transition flange shall be properly coordinated for
field connection to the incoming line section and low voltage switchboard section, respectively.
Page 192
Low-Voltage Switchboard Section
The low-voltage switchboard shall be standard modular-unitized units, metal-built, dead front, safety
type construction and shall consist of the following:
e) Switchboard Housing
The housing shall be heavy gauge steel sheet, dead front type, gray enamel finish, complete with
frame supports, steel bracings, steel sheet panelboard, removable rear plates, copper busbars, and
all other necessary accessories to ensure sufficient mechanical strength and safety. It shall be
provided with grounding bolts and clamps.
f) Secondary Metering Section

The secondary metering section shall consist of one (1) ammeter, AC, Indicating type; one voltmeter,
AC, Indicating Type, one (1) ammeter transfer switch for 3-phase; one (1) voltmeter transfer switch
for 3-phase; and current transformers of suitable rating and capacity.
The abovementioned instruments shall be installed in one compartment above the main breaker and
shall be complete with all necessary accessories completely wired, ready for use.
g) Main Circuit Breaker

The main circuit breaker shall be draw-out type, manually or electrically operated, manual trip
bottom, magnetic tripping devices, adjustable time overcurrent protection and instantaneous short
circuit trip and all necessary accessories to ensure safe and efficient operation.
h) Feeder Circuit Breakers

There shall be as many feeder breakers as are shown on the single line diagram or schematic riser
diagram and schedule of loads and computations on the Plans. The circuit breaker shall be drawn
out or molded case as required. The circuit breakers shall each have sufficient interrupting capacity
and shall be manually operated complete with trip devices and all necessary accessories to insure
safe and efficient operation. The number, ratings, capacities of the feeder branch circuit breakers
shall be shown on the approved Plans.
Circuit breakers shall each be of the indicating type, providing “ON” – “OFF” and “TRIP” positions of
the operating handles and shall each be provided with nameplate for branch circuit designation. The
circuit breaker shall be so designed that an overload or short on one pole automatically causes all
poles to open.
Low-Voltage Switchgear (For projects requiring low-voltage Switchgear only)
The Contractor shall furnish and install a low-voltage switchgear at the location shown on the Plans.
It shall be metal-clad, dead front, free standing, safety type construction and shall have copper
busbars of sufficient size, braced to resist allowable Root Mean Square (RMS) symmetrical short
circuit stresses, and all necessary accessories.
The low-voltage switchgear shall consist of the switchgear housing, secondary metering, main
breaker and feeder branch circuit breakers and all necessary accessories, completely wired, ready
for service.
Grounding System
All non-current carrying metallic parts like conduits, cabinets and equipment frames shall be properly
grounded in accordance with the Philippine Electrical Code, latest edition.
Page 193
The size of the ground rods and ground wires shall be as shown on the approved Plans. The ground
resistance shall not be more than 5 ohms.
Panelboards and cabinets

Panelboards shall conform to the schedule of panelboards as shown on the approved Plans with
respect to supply characteristics, rating of main lugs or main circuit breaker, number and ratings and
capabilities of branch circuit breakers.
Panelboards shall consist of a factory completed dead front assembly mounted in an inclosing flush
type cabinet consisting of code gauge 14 (2.0 mm thick) galvanized sheet steel box with trim and
door. Each door shall be provided with catch lock and two (2) keys. Panelboards shall be provided
with directories and shall be printed to indicate load served by each circuit.
Panelboard cabinets and trims shall be suitable for the type of mounting shown on the approved
Plans. The inside and outside of panelboard cabinets and trims shall be factory painted with one
rust-proofing primer coat and two finish shop coats of pearl gray enamel paint.
Main and branch circuit breakers for panelboards shall have the rating, capacity and number of poles
as shown on the approved Plans. Breakers shall be thermal magnetic type. Multiple breaker shall be
of the common trip type having a single operating handle. For 50-ampere breaker or less, it may
consist of single-pole breaker permanently assembled at the factory into a multi-pole unit.
The Contractor shall install the Power Load center Unit Substation or Low-Voltage Switchgear and
panelboards at the locations shown on the approved Plans.
Standard panels and cabinets shall be used and assembled on the job. All panels shall be of dead front
construction furnished with trims for flush or surface mounting as required.
The work under this Item shall be measured either by set and pieces actually placed and installed as shown
on the approved Plans.
All works performed and measured and as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for the Unit Bid or
Contract Unit Price which payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools and
1102 (1) Panelboard (circuit breaker type) set

1102 (2) Panelboard (Safety Switch type) set
1102 (3) Low-Voltage Switchgear (LVS)
Complete with metering devices
And accessories set
1102 (4) Power Fuses pieces
1102 (5) Lighting Arrester pieces
1102 (6) Air Break Switch set
Page 194
1102 (7) Enclosed ACB NEMA Type I set

1102 (8) Enclosed ACB NEMA Type 3R set
1102 (9) Automatic Transfer Switch set
1102 (10) Manual Transfer Switch w/out fuses pieces
1102 (11) Motor Controller set
Page 195
MECHANICAL
WORKS
Part F
PART F MECHANICAL WORKS
ITEM 1200 – AIR CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
1200.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and installation of air conditioning, refrigeration and ventilation systems,
inclusive of necessary electrical connections, ductworks, grilles, pipes and condensate drains and all other
necessary accessories, ready for service in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
The types, sizes, capacities, quantities and power characteristics of the compressor, evaporator, condenser
chilled water pump and condenser water pump shall be as specified or as shown on the Plans.
1200.2.1 Refrigerant Pipes
Refrigerant pipes shall be copper tubing, type L or K or black steel pipe Schedule 40 for size of 100 diameter
and smaller. Pipes over 100 mm. shall be black steel pipe Schedule 40.
Black steel pipe shall be standard seamless lap-welded or electric resistant welded for size 50 mm. diameter
and larger, screw type for size 38 mm. diameter and smaller, fittings for cooper tubing shall be cast bronze
fitting designed expressly for brazing.
1200.2.2 Pipes for Cooling Water
Chilled and condenser cooling water pipes shall be black steel pipe Schedule 40. Pipes and fitting for size 50
mm. diameter and smaller shall be screwed type. Pipes and fittings for size 62 mm. diameter and larger shall
be welded or flanged type.
1200.2.3 Pipe Insulations
Insulations shall be preformed fiberglass or its equivalent. The insulating materials shall be covered with 100
mm. x 13 mm. thick polythelene film which shall be overlapped not less than 50 mm. Pipe insulations shall
be adequately protected at point of support by means of suitable metal shield to avoid damage from
compression. Insulated pipes, valves and fittings located outdoors shall be provided by metal jackets.
1200.2.4 Ductworks
Ducts shall be galvanized sheet of not less than the following gauges.
1. No. 26 for 300 mm. wide and smaller
Page 196
2. No. 24 for 350 mm. to 750 mm. wide

5. No. 18 for 2275 mm. to 2500 mm. or larger
6. For aluminum sheets use one gauge higher.
Joints and stiffeners of ducts using slip joints shall be as follows:
a. 300 mm. wide and smaller; without bracing

b. 325 mm. to 750 mm. wide, brace with 25 mm x 25 mm x 3 mm steel angles
c. 775 mm to 1500 mm, brace with 31mm x 31 mm x 3 mm steel angles
d. 1525 mm up, brace with 38 mm x 38 mm x 3 mm steel angles
Stiffeners shall be located not more than 1200 mm from each joint.
1200.2.5 Ductwork Insulation
The application insulation materials shall be rigid board made of styropor or equivalent 25 mm thick for ground
and top floor, 13 mm thick for intermediate floor.
Galvanized metal bands for ducts shall be secured and spaced 300 mm minimum center to center and
corners shall be protected with galvanized metal angles.
1200.2.6 Diffusers
The type, shape, capacity size and location shall be as shown in the Plans. Diffusers shall be complete with
frame and gasket, equalizing deflector and volume control as indicated or specified and shall have factory-
applied prime coat of paint.
Samples of supply and return air diffusers shall be submitted for approval before mass fabrication and
installation.
1200.2.7 Dampers
Dampers shall be of same materials as duct, at least one gage heavier and shall have accessible location,
complete with locking device for adjusting and locking damper in position.
Where necessary, splitters, butterflies and louvers damper deflecting vanes for control of air volume and
direction and for balancing the system shall be provided whether or not they are indicated on the Plans.
1200.2.8 Fire Damper
Main duct shall be provided with proper fire dampers of the fusible link actuated type. Access door shall be
provided in ductwork for renewal of fusible link and to reset damper.
1200.2.9 Equivalent Foundation
Foundation shall be provided and shall conform to the recommendation of the manufacturer of the equipment.
Equipment shall be leveled on foundation by means of jacks or steel wedges. All spaces between equipment
bases and concrete foundation shall be filled cement mortar.
Page 197
1200.2.10 Electrical Works
Power supply shall be provided by the Contractor at the pull installed inside the machine room and shall
furnish and install the circuit breaker and starter with suitable ratings and capacities, conduits, wirings, fittings,
devices and all other equipment and electrical connections needed to complete the electrical installation of the
system. All electrical works shall comply with the latest edition of the Philippine Electrical Code with the
applicable ordinance of the local government and all the rules and requirements of the local power company.
The air conditioning system shall be entirely automatic in operation and shall not require the presence of an
attendant except for period inspection for lubrication. All equipment and materials shall be inspected upon the
delivery and shall be tested after installation. Piping shall not be buried, concealed, or insulated until it has
been inspected, tested are approved. Walls, floors and other parts of the building and equipment damaged by
Contractor in the execution of the work shall be replaced as shown as the Plans.
1200.3.1 Operating Tests
Refrigerating equipment shall be tested for 8-hours per day for three (3) consecutive days as longer when so
directed, under the supervisions of manufacturer’s qualified and authorized representative who will make
necessary adjustments and instruct designated plant operating personnel for each operation and
maintenance of refrigerating equipment and controls.
Operating test of complete air conditioning system shall be 6-hours minimum for each system. Tests of air
flow, temperature and humidity shall be made to demonstrate that each complies with the requirements of
the plans and specification.
1200.3.2 Guarantee and Service
All equipment, materials and workmanship shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of
completion at anytime within the period of guarantee and upon notification the Contractor shall repair and
rectify the deficiencies, including replacement of parts or entire units.
1200.3.3 Miscellaneous
The owner shall be provided with three (3) bound copies “AS-BUILT” diagrams, shop drawings, part lists,
serial number and inventory of equipment including manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals.
All standard tools and equipment shall be furnished for proper and regular maintenance of installed
equipment.
The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, piece, length, square meter actually placed and
installed as shown on the Plans.
Compressor, condenser and evaporator shall be measured by set, grilles, diffusers and valve by piece, pipe
by length, duct and insulation by square meter.
Page 198
All works performed and measured and as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the Unit Bid
or Contract Unit Price which payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools and
1200 (a) Compressor, condenser and evaporator Set

1200 (b) Diffuser, Grilles and valves Piece
1200 (c) Pipe Length
1200 (d) Duct and Installation Square meter
1200 (e) Pipe Insulation meter
Page 199
ITEM 1201 - WATER PUMPING SYSTEM
1201.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installation of water pumping system, inclusive of all pipings and pipe
connections, valve, controls, electrical wirings, tanks and all accessories ready for service in accordance with
the approved plans and specifications.
1201.2.1 Water Pump
The type, size, capacity, location, quantify and power characteristics shall be as specified or as shown on the
Plans.
1201.2.2 Overhead Tank
The tank shall be provided with manhole, cover, drain pipes, distribution pipe outlet, overflow pipes and air
vent. Suitable float switch or electrode shall be provided in the tank to stop and start the operation of the
pump.
1201.2.3 Pneumatic Tank
Tank shall be designed for twice the maximum total dynamic pressure required and shall have the following
accessories.
a) A suitable pressure switch to stop pump if pressure required is attained.

b) Air volume control device to maintain correct air volume inside the tank.
c) Electrode to be connected in the motor pump control to control the water level.
d) Air compressor shall be provided for tank of 3,785 liters to maintain air pressure inside the tank.
1201.2.4 Air Compressor
The air compressor shall be electric motor driven with sufficient capacity. The compressor shall be V-belt
driven and both motor and compressor shall have V-sheaves on the flywheels. The compressor and motor
shall be mounted on a base of structural steel with anchor clips drilled to permit securing to a foundation.
1201.2.5 Pipes and Fittings
All pipes and fittings shall be G.I. pipe Schedule 40. All pipings 100 mm and larger shall be welded or flanged
while smaller sizes shall screwed.
1201.2.6 Valves
A gate valve followed by a check valve shall be placed between discharge of pump and tank to prevent back
flow of water when pump stops.
1201.2.7 Foundation
Refer to sub-section 1200.2.9 – Air Conditioning System.
1201.2.8 Electrical Works
Page 200
Refer to sub-section 1200.2.10 – Air Conditioning System
Exposed pipings shall be provided with concrete saddle or steel clamps or hangers to secure them firmly to
the building structures. Pipe treads shall be lubricated by white lead, red lead, Teflon or other approved
lubrication before tightening. Piping support shall be placed at 3 meters interval or less.
1201.3.1 Test
Appropriate test shall be done to demonstrate that the system complies with the requirements of the Plans
and specifications.
1201.3.2 Guarantee and Service
1201.3.3 Miscellaneous
The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, length and piece actually placed and installed as
indicated on the Plans. Equipment shall be measured by set, pipes by length, valves and fittings including
pipes by length.
All work performed and measured and as provided for in this Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the unit bid
or Contract Unit Price which payment shall constitute full compensation including all materials, labor
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.

1201 (a) Pump (hp) Sets
1201 (b) Water Tank (including roughing-ins and fittings) Lump sum
1201 (c) Air compressor (including connections and Set
fittings)
1201 (e) Pipe (size) (including connections, gate valves Length
and fitting)
Page 201
ITEM 1204 - WELL WATER SYSTEM
1204.1 Description
This Item shall consists of performing works in furnishing, drilling installing piping materials, mechanical
devices, testing and commissioning necessary to complete the well water system, and other related works in
accordance with this specification and as shown in the Plan.
1204.1.1 Applicable Specifications and Standards
The latest edition of the specifications and standards shall form part of this specification. In case of difference
between the referenced specifications or standards and this specification or its accompanying drawings, this
specification and accompanying drawings shall govern to the extent of such difference, otherwise, the
referenced specifications and standards such as ASTM, ANSI and AWWA shall apply.
1204.1.2 Geologic Mapping and Water Point Inventory
Geologic mapping and water point inventory will be conducted at and within 1-km radius of the proposed
facility. This will be done at a scale of 1:10,000 or larger. Watercourses and creeks will also be identified and
mapped to determine the general water flow in the area. Springs will also be identified to determine the
intersection and elevation of the shallow groundwater table.
1204.1.3 Georesistivity Survey
At least two (2) vertical electrical soundings (VES) shall be conducted to determine the presence of potential
water bearing layer in the area. The depth of penetration of the VES should be at least 100 meters. This
exploration method will be used in conjunction with the results of geologic mapping and water point inventory.
1204.4.1.5 Strata Sampling
Strata samples shall be taken at one (1) meter intervals or more, if the penetrated formation changes.
Samples shall be placed in plastic or other appropriate bags in which the sampling depth and the date of
sampling is written in such a manner that it is permanently readable. The sampling procedure must provide
that all the fractions of the penetrated strata are present in the sample. Each sample shall be place in a
wooden box with space for storage and the sampling depth shall be written on the box. A record of samples
taken with the details described above shall be submitted to the Engineer in daily basis. The failure on the
part of the Contractor to obtain, preserve and deliver the samples of records, satisfactory to the Engineer,
shall be considered as actual damages. Such failure shall authorize the Engineer to retain any money due to
the Contractor as liquidated damages for each sample that the Contractor shall fail to obtain, preserve or
deliver, or for each length of pipe not properly measured and recorded. In the event that such failure of the
Contractor to take and preserve the samples, affect the proper design of the well, the Contractor shall be
required to remedy the work to the satisfaction of the Engineer. It is understood that the liquidated damages to
be collected are fixed and not by way of penalty.
1204.1.6 Well Drilling
Well drilling shall be conducted at the location identified by the Hydrogeologist of the Contractor based on the
results of geologic mapping, water point inventory and georesistivity survey. The location should also take into
consideration the layout of the disposal facility and the available area for the facility.
The Contractor shall provide and operate one or more mobile drilling units required to complete the work
within the contract period including all auxiliary equipment, lubricants, fuels and spares to keep the drilling rigs
Page 202
in continuous operation. Also, the work includes furnishing and installing well water system and
appurtenances, mechanical devices, piping, and miscellaneous devices as shown in the Plan and as specified
herein.
1204.2.1 Drilling Method
Bentonite, if used shall be of premium quality in accordance with API standard with 150 kg/cu.m. of make-up
water yielding a mud with a viscosity of between 35 and 40 seconds using a marsh funnel and mud weight of
less than 1.10 kg/ 1 (9.2lbs./US gal.) make-up water shall be treated with caustic soda (soda ash) to maintain
the pH between 8.0 and 9.0 prior to mixing mud. During drilling with mud, the Contractor shall perform hourly
measurements of the following mud characteristics;
(a) pH valve
(b) Funnel viscosity
(c) Specific gravity
(d) Sand content
(e) Filtration loss
(f) Filter cake thickness
The recorded mud characteristics shall not exceed the following values, without the prior approval of the
Engineer;
(a) Specific gravity – 9.5 lb./gal.

(d) Sand content – 4%
(e) Filtration loss – 10 ml.
(f) Filter cake thickness – 1.5 mm.
All work from the start of drilling of the borehole until completion of the well development shall, if the rotary
drilling method is applied, be on a twenty four (24) hour basis.
1204.2.1.2 Geophysical Logging
The Contractor shall perform geophysical logging in accordance with the Plan and specifications or as
directed by the Engineer. The geophysical logs may be recorded either by automatic recording on a chart strip
or by manual reading of recorded values. In case the logs are recorded by a manual method, readings shall
be submitted to the Engineer immediately upon completion of logging plots of recorded characteristics versus
depth for his approval. In case of disapproval by the Engineer, the logs shall be repeated immediately.
Geophysical logging shall comprise the following;
(a) Caliper log

(b) Resistivity log (16” and 64”)
(c) Gamma ray log
(d) Self-potential log (SP)
1204.2.1.3 Well Casing
The Contractor shall provide and install the well casing specified in the Plan and any temporary casing
required during the work.
Temporary Casing
The Contractor shall provide such temporary casing as may be necessary to prevent the collapse of
any formation during the drilling operation to allow the well to sink to the specified depth and to allow
Page 203
the insertion of permanent lining material. The Contractor shall provide the temporary casing before
completing the well, unless otherwise specified in this document.
Well Casing
All permanent casing materials shall be seamless and of new stock, subject to the approval by the
Engineer as to type of material, internal and external diameter, wall thickness and method of joints
connection. The contractor shall assume full responsibility for any casing failure and shall correct
any casing failure with better material complying with the specification as approved by the Engineer.
(3) Lining Installation
Lining materials shall be assembled and located in the well at the required depth in a continuous
operation. The lining material shall be set concentric within the borehole by centralizing bars unless
otherwise agreed with the Engineer. If the lining jams before it is set to the specific depth, the
Contractor shall endeavor to remove the lining material from the well or, if unable to affect removal,
shall re-drill the well and replace the lining material. The Contractor shall provide as necessary the
following accessories to set the lining material to the required depth;
Centralizer to be affixed to the lining material at interval of 10 meter to locate lining material
in the center of the drill hole;
Supporting clamp;
Reducing cones and connecting pieces;
Casing hangers;
All other necessary equipments; and
Testing for Plumbness and Alignment.
All boreholes shall be constructed, plumb-tested if true to the line as defined herein. To demonstrate
the compliance of the work with this requirement, the Contractor shall provide the detailed drawings
and the description of the tests. The test shall be made available after the complete construction of
the well and before its acceptance. Additional test, however, may be made during the performance of
the work. Should the results of the tests for plumbness and alignment show that the plumb bob of
dummy fails to move freely throughout the length of the lining or borehole to a depth of the lowest
anticipated pump setting and should the well vary from the vertical in excess of two-thirds (2/3) of the
well being tested or beyond the limitation of this test, the plumbness and alignment of the well shall
be corrected by the Contractor. Should it fail to correct such faulty alignment or plumbness, the
Engineer may refuse to accept the well and the Contractor shall drill a new well acceptable to the
Engineer.
1204.2.1.4 Well Screens
(1) General Responsibility
The Contractor shall provide and install the well screens unless otherwise specified in the Plan. The
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any malfunction of the screen caused by the
inadequate procedure and shall undertake any correction as approved by the Engineer. The screen
must have alignment at any of its joints after installation. Otherwise, if requested by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall submit for approval the design and method of construction and shall replace the
screen with material complying with the specifications.
(2) Material Requirement
The type of screen shall be low carbon steel, continuous slot wedge wire wound with slot size 1.5
mm (slot 60), 3 meters length per piece and of new stock. Slotted screens shall be fabricated as to
Page 204
ensure the maximum yield of the well and to prevent clogging and incrustation, and shall be free
from jagged edges and irregularities that may accelerate clogging and corrosion. The screen shall
have adequate strength to resist the external forces that may be applied during and after installation.
All fittings, packers, couplings, joints, plug and seal used during installation of well screen together
with the installation procedure, shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
1204.2.1.5 Formation Stabilizer/ Gravel Pack
The formation stabilizer/ gravel pack materials shall consist of well rounded, water-worn siliceous
grains in accordance with the Grading C requirements as stated in Subsection 311.2. (Coarse
Aggregate).
(1) Method of Installation
The method of placing the formation stabilizer/ gravel pack in the annulus shall be such that
separation of the gravel and bridging is avoided. The formation shall immediately upon completion of
the lining installation, be placed in the annulus between the borehole and the lining, in the screened
section(s) of the lining as specified in the final well design. If the borehole is drilled by the rotary
method, installation of formation stabilizer/ gravel pack shall be done by circulation of the drilling
mud.
1204.3.1 Well Development
(1) General
The Contractor shall furnish compressors, surge plungers, jetting tolls, electric generator, chemicals
and any other equipment required for satisfactory well development. The well development if the
Percussion Drilling Method is applied, comprise of surging with plunger and development by airlifting.
If the Rotary Method is applied, comprise deflocculation, high velocity jetting in continuous slot
screens, surging with plunger in slotted screens and development by airlifting.
(2) Expected Yield
The contractor shall develop the well to its maximum expected yield of seven (7) liters per second.
(3) Surging with Plunger
Upon completion of installation of lining of formation stabilizer/ gravel pack, the Contractor shall
development the well by mechanical surging with a valve-type surge plunger. Before start of surging
and with one (1) hour intervals during the surging operation, the depth of the well bottom and the top
of the gravel pack shall be recorded. Surging shall be continued until accumulation of sediments in
the slump pipe is negligible during a one (1) period surging operation.
(4) Deflocculation (applicable for Rotary Method only)
Upon completion of installation of lining of formation stabilizer/ gravel pack, the drilling mud shall
immediately be displaced from the well by pumping clean water into the slump pipe. Mud
displacement shall immediately be followed by injection or jetting through the screened sections with
a polyphosphate solution to deflocculate the mud cake on the borehole well. The concentration of the
polyphosphate solution shall be 3% by weight of the quantity of the water in the borehole. The well
shall then be left for 12 – 24 hours before developing is continued, to allow the polyphosphate to
react.
(5) High velocity Jetting
Page 205
After the deflocculation material has been allowed to react for 12 – 24 hours, all sections screened
with continuous slot screen shall be developed by high velocity jetting. The jetting tool shall be
equipped with two (2) or four (4) nozzles. The nozzle design shall be such that it produces
concentrated jetting actions. The tool shall be inspected by the Engineer for approval before start of
the drilling operation. The jetting tool shall be equipped with a high pressure water pump capable of
producing a nozzle velocity of 50 – 70 m/second with suitable pressure gauge on discharge to
facilitate monitoring of nozzle velocity. The development shall be carried out by slowly rotating the
jetting tool and gradually lowering it in order to cover the entire surface of the screen. At the same
time as the high velocity jetting is performed, the well shall be discharged with a discharge rate
slightly higher than the discharge rate from the jetting tool. Each section of the screen shall be jetted
until the return water is free from drilling mud, but no section shall be jetted less than 20 minutes per
meter of screen.
(6) Development of Airlifting
Upon completion of high velocity jetting, or surging with plunger, the well shall be discharged by the
Airlifting Method. The compressor used for pumping by airlifting shall be capable of developing
minimum pressure of not less than 14 kg/cm² (200 psi). The delivery shall be no less than 7 cubic
meter air per minute. The quantity of water discharged from the well and the drawdown in the well at
the commencement of the development shall be limited and shall be gradually increased only as the
water clears. From time to time, the air flow shall be stopped to facilitate loosening of trapped sand
grains. The well may also be backwashed by pumping clean water into the well. During the airlifting
operation, position of air pipe and conductor pipe, drawdown on the well, approximate yield and the
time of each change in position shall be recorded by the Contractor. The development shall be
completed with a conductor pipe not more than 0.5 m. above the bottom of the well to ensure that all
sand has been cleaned out of the slump pipe.
(7) Acceptance of the Development
The development by the specified methods shall be repeated and continued until the well is
thoroughly developed. If the well yield after the well has been confirmed sand-free after testing is still
below the yield, the Engineer may instruct the Contractor to perform further development which is
considered acceptable for the penetrated aquifer.
1204.3.2 Well Testing
(1) Scope
The Contractor shall provide various tests for the following purposes;
(a) Step drawdown pumping test on the completed well

(b) Constant discharge pumping on the completed well
(c) Standard Methods of Water Analysis
(2) Equipment Capacity
The contractor shall provide and operate pumping machinery capable of carrying out the tests and
shall provide adequate controls to allow discharge rates to be kept constant at varying water levels
and to permit pumping with a variation of not more than 5% of the designated discharge rate during
any period of yield of aquifer testing. The pumping unit set shall be able to deliver a discharge rate
which has a minimum of 50% higher than the expected yield of the well; and the minimum discharge,
which has a maximum of 15% of the expected yield of the well when suitably throttled by use of a
gate valve.
Page 206
(a) Submersible electric pump together with generator and accessories to run the pump and shall
be of the following performance requirements:
Pump rated capacity – as indicated in the Plan

Pump rated TDH – as indicated in the Plan
Minimum efficiency – 60%
Pump service – automatic on/off
Motor rated capacity – as indicated in the Plan
Voltage – 230
Motor Phase – as indicated in the Plan
Frequency – 60Hz
(b) Centrifugal Pump shall be frame mounted, fitted with mechanical seal to prevent leakage.
Casing shall be volute type, bolted to bearing frame with rabbet fit to assure alignment. The pump
shall have a renewable casing wear ring, and enclosed cast iron impeller statically and dynamically
balanced. Bronze shaft sleeves shall be provided on large carbon steel shaft. Motor shall be
assembled as integral part of unit rabbet fitted to volute/bracket to assure permanent alignment with
the following performance and description;
Pump rated capacity – as indicated in the Plan

Pump rated TDH – as indicated in the Plan
Minimum efficiency – 60%
Pump service – automatic on/off
Motor rated capacity – as indicated in the Plan
Voltage – 230
Motor Phase – as indicated in the Plan
Frequency – 60Hz
(3) Equipment Operation
The Contractor shall supply and provide all competent personnel, equipments and accessories
necessary for installation and removal of pumps. Sufficient fuels, lubricants, spares and other
accessories needed shall be at all time available during the operation.
(a) Control of Discharge rate and Monitoring
During the pumping tests, a suitable gate valve on the discharge pipeline shall be installed to
facilitate easy control of the discharge rate. Discharge rates up to 15 lps (54 cu.m./hr.) may be
measured by drum filling. Discharge rates in excess of 15 lps shall be recorded with a water or by V-
notch weir.
(b) Equipment Breakdown during Pumping
The pumping must be continuous and at a constant rate during the pumping test. The Engineer shall
instruct the Contractor as to the expected maximum duration of each pumping test before start of
each test. If pumping is interrupted or the discharge rate fluctuates by more than 5% of the
designated discharge rate, the test maybe repeated after a period of recovery determined by the
Engineer. If any pumping test is interrupted because of equipment breakdown or inadequate
supervision or discharge control, no payment will made for any pumping period before
recommending the test.
Duration of Test
Page 207
The step – drawdown pumping test shall be performed on 5 steps with a duration of one (1) hour
each. The constant discharge pumping test shall be performed for a period of three (3) to five (5)
days, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
Temporary Pipeline
The Contractor shall provide a temporary pipeline, as directed by the Engineer, for the discharge
from pumping test and for clearance to a suitable water course or drain. Under certain circumstances
when re-infiltration can not be avoided or it is costly for this condition, the Engineer shall decide to
what distance from the well water may be discharged on the ground.
Standard Methods of Water Analysis
The Contractor shall develop the well by the method specified until the water pumped from the well is
substantially free from the sand and until the turbidity is less than 5 on the Silica Scale described in
the Standard method of Water Analysis (Latest edition as published by AWWA, APHA and WPCT).
The water pumped from the well shall not contained an amount of fine material in excess of 1.0
mg./liter when the well is pumped at its maximum expected yield. The equipment of measurement
shall be furnished by the Contractor.
1204.3.3 Cement Grouting
(1) General
The Contractor shall provide the cement and mixing equipment required for the grouting indicated in
the well design.
(2) Grouting Materials
Cement grout shall consist of a mixture of 95% Portland cement, 5% bentonite and clear mixed in a
proportion of 52.5 kilograms of Portland cement/ bentonite to a maximum of 30 liters of water. It
shall conform to all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.1.(Portland Cement).
Method of Placing Grout Material
The methods and equipment to be used shall be subject for approval of the Engineer. Any method
that does not provide for the forcing of grout to the bottom of the casing hole or annulus to be
grouted to the surface shall be rejected. Flushing of the annular space with fluid to assure filling the
voids, and the removal of loose materials shall be required before grouting is commenced. Sufficient
grout shall be mixed to complete the operation without interruption. No work shall be allowed on the
well within a period of 72 hours after completion of grouting unless a quick setting cement is used. In
such case, the idle period may be reduced to 24 hours. The Contractor shall provide such tanks,
hoppers and other equipment as may be necessary to meet this requirement.
1204.3.4 Well Disinfection and Cleaning
(1) General
Upon completion of well construction and well testing, the well area shall be thoroughly clean from all
foreign matters including tools, timbers, rope, debris of any kind, cement, oil, grease and scum, etc.
The casing pipe shall be thoroughly swabbed using alkalis, if necessary to remove oil and grease of
joint dope. Disinfection of the well shall follow after clearing the area.
Page 208
Chlorine Solution
The chlorine solution for disinfecting the well shall be of such volume and strength that a
concentration of at least 50 mg./liter of the solution shall be applied in all parts of the borehole. The
solution shall be prepared and applied in accordance with this direction.
Cleaning of Test Pump
In the event that the test pump is to be installed after the well has been disinfected, all external parts
of the test pump coming in contact with the water shall be dubbed with a chlorine solution
Disinfection procedure
Method A
Where deemed practical, the chlorine solution of standard concentration used to disinfect the well
shall be prepared on the surface in containers having a volume contained in the well. This prepared
solution shall then be discharged immediately into the well, care being taken to flush the walls of the
well above the water level.
Method B
In lieu of using liquid chlorine solutions, a perforated pipe container capped at both ends containing a
granular chlorine compound, HTM or Perchloron, may be moved up and down in the well by means
of a weighted cable. The amount of compound applied should be such as to provide the standard
concentration of compound.
1204.3.5 Well Completion
Site Restoration
The Contractor shall provide and operate all equipment necessary to restore the site as near to the
original condition as possible before demobilization. Works shall include but not limited to, restoration
of fences and structures, removal of drill cuttings, leveling of the disturbed ground surfaces and
replacement or compensation of the destroyed plants and landscaping.
Well Head Capping
The well head shall be completed with a well head assembly fully welded to the upper casing as well
as a water level sounding tube with screw cap in order to prevent any unauthorized tampering of the
well.
The quantity to be paid for will be the final quantity placed and accepted in the completed well water system.
Work on this item shall be considered to include the cost of drilling, logging, casing, screens, stabilizer/ gravel
pack, development, testing, grouting, disinfection, commissioning and incidental work to complete this item.
The accepted quantities measured prescribed in Section above, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for
each of the pay item listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities.
Page 209
Payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, placing all materials including labor, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in the item.
1204 (1) Pump and Motor Lump sum

1204 (2) Well Development Lump sum
1204 (3) Monitoring Well Lump sum
Page 210
MISCELLANEOUS
WORKS
Part G
PART G MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
ITEM 1300 – SANITARY LANDFILL
1300.1 Description
This item shall consist of the construction of Sanitary Landfill is composed of solid waste retaining structure,
defined as disposal cell, surface water drainage, gas venting, and leachate collection facility in accordance
with this Specification and in reasonably close conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Plans or as
directed by the Engineer.
Materials shall meet the requirements specified in the following specifications:
1300.2.1 Landfill Liner System
The landfill liner or base liner system shall be the typical cross-section on top of the final waste layer, after the
disposal site has been completely filled. The liner system should be at least consisting of clay and/or
geosynthetic membranes (geomembrane). If clay is used, it shall have a minimum thickness of 0.75m and
permeability of 1x10-6 cm/sec or less. Geomembranes shall be at least 1.5 mm thick with a permeability of
1x10-14 cm/sec or less; Geosynthetic Clay Liners (GCL) shall have a thickness of at least 6.4 mm and a
permeability of 1x10-9 cm/sec or less. If composite liner is used (clay under geo-membrane), the thickness of
the clay liner may be reduced to 0.60 m. The overlying geomembrane shall have the same properties as
stated above. (Rule XIV, Operation of Sanitary Landfill; IRR of RA 9003). All landfill liners shall consist of the
following components;
a. Sub-base
b. Base
c. Clay Liner component
d. Bottom Liner and Leak Detection System
e. Soil Liner component
f. Flexible Membrane Liner Component
g. Leachate Collection System
h. Cushion Layer or Filter Materials
1300.2.1.1 Subbase
The subbase of the landfill liner system is the lowest point of the excavated area upon which the liner system
is to be placed. The subbase will be an in-situ material of sufficient bearing capacity to support the material to
Page 211
be placed above it during the lifespan of the facility. Material encountered in the subbase which does not meet
the required bearing capacity shall be excavated and replaced with appropriate structural fill material.
1300.2.1.2 Base
The base shall consist of material above the subbase with a minimum 300 mm thickness. There shall not be
any bedrock or other rock outcroppings less than 300 mm below the surface of the base. The base material
shall have a minimum hydraulic conductivity of at least 1 x 10-3 cm/sec.
1300.2.1.3 Bottom Liner and Leak Detection System
The Bottom Liner and Leak Detection System is to be installed such that it can provide for the detection and
collection of a leak through the composite liner system. The seasonal high elevation of ground water elevation
should not be higher than one meter below the lowest elevation of the leak detection system.
The flexible membrane liner portion of the Bottom Liner and Leak Detection System must be manufactured of
high density polyethylene (HDPE) of a minimum 60 mil thickness.
1300.2.1.4 Soil Liner Component
1. The soil liner component should have the following characteristic:
(a) The soil liner should be protected during and after construction from damage due to desiccation, over-
hydration, differential movement and impact;
(b) The soil liner shall be no less than 1000 mm in depth or as stated in the Plans;
(c) The soil liner should be placed in uniform, horizontal lifts of about 150 mm maximum loose thickness and
constructed to ensure that the minimum hydraulic conductivity of the compacted soil is 1 x 10-7 cm/sec or less;
(d) The proponent must specify the minimum hydraulic conductivity of the compacted soil, the compacted
density of the soil required to obtain the design hydraulic conductivity and the optimum moisture content
required to achieve the design hydraulic conductivity;
(e) The soil may be amended, if required, with an admixture such as bentonite clay in order to achieve the
required hydraulic permeability, however, the hydraulic conductivity must be uniform throughout the entire
thickness of the soil.
2. Alternate technologies may be employed in the designer system other than that described in items (a) to
(d). If the Contractor wishes to use alternates, the Procuring Entity may considered this methods
provided:
(a) Items (a) through (c) inclusive of Soil Liner Component have been met; and
(b) A detailed analysis has been presented to the Procuring Entity and the alternative technology has
satisfied and is suitable for this application. The detailed analysis must demonstrate that the
materials in question meet or exceed the performance of the soil component described in Item (d)
above.
1300.2.1.5 Flexible Membrane Liner Component
The Flexible Membrane Liner (FML) component must be manufactured of a High Density Polyethylene
(HDPE) of a minimum of 60 mil thickness.
Page 212
For geosynthetic liners, ASTM standards______ shall be used for its design and specifications in terms of
properties, manufacturing and construction quality assurance and testing procedures.
1300.2.1.6 Leachate Collection System
The leachate collection layer is to provide a means of collecting all of the leachate without exceeding the
leachate depth of 300 mm. The leachate collection system must be able to convey all of the leachate to a
common point for a treatment as required. The leachate collection layer should have a hydraulic conductivity
of 1 x 10-3 cm/sec or greater. The collection system should be sloped such that it can adequately drain the
leachate. The sloping should account for the possibility of settling occurring beneath the collection system
network.
1. Use 300mm diameter PVC perforated pipe to be used on drain pipe and to convey leachate towards
leachate pond.
2. PVC pipe shall be approved by the owner’s representative prior to use.
1300.2.1.7 Cushion Layer or Filter Materials
A minimum of 300 mm. cushion layer should be placed above the leachate collection layer. The layer should
be of structural fill material capable of separating waste material from the leachate collection layer.
Materials to be used such as sand and gravel filter is in accordance with Subsection 311.2.2 to 2.3 (Portland
Cement Concrete Pavement) including as stated in Subsection 505.2.2 under Filter Material Requirements.
1300.2.2 Recirculating Hose, Submersible Pump and Electrical System
1300.2.2.1 Recirculating Hose
PVC hose pipe maybe used with a diameter of 2 inches and to be connected to the pump at its threaded end.
A flexible rubber tubing or collapsible material may likewise be used as an alternative and is in accordance
with ASTM standards.
1300.2.2.2 Submersible Pump
This item shall conform to the requirement of Item 1201.1, Water Pump.
1300.2.2.3 Electrical System
This item shall conform to the requirement of Item 1101, Wires and Devices and Item 1102, Power Load and
Switch Gear.
1300.3.1 Landfill Construction and Methodology
Step 1. Land survey shall be undertaken to determine the lot boundaries including monumenting the lot
points in accordance with the lot technical description. The clearing and grubbing shall be in
accordance with Subsection 100.2.2.
Step 2. Determine the area of the landfill to be excavated including the landfill. The access road has to be
completed first prior to excavation of the pit for the dump truck accessibility. The road shall be
Page 213
leveled and stabilized free from obstruction and have a reasonable gradient for truck to reach the
upper portion of the landfill.
Step 3. After the landfill has been stripped of all vegetation and debris, as specified in Section 1, the
excavated material shall be stockpiled at the edge of the landfill access roadway as shown on the
drawing at method of landfill construction. Excess excavated material shall be stockpiled at the
area and location approved by the Engineer. Excavation is in accordance with Subsection 102.
As shown on the drawing, excavation of Disposal Cell will be divided into two Cells, Cell A is the
portion of area of Disposal Cell and located at the upper portion and with an approximate area as
shown on the Plan. Cell B is the lower part of Disposal Cell. Cell A will be the first area to be
excavated up to bottom elevation. While excavating, the excavated material shall be dumped at
the side of the landfill access road without obstructing the flow of traffic. The excavated material at
the side of the road shall serve as an embankment thereby preventing the flow of rainwater from
entering the pit. It will likewise serve as a cover soil of waste for each day’s operation and shall be
refilled form time to time with the excess excavated material. It is therefore recommended that the
excess material from the pit be placed near the embankment for easy refilling.
The Contractor shall remove and dispose all excess excavated material in a manner approved by
the Engineer, and shall be paid based on the unit rate indicated in the bill of quantities. The
disposal shall be in accordance with Subsection 102.2.3.
Step 4. Installation of Leachate Pipe
1) Method of Laying Down
The leachate pipe shall be installed on the trench after sand material is spread on a fully
compacted soil layer. The perforated pipe is a 300 diameter PVC material, which has a
thickness of 12 mm, which can adequately withstand the waste loads and shall be approved
by the Engineer in charge of construction. It shall have a gradient a minimum slope of 3%
towards the leachate pond and shall be supported by a concrete mortar spaced at 2.50 m
interval to maintain alignment and avoid movement. All necessary fittings and connection
joints shall be provided as approved by the Engineer.
2) Provide Gravel Material as Filter of Leachate Pipe
After the perforated material has been in place, a 250 mm thick gravel layer of material shall
be placed on top to serve as filter.
Step 5. Landfilling Method
The solid waste shall be landfilled in such a way that it is sufficiently compacted so as to stabilize
the landfill foundation and to prolong the lifespan of the landfill site. Layers of cover soil with a
thickness of 15 cm to 30 cm shall be systematically placed and compacted after landfilling of solid
waste for each layer. This completed filled area for one day including the cover soil is called a Cell.
The waste shall be unloaded at the top of the last Cell spread and compacted using the slope of
that Cell as support for compaction when all the areas are connected by one layer of Cell it is
called a lift. One more can be constructed on the top of the proceeding lift as long as it does not
surpass the designed final topography of the area. Landfilling shall be initially held at elevation
305.00, which has a total height of two meters.
Step 6. The next step after filling Cell A up to elevation 305 is the excavation of Cell B up to bottom elevation
of 302.0. The excavation and dumping of excavated material shall be the same as in step 3.
Page 214
Step 7. Install gas vent for methane gas management. The main function of gas venting is to release the
gases generated from the landfill layers as soon as possible as it creates a negative environmental
impact on surrounding areas. It also indirectly accelerates the stabilization process of the landfill
site. The PVC perforated pipe is installed vertically and is supported by gravel measuring about
800 mm x 800 mm and will be extended as the landfilling progresses.
Step 8. Landfilling method will be the same as in Step 4 and up to elevation 305.00.
Step 9. Landfilling shall be resumed at Cell A towards Cell B and the method will still be the same as Step
4 until reaching the final elevation of the landfill.
Step 10. Top Soil Cover
The final cover should be the cover soil laid on top of the final waste layer after the disposal site
has been completed. The purpose of the final cover is to provide improvement to sanitary
conditions, the landscape, post-closure land use, and the reduction of the leachate quantity.
Reduction of foul odor, prevention of outbreak of fire, etc. The final cover should be at least 60 cm,
which includes 15 cm topsoil, and 45 cm. Compacted soil. The excess excavated material taken
from the pit shall be used as the cover soil.
1300.3.2 Pipeline Trench Excavation
1. General
Unless otherwise shown or ordered, excavation of pipelines shall be an open-cut trench. The bottom of the
trench, including any shoring shall have a minimum width equal to the outside diameter of the pipe plus 300
mm (12 in) and a maximum width equal to the outside diameter of the pipe plus 600 mm (24 in). Except when
otherwise shown or ordered by the Engineer, the bottom of the trench shall be excavated uniformly to the
grade of the bottom of the pipe.
The trench bottom shall be given a final trim using a string line for establishing grade, such that each pipe
section when first laid will be wholly in contact with the ground or bedding along the extreme bottom of the
pipe. Rounding out the trench to form a cradle will not be required.
The maximum length of open trench permitted at any one time and in one location shall be 300 meters, or the
length necessary to accommodate the amount of pipe installed in a single day, whichever is greater. All newly
laid pipes shall be backfilled at least 150 mm (6 in) above the top of the pipe at the end of each day. The
remainder of the trench shall be backfilled not later than the following day. Barricades and waning lights
satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and maintained for all trenches left open overnight except at
intersections and driveways in which case heavy steel plates, adequately braced bridges or other type of
crossing capable of supporting vehicular traffic shall be furnished as directed by the Engineer.
2. Trench Over-Excavation Where Shown
The trenches shall be over-excavated where shown, to the depth shown, then backfilled to the grade of the
bottom of the pipe with suitable selected granular material or with sand. Said backfill shall be brought to the
optimum moisture content and compacted to ninety-five percent of maximum density under proposed
structures, and ninety percent elsewhere. The Contractor at his own expense shall perform work specified in
this Subsection.
3. Trench Over-Excavation to Clear Obstructions
Page 215
Trenches shall be over-excavated to a depth approved by the Engineer for pipeline clearance of obstructions.
All work specified in this Subsection shall be performed by the Contractor at his own expense when the over-
excavation plus the cover of the pipe measured to existing ground surface does not exceed 1.5 meters: when
the additional over-excavation plus the cover of the pipe measured to existing ground surface exceeds 1.5
meters, additional payment will be made to the Contractor for the portion of work located below said depth.
Said additional payment will be made under separate unit price items for over-excavation if such bid items
have been established; otherwise, payment will be made in accordance with negotiated prices.
4. Trench Over-Excavation When Ordered
Trench shall be over-excavated beyond the depth shown when ordered by the Engineer. Such over-
excavation shall be to the depth ordered. The trench shall be refilled to the grade of the bottom of the pipe
with either selected granular material obtained from the excavation, sand, or crushed rock, at the option of the
Engineer.
When crushed rock bedding is ordered, well-graded material of 40 mm (1.6 in.) maximum size shall be used.
Bedding material shall be placed in layers, brought to optimum moisture content, and compacted to ninety-five
percent of maximum density where the pipeline trench passes under structures, and ninety percent
elsewhere.
5. Over-Excavation Not Ordered, Specified, or Shown
Any over-excavation carried below the grade ordered, specified, or shown shall be refilled to the required
grade with suitable selected granular material by the Contractor at his own expense. Such material shall be
moistened as required and compacted to ninety-five percent of maximum density under structures and ninety
percent elsewhere.
8. Excavation in Lawn Areas
Where pipeline excavation occurs in the lawn area, the sod shall be carefully removed and stockpiled to
preserve it for replacement. Excavated material from the trench may be placed on the lawn provided a drop
cloth or other suitable method is employed to protect the lawn from damage. The lawn shall not remain
covered for more than seventy-two hours.
Immediately after completion of backfilling and testing of the pipeline, the sod shall be replaced in a manner
so as to restore the lawn as near as possible to its original condition.
9. Excavation in Vicinity of Trees
Except where trees are shown on the drawings to be removed, trees shall be protected from injury during
construction operations; and no tree is to be removed without written permission form the Engineer. No tree
roots over 50 mm (2 in) in diameter shall be cut without the permission of the Engineer. Trees shall be
supported during excavation as may be directed by the Engineer.
10. Rock Excavation
Rock excavation shall include removal and disposal of the following: (1) all boulders measuring 0.25 cubic
meters (0.33 yd3) or more in volume; (2) all rock material in ledges, bedding deposits, and uncertified masses
which cannot be removed without systematic drilling and blasting.
1300.3.3 Backfill
Page 216
1300.3.3.1 General
Backfill shall not be dropped directly upon any structure or pipe. Materials used for backfill shall be selected
materials, free from grass, roots, crush, or other vegetation, or rocks having maximum dimension larger than
150 mm (6 in). Material placed within 150 mm (6 in) of any structure or pipe shall be free of rocks or unbroken
masses or earthly materials having maximum dimension larger than 75 mm (3 in).
Backfill shall not be placed around nor upon any structure until the concrete has attained sufficient strength to
withstand the loads imposed. Backfill around water-retaining structures shall be placed until the structures
have been tested, and the structures shall be full of water while backfill is being placed.
1300.3.3.2 Backfill Around and Beneath Proposed Structures and Paved Areas
Except where otherwise specified for a particular structure or ordered by the Engineer, backfill placed around
and beneath proposed structures and paved areas shall be placed in horizontal layers not to exceed 200 mm
(8 in) in thickness, as measured before compaction, where compaction is attained by means of sheep foot
rollers. Where the use of sheep foot rollers is impractical, the layers shall not exceed 150 mm (6 in) in
thickness before compaction, and compaction shall be attained by means of hand-operated power driven
tampers.
The backfill shall be brought up evenly with each layer moistened and compacted by mechanical means to
ninety-five percent of maximum density beneath proposed structures, and ninety percent of maximum density
around the sides of structures and beneath proposed paved areas.
1300.3.3.3 Pipeline Trench Backfill
1. Pipeline trenches shall be backfilled to a level of 150 mm (6 in) above the top of the pipe with selected
material obtained from the excavation; if, in the Engineer’s opinion said material is unsuitable for backfill
purposes, borrow material having the sand equivalent value of not less than twenty (ASTM D-2419) shall
be used for this portion of the trench backfill.
Borrow material, when ordered by the Engineer, will be paid for under a separated unit price bid item if
such bid item has been established.
Selected material shall first be brought up to mid-diameter of the pipe and compacted; then the remainder
of the backfill to 150 mm (6 in) above the pipe may be placed and compacted. Such material shall be
compacted to ninety-five percent of maximum density where the trench is located under proposed
structures, and ninety percent of maximum density elsewhere.
Compaction shall be obtained by tamping in not more than 150 mm (6 in) layers of backfill or by using
excess water and passing a concrete vibrator between the pipe and side of trench. Prior to any flooding
or jetting, the pipe shall be dilled with water or center loaded with backfill to prevent floating.
2. After the initial portion of backfill has been placed as specified above, the remainder of the trench shall be
backfilled. When compaction of the initial portion of backfill is obtained with excess water, not less than
four hours shall have elapsed between the placement of initial backfill and subsequent backfill.
a. ninety-five percent of maximum density where the trench is located under existing or proposed
asphalt or concrete surface;
b. ninety percent of maximum density where trench is located under existing or proposed asphalt or
concrete surface;
c. eighty percent of maximum density where the trench is located under unpaved shoulders, gravel
roadways or dirt roads;
Page 217
d. one hundred percent of the natural density of the surroundings areas where the trench is located in
unimproved right-of-way.
If the backfill material is sandy or granular in nature and the trench is not located under a structure, the
layer construction may be eliminated; and compaction may be obtained by flooding and jetting, provided
this latter method is approved by the agency having jurisdiction over the highway or street.
If flooding and jetting are permitted, the remaining backfill shall be placed in layers not exceeding 900
mm (36 in) thickness. Each layer shall be flooded, and rodded to secure complete saturation of the
material before placing the next layer.
1300.3.3.4 Excavation Beneath Propose Structures
Except where otherwise specified for a particular structure or ordered by the Engineer, excavation shall be
carried to the grade of the bottom of the footing or slab. Where shown or ordered, areas beneath proposed
structures shall be over-excavated. When such over-excavation is shown on the Drawings, the Contractor at
his own expense shall perform both over-excavation and subsequent backfill to the required grade. When
such over-excavation and any resulting backfill will be paid for under a separate unit price bid item if such bid
item has been established: otherwise, payment will be made in accordance with negotiated prices. After the
required excavation or over-excavation has been completed, the exposed surface shall be scarified to a depth
of 150mm (6 inches) brought to optimum moisture content, and rolled with heavy compaction equipment to
ninety-five percent of maximum density.
Excavation under areas to be paved shall extend to the bottom of the aggregate base, if such base is called
for; otherwise, it shall extend to the bottom of paving. After the required excavation has been completed, the
exposed surface shall be scarified, brought to optimum moisture content, and rolled with heavy compaction
equipment to ninety percent of maximum density. All excavation and trenching operations shall conform to
any and all national, provincial, and local safety requirements.
1300.3.3.5 Compaction Tests
Where the backfill is required to be compacted to a specified density, tests for compliance may be made by
and all the expense of the Contractor, using the test procedure specified in Methods of tests for Moisture
Density Relation in Soils using a 10-1b hammer and 18-inch drop (ASTM D 1557), modified to use three
layers. All field density tests shall be performed in accordance with the test procedure specified in “Method of
Test for density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method” (ASTM D 1556).
1300.3.3.6 Installation of Submersible Pump, Recirculating Hose and Gage
Prior to installation of the submersible pump, the civil works shall have been completed to determine the final
layout of the pipe. The pipe shall be supported on ground every 2.00 meter-interval by anchor blocks to
prevent pipe movement. It is recommended that the pipe shall not be buried for maintenance purposes. The
gage shall be installed near the submersible pump above the manhole to determine the level of accumulated
leachate.
1300.3.3.7 Electrical System
The power of the submersible pump, which is located and controlled in the guardhouse, will be switched on to
start the pump. The pump inside the second chamber is provided with a flexible tubing length sufficient to
reach the disposal cell and where the leachate will be directed. It is the discretion of the operator to switch off
the pump as the level of the leachate decreases or emptied. It is recommended that a second switch near the
pond be provided for easy operation or is already incorporated with the pump.
Page 218
1300.4 Operation Requirements
1300.4.1 Recirculation of Leachate
Leachate generated from the disposal cell is collected by the perforated pipe installed below as shown on
drawing DP - 1A and will be further collected and flowed towards the leachate pond with required gradient.
The leachate pond is composed of two chambers; the first chamber will serve as a retention pond on which
sediments will be allowed to precipitate below by gravity. The leachate at the upper portion of the first
chamber, when it reaches the weir that divides the two chambers, will flow to the second chamber. The
second chamber is provided with a sewage pump, which will serve to pump out the leachate accumulated
when it reaches the prescribed level. A transparent tubing with level marks is provided outside the leachate
pond near the face of the second chamber to determine when it is time to dislodge the leachate.
The power which is located and controlled in the guardhouse will be switched on to start the pump. The pump
inside the second chamber is provided with a flexible tubing length sufficient to reach the disposal cell and
where the leachate will be directed. It is the discretion of the operator to switch off the pump as the level of the
leachate decreases or emptied. It is recommended that a second switch near the pond be provided for easy
operation or is already incorporated with the pump.
The process of operation will be repeated when the level of leachate as indicated in the transparent tubing
with graduated level reaches again the level prescribed.
1300.4.2 Top Soil
The final soil cover or top soil shall be the cover laid on top of the final waste layer, after the disposal site has
been completed. The final soil cover should be at least 60 cm which include 15 cm top soil and 45 cm
compacted soil (DAO No. 2001-34 IRR of RA 9003). The top soil, which is usually not compacted, will serve
as protection layer as well as support for the plant growth.
Excavated soil material shall be properly dumped in a designated area approved by the Engineer and shall be
used as top soil during closure of the disposal cell.
Soil Treatment
All buildings, namely composting, administration, material recovery facility, and guardhouse shall be subjected
to soil treatment to protect the structures from attack of termites and other insects. Soil treatment shall be in
accordance with the application as indicated in the direction for use of the supplier.
Sample shall be submitted to the owner’s representative for approval prior to purchase and application.
Protection from Vermins to Disposal Cell and Surrounding Areas
Contractor responsible for the construction of Disposal Cell shall include the purchase of treatment against
vermins. Vermins treatment shall be in accordance with the application as indicated in direction for use of the
supplier.
Sample shall be submitted to owner’s representative for approval prior to purchase and application.
The cost of excavation of material which is incorporated in the works or other areas of fill shall be deemed to
be included in the Items of work where the material is used.
Page 219
For measurement purposes, surplus suitable material shall be calculated as the difference between the net
volume of suitable material required to be used in embankment or cover material corrected by applying a
shrinkage factor or swell factor in case of rock excavation, determined by laboratory tests to get its original
volume measurement, and the net volume of suitable material from excavation in the original position.
Separate pay items shall be provided for surplus common, unclassified and rock material.
1300.5 Basis for Payment
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 1300.4, shall be paid for the contract unit price
for each of the particular pay items listed below that are included in the Bill of Quantities which price and
payment shall be full compensation for the removal and disposal of excavated materials including all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this item.
1300 (1) Common Excavation cubic meter

1300 (2) PVC Pipes
and Fittings (size and sch) lengths
1300 (3) Hose Lump sum

1300 (4) Pump (hp) Lot
1300 (5) Electrical wiring, etc. Lot
Page 220

Standard Technical Specification

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Standard Technical Specification

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Section V.

For LLDA-LISCOP Subproject

Laguna Lake Development Authority

(SGD.) DOLORA N. NEPOMUCENO

ITEM NO. Page No.

ITEM 405 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE ....................................................................57

604.4 Method of Measurement ................................................................................91

1000.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................120

1008.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................147

ITEM 1018 CERAMIC TILES.........................................................................................171

1101.5 Basis of Payment..........................................................................................191

Table 200.1 Grading Requirements................................................................................................................. 23

ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transport Officials

VOLUME I TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS for HIGHWAYS, DRAINAGE, SLOPE PROTECTION and

DRAINAGE, SLOPE PROTECTION and

A1.1 Scope of Work

A1.2 Mobilization and Demobilization

A1.3 Contractor’s Field Office and Facilities

A1.3.1 Field Office

A1.3.2 Temporary Light and Power

A1.3.4 Temporary Water Service

A1.4 Facilities for the Engineer

A1.4.1 Field Office

A1.4.2 Site Utilities

A1.5 Compliance with Contract Requirements

A1.5.1 Control of on Site Construction

A1.5.2 Preconstruction Meetings

A1.5.3 Progress Meetings

A1.5.4 Progress Reports and Construction Logbook

A1.5.5 Survey Data

A1.5.6 Shop Drawings

A1.5.7 Construction Photographs

A1.5.9 Documents to be Submitted

A1.6 Method of Measurement

Work prescribed in this Section shall be measured as follows:

A1.7 Basis of Payment

ITEM 100 - CLEARING AND GRUBBING

100.2 Construction Requirements

100.2.2 Clearing and Grubbing

100.2.3 Individual Removal of Trees or Stumps

100.3 Method of Measurement

Measurement will be by one or more of the following alternate methods:

Diameter at height of 1.4m Pay Item Description

Over 150 mm to 900mm Small

100.4 Basis of Payment

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement

100 (1) Site Preparation Square meter

100 (2) Individual Removal of Each

100 (3) Individual Removal of Each

ITEM 102 - EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING AND DISPOSAL

102.2 Construction Requirements

102.2.2 Conservation of Topsoil

102.2.3 Utilization of Excavated Materials

102.2.4 Excavation of Ditches, Gutters, etc.

102.2.5 Removal of Unsuitable Materials

102.3 Method of Measurement

102.4 Basis of Payments

Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement

102 (1) Unsuitable Excavation m3

ITEM 200 AGGREGATE SUB-BASE COURSE

200.2 Material Requirements

The sub- base material shall conform to Table 200.1.